Philips Medical Systems

Meridian
Technical Manual

Part Number: 1MAN0343-B03

All pages of this document contain proprietary and confidential information of Philips Medical Systems, Inc. The documents are intended for current Philips
Medical Systems, Inc. personnel or are licensed to Philips Medical Systems, Inc. customer for use by the customer’s in-house service employee on equipment
located at the customer’s designated site. Copying, disclosure to others or other use is prohibited without the express written authorization of Philips Medical
Systems, Inc. Law Department. Report violation of these requirements to the Philips Medical Systems, Inc. Law Department.

Philips Medical Systems Inc.

© 2002 All rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
 REVISION HISTORY

REVISION DATE COMMENTS EFFECTIVE PAGES

A 3/10/03 First release of manual for 9UNT1100 Meridian System All
7/31/03 Updated manual All
27/07/11 Update of chapter 12.3.4.3 and new 12.3.4.4

TRADEMARKS
ADAC®, CPET® Imaging System, CPET® Plus Imaging System, FORTETM, CardioTM, CardioMDTM, CardioTracTM,
CardioTM 60, GlobalQ®, SolusTM, VertexTM, VertexTM Plus, VertexTM 60, EPICTM, PegasysTM, PegasysTMX,
PegasysTMMD, PegasysTMMD+, PegasysTM Ultra, AtlasTM, AutoQUANT®, ARGUS®, GENESYS®, AutoSPECT®,
AutoSPECT®Plus, CardiaQ®, PINNACLE®, SMARTSIM®, P3IMRT®, InStill®, INSYNCTM, P3MDTM, PIXELARTM,
ALLEGROTM, JetStreamTM, DELTA PIXEL BEAMTM, SKYLight®, PETPLANTM, APETTM, TranscamTM, SKYTableTM,
MidasTM, ShadowTM, VantageTM, ExSPECTTM, ACCESSTM, X-ACTTM, FlexLOGICTM, TeleLOGICTM, InteLOGICTM,
SENTRYTM, VersaTableTM, ColliMATETM, EZXTM, CCTTM, WebViewTM, MCD/ACTM and GEMINITM are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Philips Medical Systems.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Acrobat logo, and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated or its
subsidiaries and may be registered in certain jurisdictions.
Sun, SunView, NFS, OpenWindows, and SPARCstation are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
SPARC is a registered trademark of SPARC International, Inc.
SPARCstation is a trademark of SPARC International, Inc. licensed exclusively to Sun Microsystems, Inc.
UNIX and OPEN LOOK are registered trademarks of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
X Window System is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
Other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.ODYSSEY™ is a
trademark of Philips Medical Systems, Inc.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 1-1

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 IEC SYMBOL DESCRIPTIONS
ON / Power
ALTERNATING CURRENT
OFF / Power

WARNING. Indicates where not following

the procedure exactly as described may be
dangerous and possibly cause bodily injury
TYPE B EQUIPMENT
or death. Please consult accompanying
documents for detailed instructions before
proceeding.
Denotes that a HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE is
present. Indicates where not following the
procedure exactly as described may be Denotes Protective Earth Point
dangerous and possibly cause bodily injury
or death.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 1-2

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 NOTICE
The information contained in this manual conforms with the configuration of the equipment as of the date of manufacture. Revisions to the
equipment subsequent to the date of manufacture will be addressed in service updates distributed to the PHILIPS Technical Service Organization.

TO THE USER OF THIS MANUAL

The user of this manual is directed to read and carefully review the instructions, warnings and cautions contained herein prior to beginning
installation or service activities. While you may have previously installed or serviced equipment similar to that described in this manual, changes in
design, manufacture or procedure may have occurred which significantly affect the present installation or service.
The installation and service of equipment described herein is to be performed by authorized, qualified Philips Medical Systems personnel.
Assemblers and other personnel not employed by nor directly affiliated with Philips Medical Systems Technical Services are directed to contact the
local Philips office before attempting installation or service procedures.

INSTALLATION AND ENVIRONMENT

Except for installations requiring certification by the manufacturer per federal standards, see that a radiation protection survey is made by a
qualified expert in accordance with NCRP 102, section 7, as revised or replaced in the future. Perform a survey after every change in equipment,
workload, or operating conditions which might significantly increase the probability of persons receiving more than the maximum permissible dose
equivalent.

DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING SYSTEMS

Mechanical–electrical warning
All of the moveable assemblies and parts of this equipment should be operated with care and routinely inspected in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations contained in the equipment manuals.
Only properly trained and qualified personnel should be permitted access to any internal parts. Live electrical terminals are deadly; be sure line
disconnects are opened and other appropriate precautions are taken before opening access doors, removing enclosure panels, or attaching
accessories.
Failure to comply with the above may result in serious or fatal bodily injuries to the operator or those in the area.

Electrical–grounding Instructions
The equipment must be grounded to an earth ground by a separate conductor. The neutral side of the line is not to be considered the earth
ground. On equipment provided with a line cord, the equipment must be connected to properly grounded, three–pin receptacle. Do not use a
three–to–two pin adapter.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 1-3

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING SYSTEMS
Radiation Warning
Gamma–rays are dangerous to both operator and others in the vicinity unless established safe exposure procedures are strictly observed.
The useful and scattered beams can produce serious or fatal bodily injuries to any persons in the surrounding area if used by an unskilled
operator. Adequate precautions must always be taken to avoid exposure to the useful beam, as well as to leakage radiation from within the
source housing or to scattered radiation resulting from the passage of radiation through matter.
Those authorized to operate, participate in or supervise the operation of the equipment must be thoroughly familiar and comply completely with
the current established safe exposure factors and procedures described in publications, such as: subchapter j of title 21 of the code of federal
regulations, “Diagnostic x–ray systems and their major components”, and the national council on radiation protection (NCRP) no. 102, “medical x–
ray and gamma–ray protection for energies up to 10 MeV–equipment design and use”, as revised or replaced in the future.
Those responsible for planning of gamma–ray equipment installations must be thoroughly familiar and comply completely with NCRP no. 49,
“Structural shielding design and evaluation for medical of x–rays and gamma–rays of energies up to 10 MeV”, as revised and replaced in the
future.
Failure to observe these warnings may cause serious or fatal bodily injuries to the operator or those in the area.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 1-4

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 TYPE CONVENTIONS
Throughout this manual, certain types of information are set apart from the normal text: notes, cautions, warnings,
electrical warnings, and radiation warnings.

NOTE
Informs you of exceptions to general rules or reminds you of important information.

CAUTION
Informs you that you could damage your equipment or lose data if the written procedure
is not followed.

WARNING
Indicates where not following the procedure exactly as described may be dangerous
and possibly cause bodily injury or death.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 1-5

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 TYPE CONVENTIONS (CONT.)

WARNING
Hazardous voltage present. Indicates where not following the procedure exactly as
described may be dangerous and possibly cause bodily injury or death.

WARNING
Indicates actual or potential presence of ionizing radiation and to identify objects,
devices and materials which emit ionizing radiation.

Different typefaces are used to help interpret the meaning or context of certain words and phrases. The following is an
explanation of the type conventions used:
• Pushbuttons (e.g. on the hand controller) and switches (e.g. power switch on the system) are shown in THIS
TYPEFACE. For example:
Press POWER located on the front of the monitor.
• Keyboard keys are shown in THIS typeface and enclosed in square brackets ([ ]). For example:
Press [ENTER] to move to the next form.
• Buttons that appear on the terminal screen (e.g. in a window are shown in this typeface. For example:
Click OK to close the dialog box.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 1-6

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 TYPE CONVENTIONS (CONT.)
• Screen selections that appear on the console screen (e.g. items that you scroll through in a field) are shown in this
typeface.
For example:
Choices you can scroll through are Head First, Feet First.
• Screen messages or prompts are shown in this typeface. For example:
When you see the prom1> prompt, it is safe to turn the ODYSSEY power off.
• Entries to be typed at a keyboard are shown in this typeface. For example:
At the login: prompt, type shutdown [ENTER].
• Keyboard entry variables are shown in this typeface. For example:
To display a file to the screen, the command line looks like:
more filename [ENTER].
• Optional keyboard entries are shown in this typeface and enclosed in square brackets ([ ]). For example:
The command line to display a listing of the entire contents of a directory in the long format looks like:
ls [–l] [–a] [ENTER].
• Software filenames and directories (if not shown as part of a screen display) are shown in this typeface. For example:
The /prism/site directory stores all the site-specific information.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 1-7

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
1 INTRODUCTION
This manual comprises the Meridian Service Manual. The manual gives a detailed description of the Meridian Single
Detector Camera.

The manual is sectioned to ease readability and includes the following chapters:

Chapter 2 covers safety concerns when operating the Meridian system.

Chapter 3 gives a short overview of the Meridian system.

Chapter 4 gives a more detailed description of the different components comprising Meridian.

Chapter 5 details how to calibrate both the motion axes and the Meridian detector.

Chapter 6 gives guidance to diagnosing Meridian in case of faults.

Chapter 7 specifies repair procedures.

Chapter 8 gives guidance on software and firmware updating and programming.

Chapter 9 includes information for installing Meridian at customer sites.

Chapter 10 holds a list of field replaceable units.

Chapter 11 details how to measure NEMA performance on the Meridian system.

Chapter 12 specifies requirements for planned maintenance on Meridian.

Chapter 13 provides an overview of the cables belonging to the Meridian system.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 1-8

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-8
2 SAFETY CONCERNS .................................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1 About this Chapter ........................................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.2 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 Safe Operating Practices.............................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.4 IEC Symbols Used ....................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.5 Definitions..................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.6 Restrictions on Use ...................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.7 Hazards ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-5
2.8 Emergency Stop ........................................................................................................................................... 2-9
3 SYSTEM OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 System Components .................................................................................................................................... 3-3
4 DETAILED SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 About This Chapter ...................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2 Gantry........................................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.3 Detector ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-35
4.4 Acquisition PC ............................................................................................................................................ 4-45
4.5 Hand Controller .......................................................................................................................................... 4-45
5 CALIBRATIONS .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 About this Chapter ........................................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.2 Detector Calibrations .................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3 Detector Performance Tests....................................................................................................................... 5-60
5.4 Motion Alignments ...................................................................................................................................... 5-80
5.5 Motion Limit Checks ................................................................................................................................... 5-96
6 DIAGNOSTICS............................................................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.1 About This Chapter ...................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2 External LED Indicators ................................................................................................................................ 6-3

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 1-9

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 6.3 Internal LED Indicators ................................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.4 Test Terminals ............................................................................................................................................ 6-19
6.5 Diagnostics Software Utilities ..................................................................................................................... 6-29
6.6 Identification of Acquisition Files ................................................................................................................ 6-66
6.7 Detector Calibration Files ........................................................................................................................... 6-73
7 REPAIR PROCEDURES .............................................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1 About This Chapter ...................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2 Gantry Repairs ............................................................................................................................................. 7-2
7.3 Detector Repairs ........................................................................................................................................ 7-31
7.4 Collimator Cart ........................................................................................................................................... 7-36
8 SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURES ....................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 About This Chapter ...................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Procedures ................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
9 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Installation Requirements ............................................................................................................................. 9-4
9.2 Shipping, Handling, Installation and Storage .............................................................................................. 9-13
9.3 Installation .................................................................................................................................................. 9-21
9.4 Final System Calibration and Performance Testing ................................................................................... 9-99
9.5 Unpacking Spare Collimators ................................................................................................................... 9-100
9.6 Installation Verification.............................................................................................................................. 9-104
10 SPARE PARTS .......................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Spare Parts Listing ..................................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.2 Location of Spare Parts ............................................................................................................................ 10-10
10.3 Service Tools ............................................................................................................................................ 10-20
11 NEMA PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT ............................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1 About This Chapter .................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2 NEMA Energy Resolution ........................................................................................................................... 11-4
11.3 NEMA Uniformity ........................................................................................................................................ 11-7
11.4 NEMA Spatial Resolution and Linearity ...................................................................................................... 11-9
11.5 NEMA Multiple Window Spatial Registration (MWSR) ............................................................................. 11-13

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 1-10

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
12 PLANNED MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1 About This Chapter .................................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2 Planned Maintenance Schedule ................................................................................................................. 12-3
12.3 Planned Maintenance Procedures ............................................................................................................. 12-4
13 CABLES ..................................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1 About This Chapter .................................................................................................................................... 13-3
13.2 Cable Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 13-4
13.3 Cable Diagrams .......................................................................................................................................... 13-6

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 1-11

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 1-12
07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
2 SAFETY CONCERNS
CONTENTS
2.1 About this Chapter ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.3 Safe Operating Practices........................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3.1 Operator Safety ............................................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.3.2 Equipment Safety ......................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.4 IEC Symbols Used .................................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.5 Definitions.................................................................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.6 Restrictions on Use ................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.7 Hazards ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.7.1 Electrical Hazards ......................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.7.2 Mechanical Hazards ..................................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.7.3 Precautions ................................................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.8 Emergency Stop ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-9

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems Inc. 2-1

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
2.1 ABOUT THIS CHAPTER
This chapter contains important information concerning potential hazards and general safety precautions. The aim of the
safety instructions is to draw attention to potential hazards that will or may occur if instructions are ignored. These hazards
may lead to accidents or serious injury to the patient, operator or service personnel.

2.2 INTRODUCTION
The Meridian System incorporates many safety features protecting the patient and the operator. However, as with all
medical devices of this nature, safe use of the system relies on the knowledge and judgment of medical professionals.

2.3 SAFE OPERATING PRACTICES

2.3.1 OPERATOR SAFETY

• Do not attempt to operate the system until you fully understand the safety considerations and procedures presented in
this manual.
• To avoid the possibility of getting pinched, keep hands and arms clear of the detector head during positioning and
operation.

2.3.2 EQUIPMENT SAFETY

• Do not attempt to operate the system if any of the EMERGENCY STOP buttons described in this manual are not
functioning properly.
• High voltage and mechanical hazards may be encountered when covers are removed.
• Always inspect the system for hazardous conditions or equipment malfunction prior to operation. Watch out for
abnormal or inconsistent camera control operation, such as intermittent pushbutton operation or interlock switch
failure.
• Always make sure that the collimator is installed securely.
• Ensure that the movement paths of the detector are clear before performing SPECT acquisitions, rotating the detector
or initiating a pre-programmed setup.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 2-2

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
2.4 IEC SYMBOLS USED
The following symbols are used on the system and in this manual:

ALTERNATING CURRENT

WARNING. Indicates where not following the procedure exactly as described may be dangerous and
possibly cause bodily injury or death. Please consult accompanying documents for detailed instructions
before proceeding.

Denotes that a HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE is present. Indicates where not following the procedure exactly
as described may be dangerous and possibly cause bodily injury or death.

Denotes Protective Earth Point.

ON / Power
OFF / Power

TYPE B EQUIPMENT

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 2-3

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
2.5 DEFINITIONS
The safety instructions in this manual are provided for the protection of the patient, operator and service personnel. They
identify hazards that will or may occur if instructions are ignored. Safety instructions are indicated as follows:

WARNING
Indicates where not following the procedure exactly as described may be dangerous
and possibly cause bodily injury or death.

CAUTION
Informs you that you could damage your equipment or lose data if the written procedure
is not followed.

2.6 RESTRICTIONS ON USE

CAUTION
This equipment is intended for use by trained qualified personnel only.

CAUTION
Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified in
this manual may result in severe personal injury or equipment damage.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 2-4

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
2.7 HAZARDS

2.7.1 ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

WARNING
The Meridian system is provided with covers to protect the patient and operator from
electrical shock and mechanical hazards. Make sure that all covers are properly
mounted when returning the system to the customer.

WARNING
Do not place any item on top of the acquisition computer monitor.

WARNING
Only power the acquisition computer from the power supply located in the gantry base.

WARNING
Do not use any other type of mains-cable or interconnecting power cables than those
shipped with the system.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 2-5

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
2.7.2 MECHANICAL HAZARDS

WARNING
Equipment motion can cause severe injury and equipment damage.

2.7.3 PRECAUTIONS
To avoid injury or equipment damage:
• Carefully observe all equipment motion as you operate the controls. Uncontrolled or unmonitored movements can
cause the gantry, table or detectors to collide with personnel or other equipment.
• Check for obstructions before initiating any hand controlled motions such as moving the detector or translating the
table. Be careful not to drive the detector into fixed objects. Refer to Figure 2.1.
• Make sure that no body parts are at risk to become pinched or trapped when the equipment is moving.
• Do not lean anything against the equipment. Doing so could cause it to tip or fall and may result in injury or equipment
damage.
• Do not put anything in the area of translate track of the detector and table (i.e. inside the shaded areas in Figure 2.1),
except for items specifically called out in this manual (e.g. intrinsic point source holder).

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 2-6

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Detector System top view Gantry ring

1560 mm
1620 (1315) mm 980 mm 2325 (1425) mm

Figure 2.1. Potential motion hazard areas

WARNING
Do not attempt to operate the gantry without collimators secured to the detectors.

WARNING
When changing collimators, rotate all locks fully 180º to secure the locking
mechanisms. Verify that all four locks are engaged before moving the collimator cart.

Refer to Figure 2.2 for details related to the locked and unlocked state of the Collimator Cart.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 2-7

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Operating handle in position Operating handle in position
”Collimator locked to cart” ”Collimator locked to detector”
Figure 2.2. Collimator cart locking

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 2-8

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
2.8 EMERGENCY STOP
Pressing the EMERGENCY STOP buttons located on either side of the gantry will stop and disable all motion.

Emergency
Stop buttons

Figure 2.3. Location of E-stop Buttons

NOTE
EMERGENCY STOP buttons latch mechanically when pressed. To release the
buttons, they must be turned clockwise.

Pressing EMERGENCY STOP will immediately stop all motions. Any acquisition motion, such as whole body or
tomography, will cease.

If the EMERGENCY STOP button is released (and power to the rest of the system has not been interrupted), the hand
control OVERRIDE button must be pressed once to restore system operation. The acquisition will remain stopped until
restarted or resumed by the operator.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 2-9

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 2-10
07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
3 SYSTEM OVERVIEW

CONTENTS
3.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.2 System Components ................................................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.1 Gantry ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.2 Patient Table................................................................................................................................................. 3-4
3.2.3 Control System ............................................................................................................................................. 3-4
3.2.4 Power Supply................................................................................................................................................ 3-5
3.2.5 Safety ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.5.1 Emergency Pushbuttons .............................................................................................................. 3-5
3.2.5.2 Collision Sensing System ............................................................................................................ 3-5
3.2.6 Detector ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-5
3.2.7 Collimator...................................................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.2.7.1 Collimator Cart ............................................................................................................................. 3-7
3.2.8 Hand Controller............................................................................................................................................. 3-7
3.2.9 Acquisition PC .............................................................................................................................................. 3-7

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 3-1

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
3.1 INTRODUCTION
Meridian is a nuclear medicine gamma camera system intended for whole body, SPECT, and planar imaging. Through a
unique low-profile detector design, it has been possible to fix the height of the patient table at 650 mm without
compromising the easy loading of patients.

The Meridian system comes in two different basic configurations:

• Standard version
• Cardiology version.

In the cardiology version, the length of the patient table is 235 cm, as opposed to the 265 cm of the standard version’s
patient table. The shorter table optimizes the Meridian system for cardiologic applications and requires less floor space for
installation.

To accommodate gurney imaging, the table of the standard version can be moved out of the image region. Furthermore,
the detector can be flipped around facing the outer room to accommodate studies of standing patients.

A dedicated acquisition PC executes all acquisition protocols.

Post-acquisition clinical functions are performed by means of a processing station. For use with the Meridian system,
Philips Medical Systems offer a choice of two processing stations:
• The PEGASYS Ultra™ workstation
• The Odyssey LX workstation.

Acquisition data can be transmitted from the PC via DICOM to the processing station. DICOM (Digital Imaging and
Communications in Medicine) is a NEMA standard defining a means of exchanging image files and other information
between DICOM compliant devices. DICOM provides image network file transfer capabilities between the Meridian
acquisition PC and a processing station.

NOTE
DICOM data transfers to any workstation other than the two listed above is not a valid
configuration and is not supported.

Collimators not in use are stored on mobile carts.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 3-2

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
3.2 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
The system architecture is illustrated in the schematic block diagram in Figure 3.1.

HANDSET

AC Mains ECG

Mechanical
PATIENT TABLE
Attachment

PROCESSING
GANTRY
STATION

DICOM

CANbus
ACQUISITION
115 V AC Power ECG
COMPUTER
Firewire Firewire

DETECTOR

Collimator
COLLIMATOR
Sense & ID
CART

COLLIMATOR

Figure 3.1. Meridian system components

3.2.1 GANTRY
The gantry structure is a cast aluminum frame onto which a bracket holding the detector head is mounted. All external
interfaces are connected to the rear of the gantry, i.e. the side of the gantry opposite to the bracket/detector assembly.

The gantry is composed of a fixed and a movable part. The movable part is a ring structure which provides the detector
roll (rotate) motion. This motion is driven by a motor/gear assembly, located in the gantry base. The detector has a
rotational travel range of ± 270°.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 3-3

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
The detector can also move in and out to allow for a variable radius. The radial motion is driven by a motor/gear assembly
located in the movable part of the gantry. The radial travel range is 30.3 cm.

Furthermore, it is possible to tilt the detector from –10° to +180°.

The motions are controlled by two dual-axis motion controllers, one located in the gantry base and one located in the
movable part of the gantry ring. For all motion axes, an incremental encoder, connected to the motor shaft, provide the
position feedback to the motion control. At power up, the position feedback of all axes must be calibrated. For the roll,
radius and tilt axes, the system uses absolute encoders to allow accurate calibration at any position. Calibration of these
axes takes place automatically. For table motion, the Meridian uses a system of slots in the table rail. These are
registered by an optical sensor, in order to retrieve the necessary position information. This system requires the table to
move by a short distance during calibration. Thus, calibration of table motion must be initiated manually, either from the
hand controller (by pressing both table motion buttons simultaneously) or by carefully pushing the patient table by
approximately 0.5 m.

Table calibration must be performed each time the gantry is powered up.

3.2.2 PATIENT TABLE

The patient table is of fixed height (650 mm) and offers motorized longitudinal movement along its full length, driven by a
motor and a ball screw.

The pallet is made by a 3 mm aluminum plate, which attenuates approximately 9% at 140 keV.

The capacity of the patient table is 400 lbs. (180 kg).

3.2.3 CONTROL SYSTEM

Meridian is controllable from an acquisition PC and from a hand controller.

The acquisition PC is interfaced to the gantry through a standard IEEE 1394 FireWire control interface, which is used for
all communication between the Meridian gantry and the Acquisition PC, including the transmission of acquisition data
back to the PC.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 3-4

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
3.2.4 POWER SUPPLY
Power to the entire system is applied to the AC mains input on the gantry. Meridian has a maximum power consumption
of 1400 W (including powering of the acquisition PC), which allows for powering the Meridian from a standard AC mains
supply outlet.

NOTE
Considering that the acquisition PC is powered from the Meridian gantry, the PC must
be shut down first before gantry power is removed.

3.2.5 SAFETY

3.2.5.1 Emergency Pushbuttons

Two pushbuttons, one located at each side of the gantry, are provided. The purpose of the EMERGENCY STOP buttons
is to stop and disable all motions. Pressing EMERGENCY STOP will immediately stop all motion, and any acquisition
motion – such as whole body or tomography – will cease.

When the EMERGENCY STOP button is released (and power to the rest of the system has not been interrupted), hand
control motion will be enabled but the acquisition will remain stopped until restarted or resumed by the operator. The
EMERGENCY STOP button is released by rotating the switch.

3.2.5.2 Collision Sensing System

In order to prevent injury to the patient and/or the operator and damage to the equipment, the collimator is equipped with
collision sensors that will detect collisions and stop motion. When a collision sensor is activated, the motion can only be
activated at a slow speed by simultaneously pressing COLLISION OVERRIDE and a motion button on the hand
controller.

The maximum point load and the maximum distributed load to activate the sensors are 8 kg and 18 kg, respectively.

3.2.6 DETECTOR
The detector assembly consists of a thallium activated sodium iodide crystal, a glass light guide, and an array of
photomultiplier tubes (PMT’s). Gamma photons striking the crystal generate scintillation light whose intensity is

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 3-5

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
proportional to the energy loss of the gamma photons. The energy range of gamma photons accepted is from 60 keV to
400 keV. The scintillation light falling on neighboring PMT’s also generates pulses proportional to their particular
intensities. All PMT pulses are routed to the detector EDC board (located on top of the detector) via coaxial cables.

On the Meridian detector head, each PMT tube produces an analog current relative to the light input. This current is
converted into a proportional voltage signal inside each PMT assembly. Voltage signals from all PMT’s are combined in
groups. Each group contributes to four position signals, X+, X–, Y+, Y– and an energy signal. These five sum signals are
then digitized on the Event Digitization & Control (EDC) board. The digitized signals are integrated and corrected on the
fly, followed by X-Y position calculation and energy calculation. Note that the EDC board only processes one event at a
time, but fast enough to ensure that no information is lost at count rates experienced in clinical use. Finally, each event is
corrected for detector/system characteristics such as spatial linearity and local energy response.

The output from the detector is the corrected event position and energy information which is sent via the FireWire control
interface to an acquisition computer platform for imaging.

The detector assembly is shielded with a lead alloy, and the crystal face is covered with a 0.5 mm sheet of aluminum. This
arrangement prevents external light from reaching the PMT’s and charged particles from reaching the crystal. This also
protects the crystal from most of the gamma photons arriving from the side or the rear of the detector.

3.2.7 COLLIMATOR
Gamma photons are focused on the crystal by a collimator placed over the detector face. Collimators consist of a
honeycomb structure of a lead alloy in which holes are used to determine the angle in which the gamma photons may
enter. In each case, the passage of gamma photons forming a projection image is favored, since they are not absorbed by
the lead septa between the holes.

The detector automatically detects the collimator type attached. Information on the collimator type is transmitted to the
Acquisition PC for application of appropriate corrections.

Meridian is designed to support LEGP, LEHR, LEUHR, MEGP, HEGP collimators, as well as LEPH and HEPH pinhole
collimators.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 3-6

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
3.2.7.1 Collimator Cart
The Meridian collimator is changed by means of a collimator cart upon which the collimator is placed in a horizontal
position. The motion control system can automatically move the detector to the position allowing collimator exchange
when activated by a connected Acquisition PC.

3.2.8 HAND CONTROLLER

The hand controller – or handset – is used to position the table and the detector. Furthermore, the hand controller has
buttons for starting and stopping acquisitions and for setting up variable radius tomography motion. A COLLISION
OVERRIDE button is also provided on the hand controller.

3.2.9 ACQUISITION PC
An Acquisition PC is connected to Meridian via the FireWire control interface. Through this interface, the Acquisition PC is
given access to control motion and to receive corrected events from the detector.

The gantry offers an isolated 115 V AC mains outlet (max. 4 A) to be used for powering the Acquisition PC.

NOTE
Power for the Acquisition PC must not be obtained through any other source than the
gantry. The Acquisition PC is considered a patient contact device, and electrical
problems stemming from an alternate power source may place either the patient’s or
operator's safety at risk.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 3-7

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 3-8
07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
4 DETAILED SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

CONTENTS
4.1 About This Chapter ................................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2 Gantry........................................................................................................................................................................ 4-3
4.2.1 Gantry Base .................................................................................................................................................. 4-5
4.2.2 Gantry Ring................................................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.2.3 Safety Board (9SAF1123) ........................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.2.3.1 Safety Stop Scenarios ............................................................................................................... 4-15
4.2.4 AC Power Supply (9UNF0643) ................................................................................................................... 4-17
4.2.4.1 Continuous Outputs ................................................................................................................... 4-17
4.2.4.2 Safety Interrupted outputs.......................................................................................................... 4-18
4.2.5 Rear Panel (9WIR1078) ............................................................................................................................. 4-20
4.2.5.1 Acquisition Power ...................................................................................................................... 4-22
4.2.5.2 Firewire ...................................................................................................................................... 4-22
4.2.5.3 ECG ........................................................................................................................................... 4-22
4.2.5.4 Hand Controller (9UNC0635) ..................................................................................................... 4-22
4.2.6 Ring Board (9RGB1122) ............................................................................................................................. 4-22
4.2.7 180 V Regenerate Controller Board (9RCB1150) ....................................................................................... 4-22
4.2.8 Motion Controllers (9MOT1145) ................................................................................................................. 4-23
4.2.8.1 General ...................................................................................................................................... 4-23
4.2.8.2 Motion Calibration ...................................................................................................................... 4-25
4.2.8.3 Collision Override....................................................................................................................... 4-32
4.2.8.4 Multiple Motions Position Monitoring.......................................................................................... 4-33
4.2.8.5 Motion Controller DIP Switches ................................................................................................. 4-34
4.3 Detector ................................................................................................................................................................... 4-35
4.3.1 General ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-35
4.3.2 Automatic PMT Gain Control – ‘AUTOTUNING’ ......................................................................................... 4-35
4.3.3 Dynamic Linearity Correction – ‘DYNCOR’ ................................................................................................. 4-36
4.3.4 Detector Layout – Outside .......................................................................................................................... 4-37

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-1

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 4.3.4.1 Detector Power Supply (9PSU0934).......................................................................................... 4-38
4.3.4.2 EDC Board (9UNT1114) ............................................................................................................ 4-38
4.3.5 Detector ID (9CBL1140) and Collimator ID (9SER0821) Boards ................................................................ 4-39
4.3.6 Analog Boards ............................................................................................................................................ 4-39
4.3.6.1 PMT Strips (9STB0628) ............................................................................................................. 4-40
4.3.6.2 X-E Board (9STB0631) .............................................................................................................. 4-40
4.3.6.3 Y Board (9STB0632).................................................................................................................. 4-43
4.3.6.4 Tuning Board (9STB0627) ......................................................................................................... 4-44
4.3.6.5 Power Board (9STB0629) .......................................................................................................... 4-44
4.4 Acquisition PC ......................................................................................................................................................... 4-45
4.4.1 PC power connection .................................................................................................................................. 4-45
4.5 Hand Controller ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-45
4.5.1 Collision Override ....................................................................................................................................... 4-47

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-2

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
4.1 ABOUT THIS CHAPTER
This section provides detailed information on the functionality of Meridian.

4.2 GANTRY
The Meridian gantry is based on a cast aluminum framework. The table is supported on linear bearings mounted in a
bottom steel frame, which also acts as a foot for the gantry.

The front of the gantry comprises a large disc on which a bracket carrying the detector is mounted on linear guides.

The back of the gantry has 4 large access holes covered by 2 aluminum cover sheets. Removing these covers gives
access to the majority of the electrical parts in the gantry.

The major components of the gantry are shown in Figure 4.1.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-3

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 GANTRY REAR VIEW
Location of Parts Absolute encoder
9CBL1060

Radius motor Ring board

9UNT1061 9RGB1122

Radius motion
Radius amplifier controller
9AMP0819 9MOT1145

Mattress
Long 4UNT1708
Short 4UNT1709
Roll (rotate) drive
Table top 9UNT1071
Long 4UNT1706
Short 4UNT1707
Absolute encoder
Table support 9CBL1146
9UNT1077
Roll (rotate) amplifier
180 V Regenerate 9AMP0819
Controller board
9RCB1150
Rear panel
Roll and table motion 9WIR1078
controller
9MOT1145
AC power supply
9UNC0643
Safety board Table drive
9SAF1123 9UNT1051 Ball screw
Long 4UNT1716
Short 4UNT1718
Figure 4.1. Gantry rear view

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-4

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
4.2.1 GANTRY BASE

The individual electrical parts of the gantry base are:

• AC Mains Power Supply
• Safety Board
• Rear Panel
• Dual Axis Motion Controller (for Roll and Table)
• Roll Drive:
Roll motor, gear and brake
• Roll Amplifier
• Roll Absolute Encoder and Roll Ultimate Stop
• Table Drive:
Table motor, gear and position encoder
• Table Limits.

The block diagram in Figure 4.2 on the next page shows the interconnections between these.

Please refer to figures in Chapter 10 Spare Parts for details on part numbers. The diagram in Figure 4.2 is intended to
give a functional overview only.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-5

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Firewire* To Detector
Firewire
ECG* To Gantry Rotating Part
ECG
Gantry
I/F 115 V AC 9WIR1078 * Part of 9CBL1054 Roll Cable
Rear Panel ** Part of 9WIR1078 Rear Panel
Indicators
E E *** Part of 9UNC1080 Table Drive
Handset Stop Stop
**** Part of 9CBL1146 Roll Abs encoder
Indicators**
Handset** 9CBL1161 9CBL1161

G1 G16 G13 G14

9CBL1160
<
115 V AC** G12 Safety Board G7
G15 Control*
24V and 9CBL1148 9SAF1123
E-Stop G8
To Gantry
G11 G19

G9
G20
G5 G17 G10 Rotating Part
G4 G2 G3 G6
24 V_ES
CANbus*
9CBL0669 Brake
Brake cable Release
180 V
AC PSU
9CBL0751
9UNF0643
I/O
Voltage Absolute
9CBL1117 ROLL AMPL ASSY
Selector position****
55 V 9RAA1156
I/O
9CBL0725 9CBL0667 180 V REGEN.
AC Mains

9CBL0665
Table incr***
CONTRL BOARD

Amp Cntr
Position*** 9CBL0680

POWER***
9RCB1150
560 Ω
180 V* 24 V* BZ1 BZ12 BZ6 BZ5

9CBL1116
Tabl incr
55 V* 55 V* Amplifier
BZ8 BZ3 9AMP0819
Control
Dual Axis BZ11 9CBL0665
BZ7 Motion M

Limits 9CBL1151
controller
To Gantry Rotating Part M 9MOT1145
Brake

INC INC
BZ10 Increments ENC
ENC

BZ4 Limit
Limit
9LIM1155
Roll Drive 9UNT1071
Table Drive CANBUS
TERMINATOR
9UNT1080
9TER0562
ABS ENC
9CBL1146

Figure 4.2. Schematic block diagram – gantry base

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-6

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
4.2.2 GANTRY RING

In the moveable (rotating) part of the gantry, the following electrical components are located:
• Ring Board
• Dual Axis Motion Controller (for Radius and Tilt)
• Radius Drive:
Radius motor, gear and brake
• Radius Amplifier
• Radius Absolute Encoder.

The block diagram in Figure 4.3 shows the interconnections between these.

Please refer to Figures in Chapter 10 Spare Parts for detail on part numbers. The diagram in Figure 4.3 is intended to give
a functional overview only.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-7

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 From Gantry Base
Part of 9CBL1054 Roll Cable * Part of 9CBL1079 Detector Cable
** Part of 9CBL1144 Tilt Cable

24 V_ES
From Detector

Firewire
55 V 180 V Control 55 V ECG Collision Collision*

F1 F16

F3
F1 F2

F3

F19

F18
F3
F17
ECG*
F15
55 V* To Detector
F20
Firewire
F5
Ring Board 9RGB1122 F14
Tilt Amplifier

F10
F11
F9

F6
F12 F13

F8

F4

F7

DC**
9CBL1056

9CBL0667
9CBL0667
9CBL0669

9CBL1059
Tilt Cntrl
55 V
180 V

I/O

Release
9CBL1058 Tilt Motor Assy
9TLT1143

Position**
BZ1 BZ12 Amplifier
BZ5
BZ6
M
CANbus 9AMP819
BZ4 BZ8

9CBL1057

9CBL1144
INCR

Control
ENC
Dual Axis M
Motion
Controller Brake
ABS ENC
9MOT1145 BZ11
Radius Drive 9CBL1055
BZ10 Increments ENC 9UNT1061
To Detector CANbus*

Increm**
BZ3

BZ7 ABS ENC

9CBL1060

Figure 4.3. Schematic block diagram – gantry ring

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-8

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 ROLL
REAR CABLE
DETECTOR
CABLE
PANEL STATIONARY PART OF GANTRY 9CBL1054
ROTATING PART 9CBL1079 DETECTOR

BNC
E-STOP BUTTONS ECG TRIGGER
ECG- terminal
A1
FIREWIRE FIREWIRE FIREWIRE
FIREWIRE A8 9TER
9CBL0793 SOCKET A3 0561

9CBL

9CBL
1161

1161
ROLL

F19

F20
ABS BRAKE

F18
F17
G13 G14 G6 ENC
9UNC0635 EDC BOARD
HANDSET
9CBL0663
G10
ROLL

9CBL1057
HANDSET M F5
CAN-BUS A2 A5
AMPL
CONNECTOR A4
A6 A7

G1 SAFETY BOARD G17

9CBL
ROLL INC RING F16 COLLISION

9CBL0661
1151

CONTRL
COLLIS
G7 LIMIT ENC BOARD F15 55 V

55 V
24V_ES
G15
F2
REAR PANEL G16 G20
F13

9CBL1140
15WAY RIBBON
G9 F1
9WIR1078 9CBL0680 F14

G19
G12
G3

9CBL0658
G8
G11

G4

G2

G5
F12 HV/LV

9CBL0657
9CBL1116
9CBL1160
POWER

9CBL0667

F11
F10
SAFETY

9CBL1117

9CBL0669

9CBL1060
F7
F3

F6

F9

F4
9CBL1057
SUPPLY

F8
INDICATORS

HV

9CBL LV
9CBL1058
9CBL0667
9CBL0667

9CBL1056
TABLE

9CBL1059

9CBL0669

0659
9CBL
0718
ACQUISITION

BZ10
BZ6

BZ5

BZ12
CAN-BUS LIMITS
PC BZ8 BZ3
RADIUS ABS
M

HIGH Z HV
BRAKE

BZ1
BZ12
ENC

BZ4

BZ8

BZ6
BZ5
BZ11

24 V
BZ3
2-axis
115 V AC 2-axis Motor INC
POWER ENC Motor Controller ANALOG FRONT
Controller

9CBL0718
CONNECTOR
RADIUS

9CBL1148

BZ11
BZ7

BZ10
AMPL

BZ7
180V

9CBL0751
9TER
BZ4 BZ1 REGEN. 9CBL1057

9CBL0663
0562
BOARD
M CRYSTAL/mumetal

180 V
COLLIMATOR
9CBL0725
INC
OC1 ENC COLLISION AND ID
C8
115V

OC3
E-STOP 180 V POWER
RELAY OC2 180 V
CORRECTION
24V_ES

DETECTOR BRACKET
55 V

C7
ABS
024 V POWER TILT ENC
REGULATION C6
E-STOP CABLE
RELAY
9CBL1144 TILT
MAINS C3

M
C2 55 V DRIVE
9CBL0793 C4 55 V
55 V POWER INC
CORRECTION ENC
E-STOP
32 V RELAY
C5
N/C
PRIMARY POWER

Figure 4.4. Interconnections

Please refer to Figures in Chapter 10 Spare Parts for detail on part numbers. The diagram in Figure 4.4 is intended to give
a functional overview only.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-9

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
4.2.3 SAFETY BOARD (9SAF1123)

The Safety Board is located in the bottom left compartment of the gantry base. Its primary function is via on-board relays
to cut the motion power when this is required for safety reasons. The Safety Board also holds the motor amplifier for table
motions and the interface for the Roll Absolute Encoder.

Motion power consists of 180 V DC for Roll (rotate) and Radius, 24 V DC for Table and for Tilt. These 2 voltages are
passed through a relay inside the main power supply. The relay itself is powered from a 24 V loop, running through the
external EMERGENCY STOP buttons, collimator collision pad and relays on the Safety Board.

Furthermore, a relay on the board interrupts the brake power to the Roll Motor brake at safety stops (the brake must be
powered to be released). Brakes are included in order to minimize the time for motions with high inertia to come to a
complete stop.

See Figure 4.5 on the next page.

Please refer also to Figures in Chapter 10 Spare Parts for details on part numbers. The diagram in Figure 4.5 is intended
to give a functional overview only.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-10

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 24V RELAY POWER

Ring Board
9RGB1122
E-STOP
RELAY
POWER FOR

RADIUS LIMIT 1

RADIUS LIMIT 2
MAIN POWER ROLL AND
180 V DC RADIUS MOTOR
SUPPLY
9UNF0643
24V DC POWER FOR
TILT AND TABLE
MOTOR

RELAY
POWER RET.

9MOT1145

9MOT1145

9UNC0635
9CBL1151

9LIM1155

RADIUS MOTOR
ROLL LIMIT 2
ROLL LIMIT1

COLLIMATOR

TABLE LIMIT

CONTROLLER

CONTROLLER
ROLL LIMIT

ROLL MOTOR
COLLISION

RUNAWAY

RUNAWAY
9CBC0674

HANDSET

BUTTON
PAD

STOP
E-STOP
MUSHROOMS

9CBC0674

RUNAWAY
COMBINED DETECTOR ULTIMATE and
LIMITS COLLISION LIMITS HANDSET
STOP
Safety Board 9SAF1123

Figure 4.5. Meridian safety circuit

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-11

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
The following conditions can cause a safety stop:
• EMERGENCY STOP button activated
• Collision on collimator (Collision Relay)
• Hand set stop activated (Runaway/Stop Relay)
• Motion Controller Runaway (Runaway/Stop Relay)
• Table Ultimate Limit reached
• Roll (rotate) Ultimate Limit reached (Ultimate Relay)
• Roll and Radius Combined Limit reached (illegal combination of detector roll position and radius – Combined Limits
Relay).

LED’s on the Safety Board indicate the cause (“COLLISION”, “RUNAWAY”, “ULT_TABLE”, “ROLL ULT” and
“COMBILIMIT”). See Figure 4.6.

The Collision Relay and the Runaway/Stop Relay are reset by the Handset OVERRIDE button. Reset cannot take place if
a collision is still present, or if a Motion Controller has activated its Runaway output. The Ultimate Limits and Combined
Limits Relays can only be reset by setting the appropriate switch (see page 4-14).

Another function of the board is the distribution of in- and output signals to the Roll/Table Motion Controller.

The Handset interfaces directly to the Safety Board. The OVERRIDE button and the STOP button on the Handset are
hardwired to the relays in the safety circuit. The Stop signal turns all motion power off via a relay. The Collision Override
signal resets the relay, thus restoring motion power. All buttons except STOP are passed on to parallel inputs on the
Roll/Table Motion Controller.

The function of the Safety Board test points and LED’s (shown in Figure 4.6) is described in Chapter 6 Diagnostics.

The Safety Board also has 2 switches as shown in Figure 4.6. The function of these is described in Table 4.1 on page 4-
14.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-12

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 ULT_RESET
ON when Roll

COLLISION
JUMPED
motion is at
ultimate limit

ROLL_ULT
OFF OFF
SW4 SW3
ON ON BLINK on illegal
Not used Radius/Roll

ULT_RADIUS
combination

COMBILIMIT
ULT_RESET

COLLISION
JUMPED
ON when both
E-STOP’s are OK
E_STOP_OK

ON when table is
START_OK
When START_OK is
ON, OVERRIDE can at ultimate limit
enable motor power
RUNAWAY

ULT_STOP

ULT_OK

COLLISION

COLLIS_OK

ULT_TABLE
ON when table is
moving towards 0
TABLE-
TABLE+
ON when table is
TABLE ENA.

+24V_ES

moving in the
positive direction

ON when table ON when motion When ULT_STOP is ON,

motion axis is power is ON LED stays ON until ULT_RESET
enabled

Figure 4.6. Safety Board LED’s and switches

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-13

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Switch No. Name Function

SW3 COLLISION JUMPED This switch is mainly for manufacturing purposes. When the switch is ON, collision sensing on
the Collimator is disabled. At the same time, the adjacent red LED is lit, indicating that a
safety function is disabled. The COLLISION JUMPED switch also disables the Combined
Limit detection (see Figure 4.5). The COLLISION JUMPED switch can be read by the motor
controller.
WARNING! Make certain that the switch is OFF when the system is in normal use.

SW4 ULT_RESET This switch resets the bi-stable Ultimate Limit Relay. If a motion has passed its ultimate end
stop, ULT_RESET must be set ON in order to back out of the stop region, using the
OVERRIDE button and the appropriate motion button on the hand controller. The
ULT_RESET switch can be read by the motor controller.
WARNING! Make certain that the switch is OFF when the system is in normal use.

Table 4.1. Safety Board switch function

WARNING
Make certain that the COLLISION JUMPED and the ULT_RESET switches are both OFF
when the system is in normal use. When COLLISION JUMPED is ON, the collimator
collision sensors are bypassed.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-14

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
4.2.3.1 Safety Stop Scenarios
Scenario Indications Recovery Action

Collision on collimator Collision lamp on Rear Panel lit Push OVERRIDE on hand controller and observe the
Motor Power lamp on the Rear Panel.
If the Motor Power lamp is now ON (green), the
collision was only temporary. Increase radius if this
occurs during a study.
If the Motor Power lamp is not latching, the collision is
still present. Push OVERRIDE on the Handset
together with the relevant motion button to back out of
the collision. If no collision can be identified, or this
does not solve the problem, the collision circuitry must
be checked

Roll (rotate) reached Ultimate Limit Motor Power lamp on Rear Panel This is considered a serious problem with a motion
OFF control. The problem must be identified and fixed first.
ULT_ OK LED on Safety Board is Set the COLLISION JUMPED switch on the Safety
OFF Board ON. Now the relevant motion can be moved out
of the limit zone by using OVERRIDE and the
ULT_STOP LED on Safety Board is
appropriate motion button on the handset.
ON

Table has reached Ultimate Limit Motor Power lamp on Rear Panel is This scenario does not require ULT_RESET for
OFF recovery. The table can be moved out of the limit zone
by using OVERRIDE and the appropriate motion
START OK LED on Safety Board is
button on the hand controller.
OFF
However, the cause should be identified. There are
ULT_TABLE LED on Safety Board is
two possible causes:
ON
a) The Table has been pushed to the limit manually.
b) A problem in the Motion Controller has occurred
and must be fixed

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-15

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Scenario Indications Recovery Action

STOP button on hand controller Motor Power lamp on Rear Panel is Push OVERRIDE button on hand controller.
pushed OFF
START_OK LED on Safety Board is
ON

An EMERGENCY STOP button was EMERGENCY STOP lamp on Rear Twist the relevant EMERGENCY STOP button to
activated Panel lit release it.
ESTOP_OK and START_OK LED’s
on Safety Board are OFF

RUNAWAY signal issued by a MOTOR POWER lamp on Rear This indicates a problem with a Motion Controller. The
Motion Controller Panel is OFF problem must be identified and fixed first.
START_OK LED on Safety Board is To recover, both Motion Controllers must be reset and
OFF the OVERRIDE button on the hand controller pushed.
RUNAWAY LED on Safety Board is
ON
OUT 00 LED on a Motion Controller
is OFF

Combined Limit was reached. Illegal COMBILIMIT LED on Safety Board This is considered a serious problem and the reason
combination of detector rotation and is flashing causing it must be resolved.
radius
COLLISION lamp on Rear Panel is Set the switch COLLISION JUMPED on the Safety
flashing Board ON and reduce the detector radius.
Set the switch COLLISION JUMPED back OFF. If a
legal detector rotation/radius has been achieved,
flashing stops.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-16

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
4.2.4 AC POWER SUPPLY (9UNF0643)

The main power supply is located in the lower right corner of the gantry base. It powers the entire system except for the
processing station. The outputs are divided into two groups: One group of continuous outputs and one group with safety
interrupted outputs. All low voltage outputs are protected by PTC fuses.

NOTE
Reset of the PTC fuses requires that all loads on the affected output are removed, that
power is removed momentarily and then reapplied. These fuses are not accessible and
are not field replaceable. Should one of these fuses fail, the entire power supply must
be replaced.

4.2.4.1 Continuous Outputs

Connector Name Voltage Dedication
OC1 115 V AC Acquisition PC
C1 55 V DC Spare
C2 55 V DC Radius/tilt Motion Controller and detector PSU
C3 55 V DC Roll/table Motion Controller
C4 55 V DC EDC board and detector PSU
C7 24 V DC Safety Board and Ring Board

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-17

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
4.2.4.2 Safety Interrupted outputs
Connector Name Voltage Dedication
OC2 180 V DC Radius drive
OC3 180 V DC Roll (rotate) drive
C6 24 V DC Tilt drive, Table drive via Safety Board

Connector C8 goes to the Safety Stop circuit. This input is used to interrupt power to the motors in case of collision,
motion controller software fault, or if one of the EMERGENCY STOP buttons has been pressed.

The electronics within Meridian, including the detector, are operated on a continuous 55 V DC. Local DC-DC converters
internal to the electronic modules convert the 55 V DC to the supply voltages used internally (i.e. 3.3 V DC, +/- 5 V DC,
12 V DC, +/-15 V DC and HV).

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-18

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
The AC power supply includes a number of fuses. The access and location of these fuses are indicated on the drawing in
Figure 4.8 on page 4-20. The electrical location of the fuses is shown in Figure 4.7.
115V
to PC
SECONDARY FUSES
MAINS fuses

180 V POWER

115V
CORRECTION

32 V
55 V POWER
CORRECTION

ISOLATING TRANSFORMER

Figure 4.7. Electrical location of fuses in power supply

On the transformer secondary two fuses are used to protect the circuitry. Both are 10 A rated

On the mains input, two fuses are used to protect the circuitry. Refer to the Chapter 9 Installation for applicable fuse
ratings.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-19

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Secondary fuses
10A both

MAINS VOLTAGE
SETTING

100V 120V 200V 220V 240V FUSE RATING

( both fuses )
12A 12A 6.25A 6.25A 6.25A

FUSE
I
0 FUSE

Figure 4.8. AC power supply

4.2.5 REAR PANEL (9WIR1078)

All interfaces to and from the Meridian are routed via the rear panel. The rear panel is also used to connect the acquisition
PC to the gantry.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-20

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 YELLOW LAMP YELLOW LAMP
INDICATING MOTOR INDICATING
COLLISION COLLISION
POWER
E-STOP
E-STOP ACTIVATED

GREEN LAMP HANDSET

INDICATING CONNECTOR FOR
MOTOR POWER OK HANDSET

CAN-BUS

POSITION FOR FUTURE

AUXILIARY CAN-BUS
CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR FOR BNC CONNECTOR FOR

ECG TRIGGER
FIREWIRE CABLE TO ECG INPUT
ACQUISITION PC IEEE1394

RESETTABLE FUSE FOR

CONNECTOR FOR ACQ PC POWER
POWER CABLE TO PC FUSE
POWER
ACQUISITION PC OK
RESET

ACQ PC POWER
115V AC/4A
50/60 Hz
GREEN LAMP
INDICATING POWER TO
ACQUISITION PC

Figure 4.9. Rear panel

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-21

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
4.2.5.1 Acquisition Power
The acquisition PC must be powered from this 115 V AC outlet. The output is protected by a circuit breaker.

4.2.5.2 Firewire
The Firewire interface connector interfaces the acquisition PC to the gantry.

4.2.5.3 ECG
The ECG connector is used to connect to a gate. The connector connects the gate to the detector EDC board. Here the
trigger pulses are detected and embedded in the Firewire event stream transmitted to the acquisition PC as time
references used for the image framing process.

4.2.5.4 Hand Controller (9UNC0635)

The 15 pin sub-D female connector interfaces the handset to the safety board and motion controllers.

4.2.6 RING BOARD (9RGB1122)

The Ring Board is located in the rotating part of the gantry, inside the casting. The board distributes input and output
signals to the Radius/Tilt Motion Controller and links the Roll Cable to the Detector Cable. The board also holds the motor
amplifier for Tilt motions, as well as the interface to Radius and Tilt absolute encoders.

A relay on the Ring Board interrupts the brake power to the Radius Motor brake at Safety Stops.

The Ring Board has a number of LED’s. The function of these is described in the Chapter 6 Diagnostics.

4.2.7 180 V REGENERATE CONTROLLER BOARD (9RCB1150)

When the Meridian detector is in motion, it possesses a significant amount of momentum (kinetic energy). When detector
motion is stopped, this energy is converted into electric current as the DC motor acts as a generator. As a result, the
180 V DC supply voltage to the motor and motor amplifier may rise above the motor amplifier rating.

To avoid overloading the motor and radius and rotate motor amplifiers, the 180 V Regenerate Controller monitors the
motor power voltage. If the voltage reaches 181 V, a load resistor is switched in to consume the generated energy.

The Regenerate Controller Board is placed in the Gantry immediately below the Roll Amplifier. See Figure 4.1 on page 4-4.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-22

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
4.2.8 MOTION CONTROLLERS (9MOT1145)

4.2.8.1 General
The Meridian gantry has four independent motions. These motions are:

• DETECTOR ROLL The ring carrying the detector bracket can rotate over a range of 540° (± 270°)
• DETECTOR RADIUS The detector bracket can move radially over a range of 303 mm
• TABLE LONGITUDINAL Total travel range for the long table is 2255 mm and for the short table, 1361 mm
• DETECTOR TILT Tilt range is from –10° (towards gantry ring) to 180° (detector surface upwards, away
from table)

All motions are servo motor operated, capable of running pre-programmed motions controlled by the Acquisition PC or
single-axis movements initiated from the hand controller. The servo motors are controlled by two dual-axis (two-motion)
Motion Controllers.

All motion positions are displayed on the Acquisition PC’s monitor.

NOTE
TABLE motions require position calibration every time the gantry is powered up before
further motions are possible and correct position information can be displayed on the
PC monitor. Calibration is initiated from the handset.

The Motion Controllers operate the motors through dedicated power amplifiers. The servo feedback is based on
incremental encoders integrated in the servo motors. In order to stop the high-inertia motions quickly during a safety stop,
the Roll (rotate) and the Radius motor are furnished with a brake that is engaged when no power is applied.

All motions are continually checked against the calibration reference, in order to verify the correct functioning of the
incremental encoders.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-23

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
The motion system is depicted in the block diagram in Figure 4.10.

Firewire 9UNT1114
Detector EDC
Module

Acquisition PC
CANbus

9UNC0635
9MOT1145 9MOT1145
Dig. Dig. Dig. Dig.
In Roll/Table Out In Radius/Tilt Out
Motion Motion
Controller Controller
Handset

Detector Table Detector Detector

Roll Radius Tilt

Axis A Axis B Axis A Axis B

Figure 4.10. Motion controller environment

Each motion axis interface is composed of a control part for interface to the motor amplifier and an encoder part for
position information input (encoder input). Furthermore, a brake control voltage output is supplied.

Furthermore, each controller is equipped with 20 opto-isolated digital inputs and 12 opto-isolated digital outputs. Green
LED’s for each input and yellow LED’s for each output show the state of these ports. The two Motion Controllers are
identical in hardware and software. A DIP switch is used to set the actual identity (Roll/Table or Radius/Tilt controller).

The Hand Controller is connected to the Roll/Table Motion Controller’s digital input port. The communication from and to
the Acquisition PC takes place via the detector’s EDC board, which translates between the PC’s IEEE 1394 Firewire
interface and the Motion Controller’s CANbus interface.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-24

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
When the Acquisition PC is connected, it transmits ”PC alive” messages at least every second. The regular reception of
these messages is reflected on the output port LED’s. See the sections on Motion Controller Port Assignments in
Chapter 6, Diagnostics.

4.2.8.2 Motion Calibration

As the position information is based on incremental encoders, the actual position of all motions is unknown when power is
applied. Therefore, a calibration must be performed before normal operation can be initiated. For the rotation, radius and
tilt axes, calibration information is automatically retrieved from the absolute encoder connected to each axis. This is done
immediately after power-up. In order for the table to be calibrated, it needs to move by a short distance. Table motion
calibration must be performed manually by means of the hand controller.

To perform table motion calibration:

1. Press the hand controller button to ensure that power to the gantry is enabled.

2. To ensure that the table has space to move, set detector tilt to 0° and set detector rotation to a position within ± 90°.

3. Calibrate table motion by activating both and on the hand controller simultaneously.

If, for some reason, table motion cannot be calibrated using this procedure, push the table manually over a distance of
approximately 0.5 m. Provided that the gantry is powered on, this ensures that table motion has been calibrated.

The calibration procedure can be aborted by pressing the STOP button on the hand controller or the EMERGENCY
STOP.

When a motion has been calibrated successfully, it is ready for use and the software end stop will function. The software
functionality that detects conflicts involving more than one motion cannot function, however, until all motions are
calibrated.

If it is necessary to move a part of the system even though this motion cannot calibrate, SW8 of the DIP switch on the
pertinent Motion Controller can be used: If the switch is ON (moved upwards), the Motion Controller is forced into
‘calibration completed’ state, and the hand controller can be used to activate the motion.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-25

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Roll (rotate) Absolute Position Detection
Detector roll position is detected by an absolute encoder transmitting information about the roll position to the motor
controller.

For instructions on resetting the absolute encoder, see Chapter 5, Calibrations.

Figure 4.11. Roll absolute encoder and roll ultimate stop on the 9UNT1071 roll drive

The Roll Ultimate Stop functions prevent potential damage to the roll cable caused by a failure of the roll motion controller
causing the roll motor to run wild.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-26

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Table Absolute Position Detection
Calibration of the table motion is based on the following components: The table has a bar with slits mounted in the table
rail. The slits engage three opto-switches that are part of the table drive assembly as shown in the figure below.

SW3

SW2

SW1

Figure 4.12. 9UNT0647 Table drive assembly with opto switches

SW3 acts as a ‘direction’ switch which changes when the table is in position 1545 mm (long table)/1240 mm (short table).
This is where the table end structure is just clear of the detector rotation (when tilt is set to 0°). During calibration, the table
always goes towards this position. SW2 is the ultimate limit switch which is used directly at the Safety Board to stop the
motor. This switch is also read by the software.

SW1 is the slit indicator which changes from ‘0’ to ‘1’ whenever a slit is reached, and from ‘1’ to ‘0’ when the slit has
passed. All the spaces between the slits differ in ‘tick length’. Using this, it is fairly fast to obtain knowledge of the table

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-27

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
position. The width of the slit is used to detect the table length. The table of the standard version of the Meridian (the long
table) has 2 mm slits, whereas the table of the cardiology version (the short table) has 4 mm slits.

Radius Absolute Position Detection

Detector radius position is detected by an absolute encoder transmitting position information to the radius motion
controller.

For instructions on resetting the absolute encoder, see Chapter 5, Calibrations.

Radius absolute
encoder

Figure 4.13. 9UNT1061 Radius drive assembly with absolute encoder

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-28

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Tilt Absolute Position Detection
Detector tilt position is detected by an absolute encoder transmitting position information to the radius motion controller.

For instructions on resetting the absolute encoder, see Chapter 5, Calibrations.

Tilt absolute
encoder

Figure 4.14. The tilt absolute encoder

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-29

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Motion Limits
The motion of each axis is limited through:
• Software limits,
• Ultimate stop limit switches, and/or
• Mechanical end stops.

When the motions are correctly calibrated, the software limits are set to the following positions:

Motion Axis Low End Stop High End Stop

Software Ultimate limit Mechanical Software Ultimate limit Mechanical

Detector rotation – 275° approx. – 280° + 275° approx.+ 280°

Detector radius 80 mm approx. 78 mm 383 mm approx. 385 mm

Detector tilt – 10° – 15° + 180° 185°

Table longitudinal,
0 mm – 3 mm – 8 ± 2 mm 2255 mm 2258 mm 2262 ± 2 mm
long table

Table longitudinal,
0 mm – 3 mm – 8 ± 2 mm 1361 mm 1364 mm 1370 ± 2 mm
short table

The high end stop of the table motion depends on the length of the patient table (standard system – long table vs.
cardiology version – short tale). Refer to Chapter 9 Installation for information on how to set up the system to use either
table type.

The ultimate stops will be triggered, should one axis be moved to a position beyond the software limits. Triggering one
ultimate limit switch will cause power to all motors to be removed.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-30

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Furthermore, motions are disabled when the Meridian system is getting into a state that involves a conflict between
several motions and their limits. For example, motions will be disabled if the detector is being rolled (rotated) into the table
(gantry collision prevention), or if an illegal combination of detector radius and rotation is detected.

The table below summarizes the maximum detector radius for different values of detector rotation.

Detector Rotation Maximum Radius

– 275° - – 240° 360 mm

– 240° - – 120° 260 mm

– 120° - – 10° 360 mm

– 10° - 10° 383 mm

10° - 120° 360 mm

120° - 240° 260 mm

240° - 275° 360 mm

At 0° detector rotation and 0° tilt, the minimum detector radius is 80 mm. When the detector rotates and approaches the
table, the minimum radius increases until the detector reaches a rotational angle of ±110° (±117° at the pediatric cutout in
the patient table). From here on, detector minimum radius decreases again until detector rotation reaches ±180°.

At ± 90°/± 270° detector rotation and 0° detector tilt, the minimum radius is 185 mm at the pediatric cutout and 221 mm
elsewhere.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-31

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
4.2.8.3 Collision Override
When a safety stop has been activated, the user must use the COLLISION OVERRIDE button to activate the system
again.
• When COLLISION OVERRIDE and one of the motion buttons are pressed simultaneously, the system will start
moving at a low speed. This will allow for movements in the direction away from the collision.
• Both keys must be released before another motion can occur.
• When the system has moved into a safe area – i.e. where collision is no more detected – it is possible to use the
normal motion keys again.

Hand Controller Operation

From the Safety Board, all hand controller signals, except Motion Stop, are routed to the Roll/Table Motion Controller as
part of that controller’s digital input port.

The input from the hand controller is read on the digital input port and transmitted at the CANbus where it is read by the
Radius/Tilt Motion Controller and the acquisition PC, if the PC is connected. The requested motion is then executed by
the pertinent Motion Controller.

The acquisition PC uses the MARK and START ACQUISITION buttons.

The acquisition PC can set a hand controller key mask which masks out some of the motions – e.g. it should not be
possible to rotate the detector during a whole body acquisition. The mask is reset (i.e. all keys enabled) if the “PC Alive”
message is lost for more than a specified period, or if a stop condition is encountered (Safety Stop or hand controller
STOP button activated).

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-32

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
4.2.8.4 Multiple Motions Position Monitoring

Preventing Collisions
The motion controllers incorporate software functions preventing collision between the detector and the table, the floor or
the table rail. If the detector gets too close to the table or the floor, all motions are stopped immediately, and the operator

must use the hand controller COLLISION OVERRIDE button to move the detector away from the obstruction. As
always when using the hand controller COLLISION OVERRIDE button, the operator must be careful not to cause damage
to the gantry and the detector.

Mutual Motion Controller Monitoring

The two Motion Controller units communicate via the CANbus. This fact is exploited in a mutual supervision of the correct
functioning of the Motion Controllers. If either of the units detects that the other is not running properly, the Runaway
output signal is asserted, causing an immediate stop of all motions.

This supervision is implemented as a simple watchdog functionality: Each Motion Controller polls the other for position
information via the CANbus at regular intervals; if this polling fails, the Motion Controller deems the other one “failed” and
activates the motor stop via the RUNAWAY signal. When a motion is active, position information is sent regularly on the
CANbus – if such information is detected, it supersedes the polling.

If a runaway is detected, the signal OUT00 is activated (set HIGH – LED off). This signal removes all power from the
motors. However, it is possible to override this assertion (e.g. during Service) by means of DIP switch SW8 (the same
switch as used for overriding of calibration status). There is no reset possibility, i.e. if a controller has activated runaway,
the entire system must be reset to resume normal operation.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-33

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
4.2.8.5 Motion Controller DIP Switches
The DIP switch comprises 10 individual switches. The purposes of these are as follows:
SW 1 – 5: Address (Node_ID – see below )
SW 7: Must be OFF
SW 8: Min/max radius check ignored. Loss of CANbus communication ignored
SW 9: Program Flash
SW 10: Reset.

Switch # Roll/table Radius/tilt

1 OFF ON
2 ON OFF
3 ON ON
4 ON ON
5 ON ON
ON = upwards, OFF = downwards (compared to the text on the Motion Controller cover)

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-34

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
4.3 DETECTOR

4.3.1 GENERAL

The Meridian Detector is based on a unique technology that provides superior performance in a rather simple design. The
Photomultipliers – PMT’s – employed are 3” square. A total of 48 PMT’s are arranged in a 6 x 8 rectangular pattern. Each
PMT has an integrated preamplifier and automatic gain stabilization based on a built-in Light Emitting Diode.

Position and Energy information are summed and pre-processed in an analog circuitry directly on the outputs from the
PMT’s. From that circuitry, the information is passed on to a group of A/D converters and beyond this point, all processes
are digital. The output from the detector is fully corrected, digital image data, transferred event by event over a serial
interface. The serial interface employed is IEEE 1394, known as Firewire.

The entire detector is powered from 55 V DC. A power supply inside the detector provides the low voltages for the analog
circuitry and negative high voltage for the PMT’s.

4.3.2 AUTOMATIC PMT GAIN CONTROL – ‘AUTOTUNING’

For gain control of the individual PMT’s, a light reference (LED) is built into each PMT. This LED flashes for 3 μsec every
10 msec, and the response from the PMT is sampled and compared to a reference voltage. The output from the
comparator is fed into a gain control circuit on the PMT. In this way, a closed loop ensures that the response from the
reference light (LED) always corresponds to the reference voltage. The reference voltage is set up from a DAC that is
dedicated for each PMT. The individual PMT gain settings can now be digitally controlled.

The output from the comparator is also used as information about the gain margin of the PMT (working point).

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-35

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 OUT

SAMPLE

TUNE REF.
VOLTAGE
WORKING
POINT

LED DRIVE

Figure 4.15. Auto tuning circuit

4.3.3 DYNAMIC LINEARITY CORRECTION – ‘DYNCOR’

The Dynamic Linearity Correction (DynCor) provides a non-linear relationship between the group sum and the position of
the scintillations. This non-linearity compensates for a distortion in the photon optics between the crystal and the PMT’s.
OUTPUT SIGNAL

The non-linear transfer function is

characterized by two break points, HIDYN and
LODYN. The levels of these break points are
always proportional to the energy of the
events. The relative levels are set by a value in
the tuning tables. These values are factory set
and not subject to field adjustments.
DYNCOR
LOW LEVEL INPUT SIGNAL

DYNCOR HIGH LEVEL

Figure 4.16. DynCor

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-36

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
4.3.4 DETECTOR LAYOUT – OUTSIDE

Immediately under the Top Cover are the Detector Power Supply and the EDC Board.

COLLIMATOR CABLE
9CBL1140
ANALOG SIGN. 9CBL0657

DETEBL0718
DET BL0659

9C
9C
ECT

CTOR
TUNE CONTROL
9CBL0658

OR L

HV
V

DETECTOR CABLE
9CBL1079
DETECTOR EDC BOARD
POWER 9UNT1114
SUPPLY
9PSU0934
DETECTOR POWER

PIN 7-8
COLLISION JUMPER
9CBL0820 CAN-BUS
TERMINATOR
9CBL0561
ED
C 9CB
PO L0
WE 66

ECG
R C1
AB

FIREWIRE
CAN-BUS
LE

Figure 4.17. Detector layout under top cover

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-37

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
4.3.4.1 Detector Power Supply (9PSU0934)
The Detector Power Supply receives 55 V DC power through the detector cable. The 55 V are used to generate 4 low
voltages: +15 V, +5 V, –5 V, –15 V and a negative High Voltage adjustable to –1500 V max.

A separate 55 V DC supply is transferred through the Detector Power Supply to the EDC Board for its power
requirements.

The EDC Board controls the High Voltage and receives diagnostic information from the Detector Power Supply.

4.3.4.2 EDC Board (9UNT1114)

The Event Digitization and Correction (EDC) Board is the intelligent core of the Detector. It handles a number of tasks:
• It handles all the Firewire communication between the Acquisition PC and the Gantry.
• It handles the communication between the Firewire from the PC and the CANbus to the Motion Controllers.
• It controls the high voltage and reads diagnostic information from the Detector Power Supply Unit.
• It writes Tuning Values to the Tuning DAC’s, and drives the AutoTuning circuits.
• It writes Gain Values to the Control DAC’s for DynCor and Threshold.
• It reads PMT working point values from the PMT’s.
• It synchronizes Gated Acquisitions with external ECG monitor.
• It detects collision on collimator and detector and reads Collimator ID.
• It reads the ID code specific for the individual detectors.
• It digitizes the four position signals and the Energy signal from the X-E strip (X+, X– and Energy) and the Y strip (Y+
and Y–).
• It applies spatial and energy corrections based on downloaded tables.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-38

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
4.3.5 DETECTOR ID (9CBL1140) AND COLLIMATOR ID (9SER0821) BOARDS
On the detector front, facing the collimator is a small board with five contact pads. The Detector ID EEPROM is located on
the backside of that Detector/Collimator ID board (not used in Meridian). The board serves as an interface to a similar
board with spring contacts on the collimators. The boards on the collimators carry the Collimator ID EEPROM.

4.3.6 ANALOG BOARDS

The analog boards are located below the lead covers under the EDC Board.

PMT STRIP
TUNE AND
WP SIGNALS, TUNING BOARD TUNING DAC, WP AND DYNCOR CONTROL BOARD
LED SIGNALS

Y-POS Y- BOARD
Y BOARD DYNCOR - THRESHOLD

GROUP SUMMINGS.......1 OF 8 SHOWN

TUBE INTERCONNECTING BOARD,
ENERGY, X-E BOARD, ENERGY SUM
X-POS. X-E BOARD DYNCOR - THRESHOLD DRIVERS

HV and LV POWER POWER BOARD HV, D8, +/-15V, +/-5V,

LED DRIVERS AND LED SAMPLE DRIVERS

Figure 4.18. Location of analog circuitry

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-39

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
4.3.6.1 PMT Strips (9STB0628)
The PMT Strips are passive boards, each one interconnecting 6 PMT’s. They transfer power supply voltages, including
high voltage, autotuning drive signals, tuning reference voltages, working point signals and control voltages for DynCor
and threshold.

4.3.6.2 X-E Board (9STB0631)

The X-E Board sums the output from 9 overlapping groups of PMT’s in the X direction. Each group sum is subjected to a
DynCor Process, and after that, a Threshold is applied in order to exclude those groups that are far away from the
scintillations to eliminate noise. The information from those groups is too noisy due to low photon statistics.

After threshold discrimination, the 9 group sums are fed into a resistor matrix which feeds into two summing nodes, X+
and X–. The resistor values of the matrix are such that the difference between X+ and X– changes linearly with the X-
positions of the scintillations.

The X-E Board also provides an undiscriminated sum of all PMT signals which represents the isotope energy.

See Figure 4.19 on the next page.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-40

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 X+

X-

THRES THRES THRES THRES THRES THRES THRES THRES THRES

HOLD HOLD HOLD HOLD HOLD HOLD HOLD HOLD HOLD

DYNCOR DYNCOR DYNCOR DYNCOR DYNCOR DYNCOR DYNCOR DYNCOR DYNCOR

Energy

Figure 4.19. Schematic of the X-E Board

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-41

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
The X-E Board also carries the drivers for DynCor and Threshold signals. These signals are copies of the Energy signal
and are adjustable in amplitude. The amplitude adjustments are performed in analog multipliers, controlled by DC
voltages from dedicated DAC’s on the Tune Board.

The digital values written to the DAC’s are contained in the tuning tables.

Note that the analog multipliers are supplied from +5 V and –5 V linear regulators located on the Y Board.

See Figure 4.20.

HIDYN ON X-E STRIP

ENERGY
SIGNAL HIDYN ON Y STRIP

LODYN ON X-E STRIP

LODYN ON Y STRIP

THRESH ON X-E STRIP

THRESHOLD LOW DYN HIGH DYN THRESH ON Y STRIP

CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL
VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE

Figure 4.20. Schematic block diagram of DynCor- and threshold drivers

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-42

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
4.3.6.3 Y Board (9STB0632)
The Y Board sums the output from 7 overlapping groups of PMT’s in the Y direction. Each group sum is subjected to a
DynCor circuit succeeded by a Threshold similar to that on the X-E Board.

The 7 group sums are fed into a resistor matrix which feeds into two summing nodes, Y+ and Y–.

Note that the Y Board also carries a +5 V linear regulator and a –5 V linear regulator that supplies the analog multipliers
on the X-E Board.
DYN THRES
COR HOLD
DYN THRES
COR HOLD
DYN THRES
COR HOLD
DYN THRES
COR HOLD
DYN THRES
COR HOLD
DYN THRES
COR HOLD
DYN THRES
COR HOLD

Y+ Y-

Figure 4.21. Schematic of the Y-board

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-43

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
4.3.6.4 Tuning Board (9STB0627)
The Tuning Board carries 7 octal 10-bit DAC’s. On the basis of the tuning tables, the DAC’s provide the reference
voltages for the Autotuning circuits in the 48 PMT’s and the control voltages for the DynCor and Threshold multipliers.

The Tuning Board also carries a 48-to-one multiplexer and a D/A converter, enabling digital read-out from the working
points in the 48 PMT’s.

4.3.6.5 Power Board (9STB0629)

The Power Board distributes high- and low voltages to the 8 PMT interconnecting strips. It also carries driver circuits for
the autotuning.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-44

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
4.4 ACQUISITION PC
The PC hardware is an off-the-shelf PC with the following minimum specifications:

IBM compatible, 550 MHz, ATX, 512 kb CPU RAM, 128 Mb SDRAM PC100, 15 GB Hard Disk, 3.5” Floppy drive, 40x
speed CD-ROM drive, 16 MB Graphics, and Ethernet adapter (10/100).

A Unibrain IEEE 1394 Firewire board with PCI connector has been added to the standard PC.

The PC software operates under Microsoft Windows 2000.

4.4.1 PC POWER CONNECTION

The Acquisition PC must be powered with 115 V from the gantry.

Acquisition PC signal connections are the following:

• Firewire. The cable between the Acquisition PC and the gantry contains a Firewire cable, which is connected to any of
the Firewire connections on the PC and to the Firewire connection on the gantry connector panel.
• Network. A standard network cable with RJ45 connectors connects the PC to the Odyssey computer via the
institution’s local area network. The cable between the Acquisition PC and the gantry contains the network cable,
which ends in an RJ45 female connector near the gantry connector panel.

4.5 HAND CONTROLLER

The hand controller is connected to the safety board via the rear panel. The Collision Override and Motion Stop signals
are used directly on the safety board, where the Stop signal turns off all motion power via a relay. The Collision Override
signal resumes motion power. The Mark and Start keys are not used by the motion controllers, but only by the Acquisition
PC.

Motion Stop activates a stop action on the safety board and is not recognized by the Motion Controllers. When an
emergency stop has been activated, the hardware on the safety board requires that Collision Override via the hand
controller be activated in order to resume normal operation.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-45

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
The hand controller keypad includes a number of motion keys and a number of functional keys. The motion keys define
the direction of motion. Motion and functional keys are listed in the table below.

Motion keys Functional keys

Table Out Motion Enable/Accelerate

Table In Mark

Detector Out Start Acquisition

Detector In Collision Override

Rotate CCW Motion Stop

Rotate CW

Detector Tilt In

Detector Tilt Out

Pressing both and simultaneously automatically sets detector tilt to 0°. After gantry power-up, pressing

and at the same time causes the system to calibrate table motion.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-46

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
4.5.1 COLLISION OVERRIDE
When a safety stop has been activated, the user must use the COLLISION OVERRIDE button to activate the system
again.

When COLLISION OVERRIDE and one of the motion keys are pressed simultaneously, the system will start moving at a
very low speed. This will allow for movements away from the collision.

NOTE
When COLLISION OVERRIDE is used instead of MOTION ENABLE, it is possible to
drive the detectors into the table or the gantry base.

Both keys must be released before another motion can occur.

When the system has moved into a ‘safe’ area (i.e., where a collision is no longer detected), it is possible to use the
normal MOTION ENABLE key again.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-47

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 4-48
07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5 CALIBRATIONS

CONTENTS
5.1 About this Chapter .................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2 Detector Calibrations ................................................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.2.1 Detector Calibrations Overview ................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.2 Checks Prior to Calibrations ........................................................................................................................ 5-6
5.2.2.1 Power Supply Check................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.2.2 Background Noise Check ......................................................................................................... 5-10
5.2.3 High Voltage (HV) and PMT Calibration (PMT) ......................................................................................... 5-12
5.2.3.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 5-12
5.2.3.2 High Voltage Calibration Procedure .......................................................................................... 5-12
5.2.3.3 PMT Calibration Procedure ....................................................................................................... 5-15
5.2.4 Energy Calibration (ECal) .......................................................................................................................... 5-20
5.2.4.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 5-20
5.2.4.2 Energy Calibration Procedure (ECAL) ...................................................................................... 5-20
5.2.5 Geometry Calibration (GeoCal) ................................................................................................................. 5-25
5.2.5.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 5-25
5.2.5.2 Geometry Calibration Procedure .............................................................................................. 5-26
5.2.6 Energy Correction Calibration (ECor) ........................................................................................................ 5-31
5.2.6.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 5-31
5.2.6.2 Energy Correction Calibration Procedure ................................................................................. 5-32
5.2.7 Spatial Linearity Correction Calibration (LinCor) ........................................................................................ 5-36
5.2.7.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 5-36
5.2.7.2 Spatial Linearity Correction Calibration Procedure ................................................................... 5-36
5.2.8 Uniformity Calibration (UnifCor) ................................................................................................................. 5-42
5.2.8.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 5-42
5.2.8.2 Uniformity Calibration Procedure .............................................................................................. 5-42
5.2.9 Collimator Map Calibration ........................................................................................................................ 5-45
5.2.9.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 5-45

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-1

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 5.2.9.2 Collimator Map Calibration Procedure ...................................................................................... 5-46
5.2.10 Center of Rotation Calibration (COR) ........................................................................................................ 5-49
5.2.10.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 5-49
5.2.10.2 Center of Rotation Calibration Procedure ................................................................................. 5-50
5.2.11 QC Uniformity Calibration .......................................................................................................................... 5-54
5.2.11.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 5-54
5.2.11.2 QC Uniformity Calibration Procedure ........................................................................................ 5-54
5.3 Detector Performance Tests................................................................................................................................... 5-60
5.3.1 Center of Rotation, COR Analysis ............................................................................................................. 5-60
5.3.1.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 5-60
5.3.1.2 Center of Rotation Analysis Procedure ..................................................................................... 5-60
5.3.2 Flood Uniformity Test ................................................................................................................................. 5-67
5.3.2.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 5-67
5.3.2.2 Flood Uniformity Check Procedure ........................................................................................... 5-67
5.3.3 Resolution and Linearity ............................................................................................................................ 5-71
5.3.4 SPECT Performance Test ......................................................................................................................... 5-74
5.3.4.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 5-74
5.3.4.2 SPECT Performance Test Procedure ....................................................................................... 5-74
5.4 Motion Alignments .................................................................................................................................................. 5-80
5.4.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 5-80
5.4.2 Tilt Motion Calibration ................................................................................................................................ 5-81
5.4.3 Radius Motion Calibration .......................................................................................................................... 5-85
5.4.4 Roll Motion Calibration and Ultimate Limit Reset ....................................................................................... 5-89
5.5 Motion Limit Checks ............................................................................................................................................... 5-96
5.5.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 5-96
5.5.2 Roll Motion Limit Check ............................................................................................................................. 5-96
5.5.3 Radius Motion Limit Check ........................................................................................................................ 5-97
5.5.4 Tilt Motion Limit Check .............................................................................................................................. 5-98
5.5.5 Table Motion Limit Check .......................................................................................................................... 5-99

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-2

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5.1 ABOUT THIS CHAPTER
This chapter describes all necessary calibrations in the Meridian system.

5.2 DETECTOR CALIBRATIONS

5.2.1 DETECTOR CALIBRATIONS OVERVIEW

All of the detector calibrations are performed electronically from menu selections on the Acquisition PC. Before beginning,
make sure that High Voltage has been applied for a period of time. If power has been removed for more than a 15
minutes period, the High Voltage must be applied for an equally long period prior to calibrations. The detector electronics
must also be left for at least 15 minutes with the cover installed in order to reach operating temperature. Fluctuations in
temperature (increase or decrease) can cause calibrations to drift as the detectors reach operating temperature.

A complete calibration may be necessary after replacing the following detector parts:

EDC Board, PMT, X-E Strip, Y Strip, Crystal.

A complete calibration of the Meridian detector involves the steps listed in the table below.

NOTE
The shaded rows indicate calibrations likely to be required at installation time.

*)
# Calibration Equipment Isotopes Approximate
(POINT SOURCES) Duration
1 HVCal N/A N/A 3 min.
(High Voltage calibration)
2 PMTCal Tripod point source Tc-99m or Co-57 10 min.
(PMT basic calibration) holder 20-24 MBq or 0.5-0.6 mCi

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-3

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 *)
# Calibration Equipment Isotopes Approximate
(POINT SOURCES) Duration
3 Ecal Tripod point source Tc-99m or Co-57 and Ga- 30 min.
(Energy calibration) holder 67 or Ba-133
20-24 MBq or 0.5-0.6 mCi
4 GeoCal MWSR mask, 4 sources, Ga-67 or Ba-133 10 - 15 min.
(Geometry calibration) 4 collimated source 4-8 MBq or 100-200 μCi
holders each
5 PMTCal Update Tripod point source Tc-99m or Co-57 5 min.
holder 20-24 MBq or 0.5-0.6 mCi
6 Ecor Tripod point source Tc-99m or Co-57 30 min.
(Energy correction calib.) holder 20-24 MBq or 0.5-0.6 mCi
7 LinCor Linearity phantoms Tc-99m or Co-57 90 min.
(Spatial linearity calibration) Tripod source holder 120 - 200 MBq or 3-5 mCi
8 UnifCor Tripod point source As desired 30 - 45 min.
(Isotope specific uniformity) holder 20 - 24 MBq or 0.5 -
0.6 mCi
9 QC Uniformity Correction Point source holder Tc-99m or Co-57 15 min.
~4 MBq or 100 μCi
10 Collimator Map Correction Tc-99m flood pool Tc-99m or Co-57, Approx. 30 min.
(prerequisite: Intrinsic Tc- source or Co-57 sheet 200 - 400 MBq or 5-10 mCi
99m or Co-57 uniformity source
correction, depending on
the isotope used for
collimator map correction)
11 CorCor (Center of Rotation Point source in COR Tc-99m or Co-57, 15 - 20 min.
Calibration) point source holder 80 - 120 MBq or 2-3 mCi
*) See Note on following page.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-4

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 NOTE
The calibrations are interdependent in a hierarchical order. Any number in the
sequence must be preceded by all lower numbers. In other words, when performing
ECor, all other calibrations preceding ECor must also be done.

NOTE
To access the Service Menu to perform detector calibrations, you must enter a
password. Once the password has been entered, all the menu selections are enabled.
Only after exiting the Meridian application software will the Service Menu selection will
again be disabled.
It is important to remember to close down and restart the Meridian application when
done with the detector calibrations. This will disable access to the Service Menus.

NOTE
Prior to performing any detector calibration, it is assumed that the gantry motions have
been initialized. It is also a prerequisite that the service person is familiar with general
gantry operating procedures.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-5

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5.2.2 CHECKS PRIOR TO CALIBRATIONS
Before any detector calibrations are performed, the power supplies and background radiation should be checked.

5.2.2.1 Power Supply Check

The Detector Power Supply receives 55 V DC detector power through the detector cable. The 55 V is used to generate
four low voltages: +15 V, +5 V, –5 V, –15 V and a negative High Voltage adjustable to –1500 V max. The 55 V is also
transferred to the EDC Board for its power requirements.

The Power Supply Check procedure requires you to check the detector's low & high voltage sources via LED indicators on
the power supply and EDC board.

NOTE
The PMT’s require a warm-up period of 24 hours to stabilize, once power is applied for
the first time during installation. References to other waiting periods in this procedure
apply after this initial stabilization period. If power has been removed for more than a
15 minute period, the High Voltage must be applied for an equally long period of time
before calibrations are started. The detector electronics must also be left for at least 15
minutes with the cover installed in order to reach operating temperature.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-6

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

1. Remove the head cover from the

detector.
2. Five LED’s inside the Detector Power
Supply provide information about the
integrity of the output voltages.
The LED’s are visible through the
perforations of the top cover.

Location of LEDs on the Detector Power Supply

LED Name Color Signifies

HVHIGH RED High Voltage higher than specified setting

HVGOOD GREEN High Voltage at specified setting
HVLOW RED High Voltage lower than specified setting or not enabled
LVGOOD GREEN All Low Voltages in specified range
LVLOW RED One or more Low Voltages lower than specified range

NOTE
If the HVCal tables have not been loaded to the detector, the red HVLOW LED may be
illuminated. This is normal! The power supply must have HVCal tables loaded before
this LED is lit as HVGOOD. HVCal is automatically loaded when the Meridian
application is started on the Acquisition PC.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-7

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
The detector power supply has been designed with an extra set of power output connectors to allow for monitoring of the
output voltages.

Each set of connectors comprises a 9 pin sub-D female connector supplying analog low voltages to the detector, a BNC
connector supplying high voltage and a 15 pin sub-D female connector for the EDC Board.

Low voltages on the 9 pin sub-D female connector are listed in the table below.

Connector pin out Voltage

Pin 1 +15 +/– 0.3 V DC
Pin 2 +5 +/– 0.25 V DC
Pin 4 –5 +/– 0.25 V DC
Pin 5 –15 +/– 0.3 V DC
Pin 3, 7, 8 Ground

High Voltage on the BNC connector is as listed in the table below.

Inner conductor –500 to –1500 V DC

i.e. the result of the high voltage calibration.
See page 5-12.
Shield Return

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-8

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Check of LED’s on EDC Board

Procedure Details

1. An LED is located on the rear panel of

the EDC Board. The LED’s indicate
when power is applied to the EDC
Board.
EDC Power LED indicator
located here

COLLIMATOR CABLE
9CBL1140
ANALOG SIGN. 9CBL0657

DETEBL0718
DETEBL0659

9C
9C

CTOR
TUNE CONTROL

CTO
9CBL0658

R LV

HV

DETECTOR CABLE
9CBL1079
DETECTOR EDC BOARD
POWER 9UNT1114
SUPPLY
9PSU0934

DETECTOR POWER
PIN 7-8
COLLISION JUMPER
9CBL0820 CAN-BUS
TERMINATOR
9CBL0561

ED 9
C CB
P O L0
WE 66
ECG

R C1
AB
FIREWIRE
CAN-BUS

LE
2. Reinstall the detector cover and allow
the detector internal temperature to
stabilize for 15 minutes.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-9

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5.2.2.2 Background Noise Check
Before introducing any sources to the area, you must first check that there is no major background radiation present that
could cause erroneous data during certain calibrations.

Check the background radiation by performing the following steps:

Procedure Details

1. Verify that there are no unshielded

sources of radiation in the room.
Remove the collimator from the system
if present. On the Persistence page,
click the S or Static Acquisition
button.
Static Acquisition

Persistence page

2. The Static Acquisition page appears.

Select the Energy Window Setup
button located in the middle to the far
right.

Energy Window Setup

button

Static Acquisition page

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-10

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

3. The pop-up shown on the right

appears.
Set Width % to 150 percent with a
Peak keV of 225.
Select Done. Energy Window setup pop-up

4. Select Start to begin the acquisition.

The count rate should now reflect the
background count activity.

5. Verify that the counts do not exceed

Rate c/s Field
500 counts per second. The count rate
information can be found on the top
menu bar under the Rate c/s field.

NOTE
Should the counts exceed the specified maximum count rate, attempt to determine the
cause of the excessive count rate. Take steps to shield the detector accordingly so as
to ensure that excessive counts do not to effect calibrations.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-11

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5.2.3 HIGH VOLTAGE (HV) AND PMT CALIBRATION (PMT)
5.2.3.1 Description
A basic alignment of the PMT’s is necessary as a first step. The PMT Calibration program may start out with loading
previous tuning values. In that case, the calibration is referred to as an Update Tuning. However, if it is a first time tuning
of a detector, a basic calibration must be performed and default values will be loaded. The High Voltage is subsequently
adjusted to a relatively low value and then moves upwards in steps. For each HV step, 10 seconds are allowed for the
Autotuning to lock in on those tubes that have reached their lower working limit. Also for each HV step, the Working Point
for each PMT is monitored. The HV continues to step upwards until all PMT Working Points are in their dynamic range.
From that step, the HV is increased by another 50 V in order to ensure that all PMT’s are in sufficient gain range. Finally,
the HV value is stored in the tuning file.

Following the basic alignment of the PMT’s, a series of iterative flood images are acquired as dual energy acquisitions,
using two energy windows around the specified isotope energy. The images are spatially subdivided into regions, each
representing the outline of a PMT. For each iteration, the count rates for all PMT regions in both the low and the high
energy window are compared individually and if they are not equal, the tube gain is adjusted accordingly.

When equilibrium has been reached for all tubes, the PMT tuning file is stored along with the final tuning values.

5.2.3.2 High Voltage Calibration Procedure

To be performed • At installation
• When the EDC Board, PMT Tube or Crystal is replaced.

Detector With or without collimator.

Source None.

Total calibration time Approximately 3 minutes.

Calibration file created C:\meridian\calibrations\hvcal.dat.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-12

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

1. On the Persistence page, click the

Tools button to access the Calibration
& Configuration menu. Tools
button
2. Select Service in the Calibration &
Configuration menu.
Enter the service password (currently
DDD).

Calibration & Configuration Menu Service Calibrations Menu

3. When the Service Calibrations Menu

appears, select the High Voltage
calibration utility.
The High Voltage page appears.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-13

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

4. Click the Start button to begin the

calibration.
The display will show the PMT working
values that are being read at the EDC
board. The HV continues to step
upwards until all PMT’s have their Typical working point
autotuning control loop in their dynamic values are in the range
range, which is reflected by the work of 20 –150
point value. Once this has taken place,
the HV is increased by another 50 V to
ensure that all PMT’s have sufficient
gain range. The HV value is stored on
the Acquisition station.

5. When the High Voltage calibration is

complete, a pop-up message appears
indicating that the High Voltage
Calibration is done. Exit button
Select OK to exit the message window
and click Exit to exit the High Voltage
calibration menu and return to the Message window
Service menu.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-14

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5.2.3.3 PMT Calibration Procedure

To be performed • At installation
• After HV calibration
• When the EDC Board, PMT Tube, X-E Strip, Y Strip or Crystal is replaced.

Detector Without collimator.

Source Tc99 or Co57, 20 – 24 MBq or 500 – 600 μCi in the tripod point source holder.

Total Calibration Time Approximately 10 minutes.

Calibration file created C:\meridian\calibrations\pmtcal.dat.

NOTE
The detector cover must be in place and the detector electronics must be at normal
operating temperature before beginning this procedure.

NOTE
Should certain tubes not allow the calibration to complete, the PMT LED Wiper may
need adjustment to adjust the gain setting to an acceptable level. This may be
particularly needed after replacement of a PMT, as a new PMT tends to tune outside
the recommended range of tuning values of 200 to 800. To increase the tuning value,
adjust the LED Wiper in the clockwise direction. To decrease the tuning value, adjust
the LED Wiper in the counterclockwise direction. The LED Wiper must be adjusted in
small steps.
After adjusting a LED Wiper during a PMT calibration, allow 5-6 iterations before
adjusting further. It is normal for adjacent PMT’s to show erroneous gain values
immediately following a LED Wiper adjustment.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-15

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

1. Remove the collimator following the

procedure given in the Operator’s
Manual.
2. Use the hand controller to move the
table to position 0 mm.
3. With the hand controller, set the tilt
angle to 90°, the roll angle to 0° and
the radius to 256 mm.

4. In the tripod souce holder, place a ~20 Minimum 2.5 m

MBq or 500 μCi point source of the
isotope to be used for the PMT
calibration.
5. Place the tripod at a minimum distance
of 2.5 m (8' 2") from the detector and
exactly in front of it.

NOTE
If 8' 2" (2.5 m) cannot be obtained, the source must be positioned as far away from the
detector as possible. This may require repositioning the detector (rotate, tilt and radius)
to accommodate the new position of the source. Remember that the source must be
placed in a position providing a good uniform distribution of activity across the entire
detector face.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-16

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

6. Go to the Acquisition PC Persistence

page.
Tools
7. Click the Tools button. button

8. Select Service.
Click the PMT button to access the
PMT tune utility.

Calibration & Configuration Menu Service Calibrations Menu

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-17

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

9. Once the PMT calibration page

appears, select the following
parameters:
Select Update PMT table – unless a
major repair requires a tuning from
scratch. An update is also required
after performing GEOCal.
Select the appropriate isotope (either
Tc99m or Co57).
10. Ensure that the source exposes the
entire detector and that the count rate
is < 40 kcps. This can be done by
changing the persistence in the image
using the F4 Window Baseline function
key and adjusting the window until an
acceptable image is shown on the
acquisition PC.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-18

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

11. When the parameters have been set, The PMT gain values are displayed in colors indicating their status:
click Start to begin the PMT calibration. • Yellow indicates that tuning is in progress
The calibration will go through several • Green indicates that the PMT has been tuned
iterations while adjusting the gain of • Red indicates that the PMT has failed tuning and is outside range.
each of the PMT’s.

PMT gain values

(range: 0 to 1023,
typical 200 to 800)

12. When the output of all the PMT’s are at

the same level, the calibration is
complete. A message window is
displayed indicating that the calibration Exit button
is complete. Select OK to exit the
message window.
13. Click Exit to return to the service menu. Message window

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-19

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5.2.4 ENERGY CALIBRATION (ECAL)
5.2.4.1 Description
Energy Calibration ensures that the digital representation of the energy spectrum matches window selections and the
spectrum display. The Calibration is based upon two or three known isotope peaks exposing the detector.

NOTE
Ecal must be preceded by HV and PMT calibration.

5.2.4.2 Energy Calibration Procedure (ECAL)

To be performed When the EDC Board, X-E Strip or Crystal is replaced

Detector Without collimator.

Sources A minimum of two isotopes must be used. Select one isotope from each of the groups 1. and
2. below.
1. Tc99 or Co57, 20 – 24 MBq or 500 – 600 μCi
2. Ga67 or Ba133, 20 – 24 MBq or 500 – 600 μCi.

Total Calibration Time Approximately 30 minutes.

Calibration file created C:\meridian\calibrations\ecal.dat.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-20

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

1. Remove the collimator according to the

procedure described in the Operator’s
Manual.
2. Use the hand controller to move the
table to position 0 mm.
3. With the hand controller, set the Tilt
angle to 90°, the Roll angle to 0° and
the radius to 256 mm.

4. Select Tools and then Service.

5. Enter the service password (currently Tools
DDD) and select the ECAL calibration button
utility.

Calibration & Configuration Menu Service Calibrations Menu

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-21

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

Co57: 122.1
6. In the Counts field, enter 3000000 (3 Tc99: 140.5
30
million).
7. In the Width field, enter 30.
8. In the Window 1 field, enter 122.1 for
Co57 or 140.5 for Tc99.
9. In the Window 2 field, enter 81 if Ba133
is used or 92 if Ga67 is used.
10. In the Window 3 field, enter 356 if Ba133: 81
Ba133: 356 Ga67: 92
Ba133 is used or 298 if Ga67 is used. Ga67: 298

11. In the tripod souce holder, place a ~20 Minimum 2.5 m

MBq or 500 μCi point source of the first
isotope to be used for the Energy
calibration.
12. Place the tripod at a minimum distance
of 2.5 m (8' 2") from the detector and
exactly in front of it.

NOTE
If 8' 2" (2.5 m) cannot be obtained, the source must be positioned as far away from the
detector as possible. This may require repositioning the detector (rotate, tilt and radius)
to accommodate the new position of the source. Remember that the source must be
placed in a position providing a good uniform distribution of activity across the entire
detector face.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-22

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

13. Check that the source exposes the

entire detector and that the count rate
is < 40 kcps.
14. Click on Start to acquire the spectrum
of Window 1.

15. When the message box Iteration 1

appears, remove the Co57 (Tc99m)
source and place the Ga67 or Ba133
source in the tripod source holder.
16. Check that the sources expose the
entire detector and that the count rate
is < 40 kcps.
17. Click on OK to acquire the spectrum of
Window 2.

18. When the message box Iteration 2

appears, click OK again to acquire the
spectrum of Window 3.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-23

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

19. When the Window 3 spectrum is

acquired, the message shown to the
right appears.
Click OK. Exit button
Typical energy coefficients are:
20. Click on the Exit button to return to the Parameter C0: 0 +/- 20
Service page. Parameter C1: 1 +/- 0.3
Message window Parameter C2: 0 +/- 0.002.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-24

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5.2.5 GEOMETRY CALIBRATION (GEOCAL)

5.2.5.1 Description
Geometry Calibration adjusts the image geometry for symmetry and uniform spatial registration over the energy range.
Four multiple energy point sources are placed on the outer calibration marks on the crystal surface and two images of the
point sources are acquired in a dual energy setup. The position of the images of the point sources is calculated for both of
the two energies. Based on the result, the normalization table is modified to correct for any mismatch. With this
normalization table applied, another iteration of acquisition and calculation is run to check the result. The process is
repeated (typically 5 to 10 times) until specification is met.

NOTE
GeoCal must be preceded by HV, PMT and ECal calibration. When this sequence has
been completed with GeoCal, a PMT Update must be performed.

NOTE
If only Technetium and no other isotopes will be used, the factory default calibration
tables should be used. In this case, these steps should be skipped. The factory default
should continue to apply the correct Geometry settings regardless of whether this is a
new installation or whether detector parts have been changed.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-25

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5.2.5.2 Geometry Calibration Procedure

To be performed When the EDC Board, X-E Strip, Y Strip or Crystal is replaced.

Detector GeoCal mask (part of Service Calibration Kit).

Sources 4 sources, Ba133, Ga67 or Tl201 ~4 – 8 MBq or 100 – 200 μCi each.

Source Holders 4 pcs. with 4 bottles (part of Service Calibration Kit).

Total Calibration Time Approximately 10 – 15 minutes.

Calibration file created C:\meridian\calibrations\geocal.dat.

Procedure Details

1. Remove the collimator from the

detector. Refer to the Collimator
Exchange section in the Operator’s
Manual.

2. Use the hand controller to set the

detector to radius 256 mm.
3. With the hand controller, rotate the
detector to Roll angle = 180°. Leave the
Tilt angle at 0°.
4. Place the GeoCal Mask on the
detector.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-26

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

5. Place the 4 lead pigs in the 4 outer

holes in the GeoCal Mask.

6. On the Acquisition PC, click the Tools

button and select Service.
Tools
7. Enter the service password (currently button
DDD) and select GeoCal calibration
utility.

Calibration & Configuration Menu Service Calibrations Menu

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-27

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

8. On the GeoCal page, fill in the High

Energy field:
If Ba133 is used, enter 356 keV
Ba133: 356
If Ga67 is used, enter 298 keV Ga67: 298
Tl201: 167
If Tl201 is used, enter 167 keV.
9. Fill in the Low Energy field: Ba133: 81
Ga67: 92
If Ba133 is used, enter 81 keV Tl201: 75

If Ga67 is used, enter 92 keV

If Tl201 is used, enter 75 keV.
10. Click Continue, and keep the
OVERRIDE button on the hand
controller depressed at all times while
automated motion is being performed.

NOTE
Tl201 should only be used when Ga67 or Ba133 are not available. This is due to the
fact that the high peak of Tl201 lies in the lower part of the detector’s energy range.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-28

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

11. Click on Start.

Low energy
image

High energy
image

Iteration
progress

12. When the calibration is done, click OK,

and click the Exit.

Exit button

Message window

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-29

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Typical GEOCal results are:
Parameter KX0: 1 +/- 0.2
Parameter KX1: 0 +/- 0.01
Parameter KY0: 1 +/- 0.2
Parameter KY1: 0 +/- 0.01
Parameter ABSOFFX: 0 +/- 1
Parameter ABSOFFY: 0 +/- 1
Parameter RELOFFX: 0 +/- 1
Parameter RELOFFX: 0 +/- 1
Note: These values are typical, regardless of the isotope used.

NOTE
When the GeoCal calibration is completed, a PMT Update must be performed. Refer
to section 5.2.3.3 PMT Calibration Procedure on page 5-15 for further details on how to
perform a PMT Update.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-30

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5.2.6 ENERGY CORRECTION CALIBRATION (ECOR)

5.2.6.1 Description
Energy Correction is a spatially related energy correction map. The map is generated based on relative count rate
information in two energy windows, one on each side of the chosen isotope peak. The map generation is an iterative
process – typically involving 3-5 iterations.

Once generated, each address in the map will contain a correction factor that is applied to the energy signal during
acquisitions.

NOTE
ECor must be preceded by HV, PMT, Ecal and GeoCal calibration.

To be performed When the EDC Board, PMT Tube, X-E Strip, Y Strip or Crystal is replaced.

Detector Intrinsic procedure, no collimator.

Source Tc99 or Co57, 20 – 24 MBq or 500 – 600 μCi in the tripod point source holder.

Total Calibration Time Approximately 30 minutes.

Calibration file created C:\meridian\calibrations\ecor.dat.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-31

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5.2.6.2 Energy Correction Calibration Procedure

Procedure Details

1. Remove the collimator according to the

procedure described in the Operator’s
Manual.
2. Use the hand controller to move the
table to position 0 mm.
3. With the hand controller, set the Tilt
angle to 90°, the Roll angle to 0° and
the radius to 256 mm.

4. In the tripod souce holder, place a ~20 Minimum 2.5 m

MBq or 500 μCi point source of the
isotope to be used for the energy
correction calibration.
5. Place the tripod at a minimum distance
of 2.5 m (8' 2") from the detector and
exactly in front of it.

NOTE
If 8' 2" (2.5 m) cannot be obtained, the source must be positioned as far away from the
detector as possible. This may require repositioning the detector (rotate, tilt and radius)
to accommodate the new position of the source. Remember that the source must be
placed in a position providing a good uniform distribution of activity across the entire
detector face.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-32

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

6. From the Acquisition PC’s main menu,

select Tools and then Service.
Tools
7. Enter the service password (currently button
DDD) and select the ECor calibration
utility.

Calibration & Configuration Menu Service Calibrations Menu

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-33

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

8. Once the ECor calibration page

appears, select the following
parameters:
Select Update ECOR table – unless a
major repair requires a calibration from
scratch.
Select the appropriate isotope (either
Tc99m or Co57).

NOTE
If you are performing an ECor update, either isotope (Tc99m or Co57) can be selected.
The update is not dependent on the isotope used during the initial ECor calibration.

Procedure Details

9. Ensure that the source exposes the

entire detector and that the count rate
is < 40 kcps. This can be done by
changing the persistence in the image
using the F4 Window Baseline function
key and adjusting the window until an
acceptable image is shown on the
acquisition terminal.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-34

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

10. Click Start to calibrate the detector.

Number indicates
progress of
iterations

11. When this message pops up, click OK

and then click Exit.

Exit button

Message window

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-35

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5.2.7 SPATIAL LINEARITY CORRECTION CALIBRATION (LINCOR)

5.2.7.1 Description
Linearity Correction is a spatially related linearity correction. The map is generated based on images of phantoms with slit
patterns, one for the X direction and one for the Y direction. From those images, deviations from an ‘ideal’ slit pattern are
calculated and a map with correction factors is generated. Once generated, each address in the map will contain a
correction factor that is applied to the position signals during acquisition.

NOTE
LinCor must be preceded by HV, PMT, ECal, GeoCal and ECor calibration.

5.2.7.2 Spatial Linearity Correction Calibration Procedure

To be performed When the EDC Board, PMT Tube, X-E Strip, Y Strip or Crystal is replaced.

Detector X & Y Spatial Masks (part of Service Calibration Kit).

Sources Tc99 or Co57 ~120-200 MBq or 3-5 mCi in the Tripod source holder

Total Calibration Time Approximately 90 minutes.

Calibration file created C:\meridian\calibrations\lincor.dat.

Procedure Details

1. Remove the collimator from the

detector. Refer to the Collimator
Exchange section in the Operator’s
Manual.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-36

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

2. Use the hand controller to move the

Table to the 0 position.
3. With the hand controller, set the Tilt
angle to 90°, while leaving the Roll
angle at 0°.

4. Place the X-Linearity phantom on the

detector. Secure with the phantom
fixing screws. Upper phantom
fixing screw

5. Place a ~120-200MBq or 3-5 mCi point Minimum 2.5 m

source, Tc99 or Co57, at a minimum
distance of 2.5 m (8’ 8”) from the
detector, exactly in front of the
detector.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-37

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 NOTE
If a distance of 2.5 m (8’ 8”) cannot be obtained, the source must be positioned as far
away from the detector as possible. This may require repositioning the detector (rotate,
tilt and radius) to accommodate the new position of the source. Remember that the
source must be placed in a position providing a good uniform distribution of activity
across the entire detector face.

Procedure Details

6. On the Acquisition PC, click on the

Tools button on the Persistence page
and then click Service. Tools
button
7. Enter the service password (currently
DDD) and select the LinCor calibration
utility.

Calibration & Configuration Menu Service Calibrations Menu

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-38

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

8. When the LINCOR page is displayed:

60000000
In the Counts field, enter 60000000
(sixty million).
30
In the Width field, enter 30.
Select the appropriate isotope. Select the appropriate
isotope

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-39

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

9. Check that the source exposes the

entire detector and that the count rate
is < 40 kcps.
Slits
10. Click Start
After a few million counts, check that all
the slits in the phantom are clearly
resolved. This is to make sure that a
defective PMT is not causing neighbor
tubes to ‘pull’ counts and distort
linearity.

11. When the X-direction is done, this

message pops up.
Do not click OK at this point.
Take the point source away.

NOTE
Remove source to avoid saturating open detector.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-40

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

12. Swap the phantom from X to Y.

Put the source back in place and click
OK.

13. Now Y linearity data is being acquired.

Again, after a few million counts check
that all the slits in the phantom are
clearly resolved.
Slits

14. When the detector has been calibrated

(both X and Y directions), this message
pops up.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-41

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 NOTE
Remove source to avoid saturating open detector.

Procedure Details

15. Click OK in the message box. Click

Exit to return to the Service menu.

Exit button

Message window

5.2.8 UNIFORMITY CALIBRATION (UNIFCOR)

5.2.8.1 Description
The uniformity of the scintillation crystal in the detector is dependant on the energy of the isotope used. To compensate
for non-uniformity, the detector requires uniformity calibration (UnifCor).

5.2.8.2 Uniformity Calibration Procedure

To be performed When the detector has been re-calibrated. This may also be performed by the customer as
part of normal QA.

Detector Intrinsic no collimator. (Not applicable for use with a cobalt sheet source).

Sources Specific isotope ~ 20 – 24 MBq or 500 – 600 μCi placed in the Tripod source holder.

Total calibration time Approximately 30 – 45 minutes.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-42

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Calibration file created C:\meridian\calibrations\Uniformity Maps\UnifCor.xxx. xxx represents the energy level for the
UnifCor isotope correction (i.e. 122 for Co57).

Procedure Details

1. Remove the collimator according to the

procedure described in the Operator’s
Manual.
2. Use the hand controller to move the
table to 0 position.
3. With the hand controller, set the Tilt
angle to 90°, the Roll angle to 0° and
the radius to 256 mm.

4. In the tripod souce holder, place a ~20 Minimum 2.5 m

MBq or 500 μCi point source of the
isotope for which UnifCor is to be
acquired.
5. Place the tripod at a minimum distance
of 2.5 m (8' 2") from the detector and
exactly in front of it.

NOTE
If 8' 2" (2.5 m) cannot be obtained, the source must be positioned as far away from the
detector as possible. This may require repositioning the detector (rotate, tilt and radius) to
accommodate the new position of the source. Remember that the source must be placed in a
position providing a good uniform distribution of activity across the entire detector face.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-43

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

6. On the Acquisition PC, click

on the Tools button and then
click on the UnifCor button. Tools
button

Calibration & Configuration Menu

7. The UnifCor calibration page

appears.
In the three Energy (keV) keV values of
fields, enter the keV values isotopes
of the peaks of the applied
20
isotope. Leave unused fields
empty if single or dual peak
100000000
isotopes are used.
8. In the Width field, enter 20.
9. In the Termination counts
field, enter 100000000 (100
million).
10. Check that the source
exposes the entire detector
and that the count rate is <
40 kcps.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-44

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
11. Click Start.

12. After having acquired the

specified number of counts, a
UnifCor table is automatically
generated. Exit button
Click OK when this message
pops up.
13. Click on the Exit icon to Message window
return to the Tools menu.

5.2.9 COLLIMATOR MAP CALIBRATION

5.2.9.1 Description
A collimator map correction is used to correct for minor variations in the collimator sensitivity. Collimator map corrections
are stored in a correction table and applied to the data set that has been acquired as a post process. Collimator map
corrections are only applied to SPECT data acquisitions.

Collimator map correction is collimator specific. It is necessary to acquire a collimator map correction for each collimator
that is used for SPECT scanning.

To acquire a collimator map correction table, ensure that the collimator to be calibrated is mounted on the detector. If the
required collimator is not currently mounted on the detector, change to the appropriate collimator using the collimator
changing procedure as described in Chapter 3 of the Operator’s Manual. Obtain a flood source of an appropriate energy,
count rate and size.

Before the collimator map acquisition is started, the system will identify the collimator type mounted on the detector. This
enables the system to store the acquired specific collimator map correction table under the matching file name and
automatically apply the correction to acquisitions.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-45

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 NOTE
The collimator map correction requires that a Tc-99m or Co-57 intrinsic uniformity
calibration has been performed, depending on the isotope used for the collimator map
correction. See section 5.2.8 Uniformity Calibration (UnifCor), page 5-42

5.2.9.2 Collimator Map Calibration Procedure

To be performed When the detector has been re-calibrated or a new collimator has been added to the
customer’s inventory. This may also be performed by the customer as part of normal QA.

Detector Extrinsic.

Sources Tc-99m fillable flood source or Co-57 sheet source, ~200 – 400 MBq or 5 – 10 mCi.

Total Calibration Time Approximately 30 minutes.

Calibration file created C:\meridian\calibrations\Collimator Maps\UNIcor.collx,

where x represents the assigned collimator number:
0 = LEGP
1 = LEHR
2 = LEUHR
3 = MEGP
5 = HEGP.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-46

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

1. Prepare the fillable flood source Collimator Activity

according to the instructions included.
Alternatively, use a sheet source. LEGP 5 mCi 185 MBq
LEHR 10 mCi 370 MBq
2. Inject the suggested activity of isotope
into the phantom. LEUHR 10 mCi 370 MBq
MEGP 5 mCi 185 MBq
HEGP 5 mCi 185 MBq

3. Use the hand controller to position the

detector at radius 256 mm. Rotate the
detector to roll angle = 180° and leave Place fillable
source here
the tilt angle at 0°.
4. Place the fillable flood source on the
collimated detector.

NOTE
When using a flood source, make sure that there are no air bubbles inside the detector
FOV.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-47

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5. On the Acquisition PC, click on the
Tools button and click the Collimator
Map calibration button. Tools
button

6. When the Collimator map calibration

page appears, select the following
parameters:
Select the appropriate isotope (either
Tc-99m or Co-57). Be sure that a
Uniformity map correction table has
been acquired for this isotope.
Select the appropriate window width.
The default is 20%.
Set the termination counts to 100
million. The default is 100 million.

7. Ensure that the source exposes the

entire detector and that the count rate
is < 40 kcps. This can be done by
changing the persistence in the image
using the F4 Window Baseline function
key and adjusting the window until an
acceptable image is shown on the
acquisition terminal.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-48

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
8. Click Start to begin acquiring the
correction table.

9. When, this message pops up, click OK.

Click Exit to return to the Calibration &
configuration menu.
Exit button

Message window

5.2.10 CENTER OF ROTATION CALIBRATION (COR)

5.2.10.1 Description
A center of rotation correction is used when reconstructing tomographic data to correct for minor misalignment between
the center of the image and the axis of rotation. Center of rotation (COR) corrections are stored in a correction table and
will be applied immediately after a data set it has been acquired.

A COR correction is specific to a collimator. It is necessary to acquire a COR correction for each collimator that is used for
tomographic scans.

To acquire a COR correction, the correct collimator must be mounted on the detector, and a point source of an
appropriate energy and count rate must be used. If the required collimator is not mounted, use the collimator changing
procedure described in the Operator’s Manual

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-49

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5.2.10.2 Center of Rotation Calibration Procedure

To be performed When the EDC Board, PMT Tube, X-E Strip, Y Strip or Crystal is replaced.

Detector Extrinsic (must be performed for each collimator used for SPECT acquisition).

Sources Tc-99m or Co-57 point source, ~ 80 – 120 MBq or 2 – 3 mCi.

Total Calibration Time Approximately 15 – 20 minutes.

Calibration file created C:\meridian\calibrations\CORcor\CORcor.collx,

where x represents the assigned collimator number:
0 = LEGP
1 = LEHR
2 = LEUHR
3 = MEGP
5 = HEGP.

NOTE
Before the COR acquisition is started, the system will identify the collimator type
mounted on the detector. This will enable the system to store the acquired COR
corrections for a specific collimator under the matching file name.

NOTE
If a correction table for the currently mounted type of collimator already exists, the
system will automatically overwrite the old table immediately after the new correction
table has been acquired.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-50

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

1. Verify that the collimator, for which the

COR correction is to be acquired, is
mounted on the detector.
2. Ensure that tilt is at 0°.
Use the hand controller to translate the
table to a position of approx. 1000 mm.
3. Use the hand controller to set radius to
256 mm.
4. Use a Co57 point source or fill the vial
with Tc99m.
If the vial is used, it must be filled with
between 0.2 and 0.3 milliliters. Use a
syringe to fill the vial with caution so
that no activity ends up on the walls of
the vial. Seal the vial with the lid.
5. Remove the table mattress, and place
the point source in the COR source
holder supplied with the system.

6. Position the COR point source holder

with the source in the middle of the Point Source
table cradle and center it with respect
to the detector field of view.

Point source

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-51

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

7. On the Acquisition PC, click on the

Tools button.
8. Click the CorCor button to display the Tools
COR calibration acquisition page. button

Calibration & Configuration Menu

9. Default settings for Energy, Window

Width and Termination counts in first
view are displayed. If the settings are
acceptable, carry on with the
procedure.
If the settings are to be changed, enter
the required energy values.
10. Verify that the count rate is
approximately 5 –10 kcps.
Click Start.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-52

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

11. A warning message (similar to the text

box on the right) appears asking the WARNING
operator to verify that the motion path To perform a COR Acquisition
of the gantry and detector is clear from the gantry has to move to its start position.
any obstacles.
Click OK. The COR Acquisition will be
performed automatically.

12. After the acquisition, the system

automatically stores the acquired COR
corrections for the specific collimator
under the matching file name.

13. After the acquisition has completed

succesfully, click on the Exit icon to
return to the Calibration & configuration
menu. Exit button

From this point on, whenever this collimator is selected, the system automatically selects the corresponding COR value
and applies it to the tomographic data after a dataset has been acquired.

WARNING
After completing the center of rotation calibration, perform a COR check in order to
verify the calibration data.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-53

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5.2.11 QC UNIFORMITY CALIBRATION

5.2.11.1 Description
The QC Uniformity Calibration is performed to ensure a uniform detector field when performing the intrinsic Daily check.
The Daily check is a test of the ability of the gamma camera to produce uniform images. This uniformity calibration is
acquired intrinsically without collimator and is applied to the intrinsic Daily Check acquisition as a post-process correction.
After the Daily Check acquisition has been acquired, the uniformity correction is applied before the image is saved in the
patient database of the Acquisition PC. The uniformity correction corrects for geometric doming of the image, the patient
table and any inherent detector related artifacts.

5.2.11.2 QC Uniformity Calibration Procedure

To be performed When the detector has been re-calibrated.

Detector Intrinsic, no collimator.

Sources Tc99m or Co57 ~4 MBq or 100 μCi in the source holder. If Tc99m is used, the bottle must be
at least half filled with liquid (0.5 ml).

Total Calibration Time Approximately 15 minutes.

Calibration file created C:\meridian\calibrations\QCUNIF.dat.

Procedure Details

1. Remove the collimator from the

detector following the collimator
exchange procedure given in the
Operator’s Manual.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-54

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

2. While the Acquisition PC is displaying

the Persistence page, click on the
Tools button and then on the Daily Tools
button
check button.

Calibration & Configuration Menu

3. On the Daily Check page, check off

Intrinsic.
Keep the COLLISION OVERRIDE
button on the hand controller
depressed and click Start.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-55

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

4. Preprogrammed motion will now

position Meridian for intrinsic Daily
Locator holes of the
check. gantry foot assembly
When the preprogrammed motions
terminate, click the Exit icon to return
to the Tools page. Meridian is now
positioned for QC Uniformity
calibration.
Source holder with vial Source holder bracket
5. Place the bracket for the QC source
holder in the dedicated holes in the
gantry feet below the detector.
6. Place the QC source holder on top of
the bracket so that the screw heads on
the holder fit into the holes in the
bracket. Location of source
holder pins

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-56

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

7. Click the Service button.

Enter the service password (currently
DDD).
8. Click on QC uniformity calibration.

NOTE
QC Uniformity must be calibrated using the same isotope that will be used for intrinsic
Daily check by the customer.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-57

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

9. Once the QC Uniformity Calibration

page appears, select the following
parameters:
Select the appropriate isotope (either
Tc99m or Co57). Ensure that this is
the isotope that will be used for Daily
Check acquisitions.
Select the appropriate window width.
The default is 20%.
Select the termination counts. The
default is 30 million.

10. Ensure that the source exposes the

entire detector and that the count rate
is < 40 kcps. This can be done by
changing the persistence in the image
using the F4 Window Baseline function
key and adjusting the window until an
acceptable image is shown on the
acquisition terminal.
11. Click on Start.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-58

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

12. When the calibration terminates, this

message pops up.
Click OK. Click Exit to return to the
Service menu. Exit button

Message window

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-59

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5.3 DETECTOR PERFORMANCE TESTS
The verification procedures described in this section are to be performed in the field during installation, when directed by
another procedure, or as part of normal maintenance.

5.3.1 CENTER OF ROTATION, COR ANALYSIS

5.3.1.1 Description
COR Analysis is done to test the Center of Rotation registration of the detector. A center of rotation correction is used
when reconstructing tomographic data to correct for a minor misalignment between the center of the image and the axis of
rotation. Center of rotation (COR) corrections are stored in a correction table and are applied as the data set is being
acquired.

A COR correction is collimator specific. It is necessary to acquire a COR correction for each collimator that is used for
tomographic scans. Therefore a COR Analysis should be performed for each Collimator.

5.3.1.2 Center of Rotation Analysis Procedure

To be performed After acquiring a COR correction.

Detector Extrinsic (should be done for each collimator used for SPECT acquisition).

Sources LEHR collimator ~ 120 Mbq or 3 mCi point source, Tc99m or Co57
LEUHR collimator ~ 120 MBq or 3 mCi point source, Tc99m or Co57
LEGP collimator ~ 80 Mbq or 2 mCi point source, Tc99m or Co57
MEGP collimator ~ 80 MBq or 2 mCi point source, Tc99m or Co57
HEGP collimator ~ 80 MBq or 2 mCi point source, Tc99m or Co57.

Total Test Time Approximately 30 minutes.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-60

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

1. Verify that the collimator for which the

COR Check is to be performed is
mounted on the detector.

2. On the Acquisition PC, click on the

SPECT acquisition button on the
Persistence page.
SPECT
button

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-61

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

3. Click on the patient name displayed in

the top corner of the page to bring up
the patient database.
4. In the list, locate a patient named ‘COR
Check’.
Click New Visit.
If a patient named ‘COR Check’ is not
present in the database, follow these
steps to create the entry:
• Click New Patient.
• In the Patient name field, enter
COR Check.
• In the Patient ID field, enter 1234.
• In the Date of Birth field, enter the
current date.
• Check off either Male or Female.
• Click Apply.
• Click the Select Visit button to
return to the SPECT acquisition
page. The patient name button at
the top right will now display ‘COR
Check’.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-62

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

5. Enter the following SPECT setup

parameters:
Acquisition ID: 360 degrees, supine,
feet In
Organ: Other
Matrix: 256 x 256
Type: Raw
Isotope: Tc99m or Co57 depending on
the point source used
Radiopharmaceutical: Other
Nb. Projections: 120, Circular
Rotation: 360, CW
Patient: Supine, Feet In
Time per projection: <blank>
Counts per projection: 20 (kilocounts)
Start Angle: –180.

6. Use a Co57 point source or fill the vial

with Tc99m.
If the vial is used, it must be filled with
between 0.2 and 0.3 ml. Use a syringe
to fill the vial carefully so that no activity
ends up on the walls of the vial. Seal
the vial with the lid.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-63

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

The point source should be

approximately 80 MBq or 2 mCi.

NOTE
Uniformity correction corresponding to the selected isotope must be applied.
Collimator map correction and COR correction must be checked off in the Energy
window setting.

Procedure Details

7. Place the point source in the COR

source holder supplied with the system. Point Source

8. Position the COR point source holder

with the source in the middle of the
table cradle and center it with respect
to the detector field of view. Point source

9. Use the hand controller to adjust the

detector radius to approximately
256 mm.
10. Click Start.
The detector is now rotated to the start
angle and the SPECT acquisition is

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-64

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

performed.

11. When the acquisition terminates, exit

the SPECT acquisition page by clicking
Exit.
Exit button

12. Click the Tools button.

Then select COR Check.
Tools
This brings up the patient database button
page.

Calibration & Configuration Menu

13. Select the SPECT data set acquired in

step 5 – 11:
First select the patient named COR
Check.
Then select the data set by clicking
once on the data set entry.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-65

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

14. Click Done to bring up the COR check

page.

15. The COR check automatically

calculates the center of rotation error in
the acquired point source SPECT data
set and displays the result.
16. Check that the COR check result is
within specifications.
17. Visually inspect the cine display for
jumps in the Y direction and the
sinogram display for jumps in the X
direction.
The sinogram will display the slice
indicated by the horizontal line in the
cine display.
The cursor can be used to select the
appropriate slice to be displayed in the
sinogram by dragging the horizontal
line up and down. The horizontal line is
also useful as a reference when
looking for jumps in the cine display.

COR specs:
X mean = 0 ± 1,78 mm
X range < 4.46 mm
Y range < 4.46 mm.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-66

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5.3.2 FLOOD UNIFORMITY TEST

5.3.2.1 Description
The Flood Uniformity Test assures that the uniformity of the camera field is sufficient to prevent the introduction of artifacts
into clinical studies. This test is performed intrinsically or extrinsically. For the Flood Uniformity Test, you use either Tc99m
or Co57, and you must ensure that appropriate uniformity correction can be applied. The most accurate check is
performed intrinsically.

After acquisition of the Daily check image, a uniformity calculation will be performed to present uniformity figures beside
images for visual inspection.

5.3.2.2 Flood Uniformity Check Procedure

To be performed By the customer: Every day.

By service personnel: After performing a PM, calibration or when it is desired

to check the detector uniformity performance.

Detector Intrinsic.

Sources Tc99 or Co57 ~4 MBq or 100 μCi in the calibration source holder depending
on the isotope used to acquire QC uniformity correction. If Tc99 is used, the
vial (supplied) must be at least half filled with liquid (0.5 ml).

Total Calibration Time Approximately 15 minutes.

NOTE
Before the Intrinsic Uniformity Check is performed, a QC Uniformity correction table
must first be acquired.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-67

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 NOTE
The acquired Daily Check image can also be viewed and printed using the Odyssey
workstation. Placing the acquired image in the workbench and using the Display
function allow viewing and printing of the resulting image. Using the “Long Infobox” will
display the Test Results text as displayed above.

Procedure Details

1. Remove the collimator following the

collimator exchange procedure given in
the Operator’s Manual.

2. On the Acquisition PC, select the Tools

button on the Persistence page.
3. Click the Daily check button at the top Tools
of the Calibration & Configuration menu button
to display the Daily check acquisition
page.

Calibration & Configuration Menu

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-68

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

4. Check off Intrinsic.

5. Check off Tc-99m or Co-57 depending
on the isotope to be used for the check.
Note that the selected isotope must be
the same as used for QC uniformity
calibration.
6. If required, enter a new value for the
window Width and Termination counts.
We recommend the use of the default
values shown.

7. Keep the hand controller

COLLISION OVERRIDE button
depressed before clicking Prepare
Gantry to accept automated motions.
Having pressed Prepare Gantry, the
detector is automatically positioned for
intrinsic Daily check.
ATTENTION: During this automatic
system motion, the detector collision
circuit is disabled. The automatic
system motion will stop immediately if
the COLLISION OVERRIDE button on
the hand controller is deactivated.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-69

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

8. When the detector and table motion

are completed, position the bracket for
the QC source holder in the dedicated
holes in the Gantry feet.
9. Place the QC source holder on top of
the bracket so that the pins on the
holder fit into the holes in the bracket.
Fill the vial with approx. 0.1 mCi of
Co57 or Tc99m until it is at least half
full (0.5 ml). Make sure to position the
vial with the cap facing upwards.

10. Verify that the count rate is less than

40 kc/s, and click the Start button to
start the Daily check acquisition.
A default uniformity correction table is
automatically applied to the acquisition
which compensates for the “dome
effect” and table attenuation.

11. After acquisition of the Daily check

Test result Uniformity Value
image, the system performs a
• Excellent ...................................................... < 4%
uniformity calculation and displays the
• Good ........................................................ 4 to 6%
result.
• OK ........................................................... 6 to 8%
12. Click OK in the pop-up message box to • Detector Calibration Necessary ................... > 8%
switch to the review page.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-70

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

13. Visually inspect the image for

uniformity faults, and evaluate the
calculated uniformity values. If the
system is newly calibrated, the result
should be “Excellent”.

5.3.3 RESOLUTION AND LINEARITY

If a Meridian 4-field bar phantom option (P/N 9UNC0764) is available on the site, the resolution and linearity can be
checked.

To check resolution and linearity follow the below procedure.

Procedure Details

1. Remove the collimator from the

detector. Refer to the Collimator
exchange procedure provided in the
Operator’s Manual.

2. Use the hand controller to move the

Table to the 0 position.
3. With the hand controller, set the Tilt
angle to 90°, leaving the Roll angle at
0°.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-71

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

4. Place the 4-field bar phantom on the

detector. Secure with the phantom
fixing screws. Upper fixing screw

5. Place a ~10-20MBq or 0.3-0.5 mCi

point source, Tc99 or Co57, at a Minimum 2.5 meters
minimum distance of 2.5 m (8’ 8”) away
from the detector, exactly in front of the
it.
6. Check that the count rate is less than
20 kcps.

NOTE
If a distance of 2.5 m (8’ 8”) cannot be obtained, the source must be positioned as far
away from the detector as possible. This may require repositioning the detector (rotate,
tilt and radius) to accommodate the new position of the source. Remember that the
source must be placed in a position allowing a good uniform distribution of activity
across the entire detector face.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-72

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

7. Acquire a static image with 10 million

counts.
8. When the acquisition terminates,
inspect the image for linearity and
resolution errors.
All four quadrants must be resolved
with linear lines. The figure to the right
gives a typical example of a correct
image.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-73

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5.3.4 SPECT PERFORMANCE TEST

5.3.4.1 Description
This test qualitatively determines the SPECT performance of the system. The performance parameters tested are spatial
resolution, uniformity, and lesion detectability. The SPECT Performance Test is an optional QA procedure. In order to
perform this procedure, you must have the optional Deluxe Data Spectrum Phantom.

5.3.4.2 SPECT Performance Test Procedure

To be performed Service: After performing a PM or when it is desired to check the detector performance.

Detector Extrinsic.

Sources Deluxe Data Spectrum phantom filled with Tc99m

LEGP: ~400 MBq or 10 mCi
MEGP: ~400 MBq or 10 mCi
HEGP: ~400 MBq or 10 mCi
LEHR: ~800 MBq or 20 mCi
LEUHR: ~1200 MBq or 30 mCi.

Total calibration time Approximately 45 minutes.

Prepare the Phantom

Procedure Details

1. Ensure that the Deluxe Data Spectrum

phantom has the rods-and-spheres
sections installed.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-74

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 WARNING
Be sure to observe the usual precautions when handling radioactive substances: wear
gloves and protective clothing, use shielding whenever possible. Failure to comply can
result in overexposure to the operator and other personnel in the area.

Procedure Details

2. Prepare the phantom by filling it with Collimator Activity

water until it is about 90% full.
LEGP 10 mCi 400 MBq
3. Inject Tc99m into the phantom.
MEGP 10 mCi 400 MBq
HEGP 10 mCi 400 MBq
LEHR 20 mCi 800 MBq
LEUHR 30 mCi 1200 MBq

4. Replace the cap (tightly) and agitate

the cylinder to completely mix the
radionuclide.
5. Remove one cap and nearly fill the
phantom (leave a small amount of air
to allow mixing).
6. Replace the cap and mix again.
7. Remove the cap and top off the
phantom with water allowing all
remaining air to escape.

An alternative procedure is to pre-mix the solution in another container with a larger volume and pour the mixture into
the phantom.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-75

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Acquisition of SPECT Study

Procedure Details

8. Mount the desired collimator on the SPECT phantom

detector.
9. Position the Deluxe Data Spectrum
phantom centered within the detector
field of view.
10. Use the hand controller to position the
detector at a radius of 256 mm.

11. On the Acquisition PC, set up a SPECT SPECT acquisition parameters to be used:
acquisition following the procedure Collimator: Collimator to be used for SPECT acquisitions
given in the Operator’s Manual. Name: SPECT Analysis
Organ type: Brain
Image size: 128 x 128
Isotope: 99mTc
UnifCor: UnifCor. 140 (in the Energy Window Setup pop-up)
Collimator map: Enabled (in the Energy Window Setup pop-up)
COR: Enabled (in the Energy Window Setup pop-up)
Radiopharmaceutical: Your choice
Zoom: 2
Nb. of projections: 120
Orbit type: Circular
Degrees of rotation: 360°
Direction: CW
Patient: Supine / Head In
Time per projection: Blank
Counts per projection: 500 kilocounts
Start angle: –180°
Source: Tc99m point in the Deluxe Data Spectrum phantom.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-76

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

12. When the SPECT acquisition has

terminated and while the data set is
displayed on the Review page, click the
Exit icon to return to the Persistence Exit button
page.

13. Click the Database icon to enter the

patient Database page.

14. Access the Patient Index on the

Database page and select the SPECT
Analysis acquisition.
15. Transfer the acquired SPECT data set
to the Odyssey workstation by clicking
the Export button.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-77

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Reconstruction and Analysis

Procedure Details

16. Reconstruct the three sections using Reconstruction Parameters

the parameters in the chart. RODS Section
In each case, adjust the First Slice
(therefore also the Last Slice) so that Slice thickness (pix) Filter Att. Cor.
the resulting slice encompasses the 28 BUT/5.25 .11
section of interest (RODS, SPHERES,
UNIFORM). Interactively increment and SPHERES Section
decrement the First Slice setting until
the resultant slice yields the best image Slice thickness (pix) Filter Att. Cor.
quality. 4 BUT/5.25 .11
17. Use Attenuation Correction to apply
attenuation correction to each UNIFORM Section
reconstructed file. Slice thickness (pix) Filter Att. Cor.
18. Compare the produced images (RODS, 8 BUT/5.25 .11
SPHERES, UNIFORM) with the
Reference Images shown on the
following pages. The images shown
are typical of the performance that can
be expected.
19. Remove the Deluxe Data Spectrum
phantom and store it according to
departmental procedures.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-78

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
SPECT Reference Images

LEUHR Collimator

MEGP Collimator

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-79

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5.4 MOTION ALIGNMENTS
5.4.1 INTRODUCTION
In the Meridian system, there are four independent axes of motions. These are:
• Detector rotate (Roll)
• Detector radius
• Detector tilt
• Table longitudinal.

The table axis must be calibrated every time the Meridian system is powered up. This can be done electrically by pressing

the hand controller button (enables power to the gantry) and then pressing both and at the same time.
Alternatively, calibration can be done mechanically by pushing the table over a distance of approximately 0.5 m.

The remaining three axes are equipped with absolute position encoders and are calibrated automatically at power up. The
absolute encoders are factory calibrated and only need recalibration (resetting) if they have been dismounted from the
system. The following sections give procedures for resetting the absolute encoders.

The Meridian system is equipped with a number of safety features based on the absolute encoders. This safety
functionality must be disabled before motion axes can be moved to their respective calibration (zero) positions.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-80

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5.4.2 TILT MOTION CALIBRATION

Procedure Details

To disable safety checking:

1. Remove both covers from the gantry Motion controller
rear side. SW8
Safety board
2. Set SW8 of both motion controllers ON. SW4
3. Set SW3 (COLLISION_JUMPED) on Safety board
the safety board ON (the down SW3
position).
4. Set SW4 (ULT_RESET) on the safety
board ON (down position).

WARNING
Make certain that SW8 of both motion controllers, as well as the COLLISION JUMPED
and the ULT_RESET switches are all OFF before resuming normal use of the system.
When COLLISION JUMPED is ON, the collimator collision sensors are bypassed.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-81

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

5. Power off the system.

6. Disconnect the tilt absolute encoder Tilt absolute
cable from the ring board. encoder connector

7. Power on the gantry. The acquisition

PC does not have to be powered on at
this point.
8. Set detector rotation to 0°.
Make sure that the roll direction is such
that the roll cable ends up in a loop
with ends of almost equal length.

NOTE
Make sure that you are rotating the detector in the correct direction and that the roll
cable is in the correct position. While the ULT_RESET switch is ON, it is possible to
rotate the detector past the rotation limit of ± 270°, thus creating a risk that the roll
cable breaks.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-82

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

9. Unscrew the four screws holding the

detector cover.
Remove the detector cover.

10. Place a spirit level on top of the table

cradle, parallel to the longitudinal axis
of the table. Note the angle of the table
cradle.
11. Place a spirit level on top of the
detector.
12. Use the hand controller to adjust
detector tilt until the detector is parallel
to the table cradle.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-83

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

13. Power off the system. Tilt absolute

encoder connector
14. Reconnect the tilt absolute encoder
cable to the ring board.
15. Power on the gantry. Ring board SW2

16. Press and hold SW1 (ZERO_ENA) and

Ring board SW1
SW2 (ZERO_TILT) on the ring board
simultaneously for 1 second.

17. Power off the system.

18. Set SW8 of both motion controllers,
and SW3 and SW4 of the safety board
OFF.
19. Power on the system.
20. Check detector tilt.
21. Remount detector and rear covers.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-84

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5.4.3 RADIUS MOTION CALIBRATION

Procedure Details

To disable safety checking:

1. Remove both covers from the gantry Motion controller
rear side. SW8
Safety board
2. Set SW8 of both motion controllers ON. SW4
3. Set SW3 (COLLISION_JUMPED) on Safety board
the safety board ON (the down SW3
position).
4. Set SW4 (ULT_RESET) on the safety
board ON (down position).

WARNING
Make certain that SW8 of both motion controllers, as well as the COLLISION JUMPED
and the ULT_RESET switches are all OFF before resuming normal use of the system.
When COLLISION JUMPED is ON, the collimator collision sensors are bypassed.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-85

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

5. Rotate the detector to position 0°

Make sure that the roll direction is such
that the roll cable ends up in a loop
with ends of almost equal length..

NOTE
Make sure that you are rotating the detector in the correct direction and that the roll
cable is in the correct position. While the ULT_RESET switch is ON, it is possible to
rotate the detector past the rotation limit of ± 270°, thus creating a risk that the roll
cable breaks.

Procedure Details

6. Power off the system.

7. Disconnect the radius absolute Radius absolute
encoder from the ring board. encoder connector

8. Power on the gantry. The acquisition

PC does not have to be powered on at
this point.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-86

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

9. Use the hand controller to adjust

detector radius until aligned as shown
in the photo on the right.
Use a ruler to check.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-87

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

10. Power off the system.

Radius absolute
11. Reconnect the radius absolute encoder encoder connector
to the ring board.
SW3
12. Power on the gantry.
13. Press and hold SW1 (ZERO_ENA) and
SW3 (ZERO_RAD) on the Ring Board SW1
simultaneously for 1 second.
14. Power off the system.

15. Set SW8 of both motion controllers,

SW3 and SW4 of the safety board
OFF.
16. Power up the system.
17. Check that the Meridian application on
the acquisition PC reports a detector
radius of 240 mm.
18. Remount the gantry rear covers.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-88

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5.4.4 ROLL MOTION CALIBRATION AND ULTIMATE LIMIT RESET

NOTE
Before performing the procedure described in this section, ensure that the roll absolute
encoder assembly is mounted on the roll gear and adjusted for correct interaction
between the worm gear and plastic gear wheel.

Procedure Details

To disable safety checking:

1. Remove both covers from the gantry Motion controller
rear side. SW8
Safety board
2. Set SW8 of both motion controllers ON. SW4
3. Set SW3 (COLLISION_JUMPED) on Safety board
the safety board ON (the down SW3
position).
4. Set SW4 (ULT_RESET) on the safety
board ON (down position).

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-89

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

5. Loosen the two set screws in the

plastic gear wheel. See photo on the
right.
Set screw

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-90

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

6. Power off the system.

7. Disconnect the roll absolute encoder
from the safety board. Roll absolute encoder
connector
8. Power on the gantry. The acquisition
PC does not have to be powered on at
this point.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-91

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

9. Use the hand controller to rotate the

detector to approximately 0°.
Make sure that the roll direction is such
that the roll cable ends up in a loop
with ends of almost equal length.

NOTE
Make sure that you are rotating the detector in the correct direction and that the roll
cable is in the correct position. While the ULT_RESET switch is ON, it is possible to
rotate the detector past the rotation limit of ± 270°, thus creating a risk that the roll
cable breaks.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-92

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

10. Position a spirit level across the gantry

feet.
Note the angle of the floor.

11. Then position the spirit level on the

collimator surface.
Fine adjust detector rotation so the
detector is parallel to the floor.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-93

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

12. Turn the code wheel (fixed to the

absolute encoder shaft) until the
groove in the edge of the wheel is
aligned with the groove in the bracket
holding the absolute encoder.
13. Tighten the two set screws in the Set screw
plastic wheel.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-94

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

14. Power off the system.

Roll absolute encoder
15. Reconnect the roll absolute encoder connector
cable to the safety board.
16. Power on the gantry.
SW1
17. Press and hold SW1 (ZERO_ROLL)
and SW2 (ZERO_ENA) on the Safety SW2
Board simultaneously for 1 second.
18. Power off the system.

19. Set SW8 of both motion controllers,

SW3 and SW4 of the safety board
OFF.
20. Power on the system.
21. Check detector rotation at 0°, – 270°
and 270°.
22. Remount detector and rear covers.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-95

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5.5 MOTION LIMIT CHECKS
5.5.1 INTRODUCTION
To verify that motions have been correctly aligned, the motion limits and position readouts on the Acquisition PC must be
checked for each axis of motion.

The checks must be performed after having aligned any motion and after system installation.

5.5.2 ROLL MOTION LIMIT CHECK

Procedure Details
Position Home Position Full CW Position Full CCW
1. Use the hand controller to set the
detector tilt to 0° and the detector
radius to 256 mm.
Position the table at 0 mm.
2. Use the hand controller to rotate the
detector until the acquisition PC
displays 0° Roll.
3. Use a spirit level to verify that the
detector surface is parallel to the floor.
This is done by measuring the angle of
the floor by placing the spirit level
Rotate position 0° Rotate position +270° Rotate position –270°
across the gantry feet. Afterwards,
compare this measurement to the
angle measured with the spirit level
across the collimator surface.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-96

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

4. Use the hand controller to rotate the

detector fully clockwise (CW) and
check that the position readout on the
Acquisition PC is 275°.
5. Then rotate the detector fully
counterclockwise (CCW) using the
hand controller. Check that the
Acquisition PC reads –275°.

5.5.3 RADIUS MOTION LIMIT CHECK

Procedure Details
Position Fully Out Position Fully In
1. Use the hand controller to set the
detector tilt and detector rotation to 0°.
2. Use the hand controller to raise the
detector to its maximum radius.
3. Check that the Acquisition PC is
displaying a radius of 383 mm.
4. Use the hand controller to lower the
detector to the minimum radius. Check
that the acquisition PC is displaying
80 mm.
Radial position 383 mm Radial position 80 mm

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-97

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5.5.4 TILT MOTION LIMIT CHECK

Procedure Details

1. Use the hand controller to set the

detector rotation to 0° and the detector
radius to its maximum.
2. Set the tilt to 0° using the hand
controller.
3. Use a spirit level to check that the
detector tilt is parallel to the longitudinal
axis of the patient table.
This is done by measuring the angle of
the table’s longitudinal axis. Then
compare this measurement to the tilt
angle measured on the collimator.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-98

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details
Position Home Position Full Outwards Tilt Position Full Inwards Tilt
4. Use the hand controller to tilt the
detector fully outwards. Check that the
Acquisition PC is reading +180° or
more.
5. Use the hand controller to tilt the
detector fully inwards. Check that the
acquisition PC reads –10° or less.

Tilt position 0° Tilt position +180° Tilt position –10°

5.5.5 TABLE MOTION LIMIT CHECK

Procedure Details

1. Click the Patient Load icon on the

Acquisition PC to position Meridian for
patient load.
2. Check that the Acquisition PC displays
the table position as 0 mm.

Table Home Position, 0 mm

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-99

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

3. Use the hand controller to translate the

table to its other end position.
4. Check that the Acquisition PC displays
a table position of 2255 mm.

Table fully translated, 2255 mm/1361 mm

NOTE
For the short patient table (Cardiology version of the Meridian system), the end position
is 1361 mm.

NOTE
If the table is moved manually, readouts less than 0 or greater than 2255 (1361 for the
short table) can be obtained.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 5-100

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6 DIAGNOSTICS

CONTENTS
6.1 About This Chapter ................................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2 External LED Indicators ............................................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.3 Internal LED Indicators .............................................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.3.1 LED’s on the Safety Board ........................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3.2 LED’s on the Ring Board .............................................................................................................................. 6-9
6.3.3 LED’s on the Detector Power Supply .......................................................................................................... 6-11
6.3.4 LED’s on the Detector EDC Board.............................................................................................................. 6-12
6.3.5 LED’s on the Motion Controllers ................................................................................................................. 6-12
6.3.5.1 Roll/Table Motion Controller Port Assignments............................................................................ 6-13
6.3.5.2 Radius Motion Controller Port Assignment .................................................................................. 6-16
6.4 Test Terminals ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-19
6.4.1 Gantry ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-19
6.4.1.1 Test Terminals on the Safety Board ............................................................................................. 6-19
6.4.1.2 Test Terminals on the Ring Board ............................................................................................... 6-21
6.4.2 Detector ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-23
6.4.2.1 PMT Strips ................................................................................................................................... 6-24
6.4.2.2 POWER Strip ............................................................................................................................... 6-25
6.4.2.3 X–E Strip ...................................................................................................................................... 6-26
6.5 Diagnostics Software Utilities .................................................................................................................................. 6-29
6.5.1 Diagnostics Pages ...................................................................................................................................... 6-29
6.5.1.1 Power-Up Diagnostics ................................................................................................................. 6-29
6.5.1.2 Details on the Individual Tests ..................................................................................................... 6-33
6.5.1.3 Handset Tester ............................................................................................................................ 6-35
6.5.2 Motion Controller Diagnostics ..................................................................................................................... 6-37
6.5.2.1 Configuring HyperTerminal for Terminal Access to the Motion Controllers .................................. 6-37
6.5.2.2 Motion Controller Interface Commands ....................................................................................... 6-41

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-1

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 6.5.3 EDC Module Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................ 6-50
6.5.3.1 Configuring HyperTerminal for Terminal Access to the EDC board ............................................. 6-50
6.5.3.2 EDC Interface Commands ........................................................................................................... 6-54
6.5.4 FireViewer................................................................................................................................................... 6-58
6.5.5 Acquisition PC Error Logs ........................................................................................................................... 6-60
6.5.5.1 temp/acqTrace.txt ........................................................................................................................ 6-60
6.5.5.2 temp/acqTraceBK.txt ................................................................................................................... 6-60
6.5.5.3 WinNT/drwtsn32.log ..................................................................................................................... 6-60
6.5.6 Screen Capture........................................................................................................................................... 6-61
6.5.6.1 Screen Capture Procedure .......................................................................................................... 6-61
6.5.7 FTP File from Meridian to Odyssey ............................................................................................................ 6-63
6.5.7.1 FTP Procedure............................................................................................................................. 6-63
6.6 Identification of Acquisition Files ............................................................................................................................. 6-66
6.7 Detector Calibration Files ........................................................................................................................................ 6-73
6.7.1 Detector Calibrations .................................................................................................................................. 6-75

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-2

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.1 ABOUT THIS CHAPTER
The Meridian Diagnostics procedure follows a four-layer scheme:
1. External LED’s accessible to operator and service personnel.
2. Internal LED’s on electronic modules.
3. Internal electrical test points on modules.
4. Software diagnostics via RS-232 interface to motion controllers and EDC module and log files on the acquisition PC.

This scheme is reflected in the structure of this Chapter.

6.2 EXTERNAL LED INDICATORS

Meridian offers a number of LED’s that are visible from the outside. The following sections describe these LED’s.

The connector panel located on the rear side of the gantry features three LED’s, located on the upper part of the panel.
The LED’s indicate the status of the safety circuit. During normal operation, only the green Motor Power LED is ON.

Figure 6.1. LED’s on the upper part of the rear panel

The yellow Collision LED is lit when the safety circuit has registered an impact on the collimator collision pad. When this
happens, motions are only possible if the hand controller OVERRIDE button is pressed. When the impact is removed, the
OVERRIDE button clears the collision state.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-3

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
If the yellow Collision LED is blinking, this indicates that the detector has entered an illegal Radius/Roll position. This is
considered a serious problem and the reason causing it must be resolved. To recover from this condition:
1. Remove the lower cover from the gantry’s rear side.
2. Set the switch COLLISION JUMPED on the Safety Board ON.
3. Reduce the detector radius.
4. Set the switch COLLISION JUMPED back OFF. When a legal detector rotation/radius has been achieved, flashing
stops.
5. Remount the gantry back cover.

The green Motor Power LED must be lit before any motion can take place. If this LED is OFF, and neither of the adjacent
yellow LED’s are ON, there are 3 possible causes:
1. The STOP button on the hand controller has been pressed.
In this case, press the OVERRIDE button.
2. A Runaway signal has been issued by either motion controller. The two motion controllers are constantly supervising
each other. A missing response from one motion controller makes the other issue a Runaway signal. When this
happens, the red Runaway LED on the Safety Board is turned ON. Try to reboot the system.
3. Rotate motion has exceeded the software-controlled end-stop and reached an Ultimate Limit. If that is the case, the
red LED labeled ULT_STOP on the Safety Board is turned ON and one of the two LED’s ULT_RADIUS and
ULT_ROLL is ON. In this case, do the following:
• Remove the lower cover from the gantry’s rear side.
• Set SW4 (ULT_RESET) on the Safety Board ON.
• On the hand controller, push the OVERRIDE button and the relevant motion button to back away from the end
stop.
• Set SW4 (ULT_RESET) on the Safety Board OFF.
• Remount the gantry back cover.

The E-Stop LED is lit when either of the two EMERGENCY STOP buttons on the gantry is activated.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-4

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
A second green LED is located in the lower part of the side panel. This LED indicates 115 V AC power to the Acquisition
PC. The LED is lit during normal operation. If the LED is OFF, the possible causes are:
1. No power to Gantry.
Switch Gantry on by flicking the power switch located at the rear of the table base next to the power connector.
2. Primary or secondary fuse on AC Power Supply blown.
Replace blown fuses.
3. Resettable fuse next to LED needs to be reset.
Reset fuse.
If the problem persists, remove the Acquisition PC power cable, wait for 10 seconds, reset fuse, and connect the
Acquisition PC power cable once again.

Figure 6.2. LED at the lower part of the rear panel

6.3 INTERNAL LED INDICATORS

Several internal modules are provided with Internal LED’s in order to assist in further fault diagnosis. The LED’s placed at
the individual modules are described in the following.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-5

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.3.1 LED’S ON THE SAFETY BOARD

D29

ROLL_ULT
D34
D45
D31 D26

ULT_RADIUS

COMBILIMIT
ULT_RESET

COLLISION
JUMPED
D32

D43
E_STOP_OK

START_OK

D40 D44 D30 D27 D25 D42

RUNAWAY

ULT_STOP

ULT_OK

COLLISION

COLLIS_OK

ULT_TABLE
D1 D6
TABLE- D8
TABLE+ D9
TABLE ENA.

+24V_ES

Red

Green

Figure 6.3. Location of LED’s on the Safety Board

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-6

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
LED NO. NAME COLOR SIGNIFIES
D1 TABLE_ENA Green D1 ON indicates that the table motion controller is controlling the table motion
servo loop. Motion power (24V_ES) for this motion circuit must be present
D6 24V_ES Green ON when motion power is present. Motion power is enabled by pressing the hand
controller OVERRIDE button (function is dependent on the status of the safety
circuits)
D8 TABLE – Green ON when motion controller is moving the table towards position 0 mm. The
brightness of D8 depends on the table speed
D9 TABLE + Green ON when motion controller is moving the table in the positive direction, i.e. away
from position 0 mm. The brightness of D9 depends on the table speed
D25 COLLIS_OK Green ON when the collision circuit is unbroken or if SW3 (COLLISION JUMPED) is set
on
D26 COLLISION JUMPED Red ON when the collision safety circuit is disabled by setting SW3 (COLLISION
JUMPED) on
D27 COLLISION Red ON when the collision safety circuit is broken and SW3 (COLLISION JUMPED) is
off
D29 ROLL ULT. Red ON when the roll ultimate motion safety circuit is broken. This condition can arise
during service of the roll absolute encoder. If it occurs during normal operation, it is
a severe fault, indicating detector rotation < –275° or rotation > 275°, which must
be resolved
D30 ULT_OK Green ON when both roll ultimate and radius ultimate circuits are unbroken and SW4
(ULT_RESET) is off
D31 ULT_RESET Red ON when SW4 (ULT_RESET) is on
D32 E_STOP_OK Green ON when none of the EMERGENCY STOP buttons are activated
D34 ULT_RADIUS Red No detection of radius ultimate limit is implemented in the Meridian. If D34 goes
ON, check the jumper plug in connector F5 on the ring board
D40 RUNAWAY Red ON if the two motion controllers cannot communicate or if one of the motion
controllers detects a mismatch between the position reported by the absolute
encoder and the position reported by the incremental encoder of either the roll,
radius or tilt axis

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-7

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
LED NO. NAME COLOR SIGNIFIES
D42 ULT_TABLE Red ON when the table is pushed manually beyond the maximum position or beyond
0 mm. Motion power is cut off but can be restored by keeping the hand controller
OVERRIDE button depressed
D43 START_OK Green ON when all safety circuits are OK. In this condition, pressing the hand controller
OVERRIDE button latches a relay maintaining motion power after OVERRIDE is
released
D44 ULT_STOP Red ON when the ULT_STOP relay is latched. Can only be reset by setting SW4
(ULT_RESET) on
D45 COMBILIMIT Red Flashes when the system is in a state involving an illegal combination of detector
radius and rotate position. This is a severe fault the cause for which must be
resolved. The only way to recover from this condition is to set SW3 (COLLISION
JUMPED) on and back out using the hand controller

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-8

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.3.2 LED’S ON THE RING BOARD

TILT– D9

TILT+ D8

D1

MOT.ENA
COLLIS_BACK_OK D12

D6 D2

+24 _OK
+24ES _OK

Figure 6.4. LED’s on the Ring Board

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-9

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 LED NO. NAME COLOR SIGNIFIES
D1 MOT.ENA Green ON when motion controller activates tilt motor circuit
D2 +24_OK Green Monitors the general purpose 24 V DC supply voltage. D2
is ON whenever the system is ON.
This voltage is sent as a COLLISION signal to the detector
and also supplies the tilt and radius absolute encoders
D6 +24ES_OK Green ON when motion power is present. Supplies tilt motor
circuit
D8 TILT+ Green ON when tilt motor is rotating in the positive direction
D9 TILT– Green ON when tilt motor is rotating in the negative direction
D12 COLLIS_BACK_OK Green ON when 24 V is returned from the detector (collision
circuit unbroken, i.e. no collision present)

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-10

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.3.3 LED’S ON THE DETECTOR POWER SUPPLY
Five LED’s inside the Detector Power Supply provide information about the integrity of the output voltages.

The LED’s are visible through the perforations of the top cover.

Figure 6.5. Location of LED’s on the Detector Power Supply

LED COLOR SIGNIFIES

HVHIGH RED High Voltage higher than specified setting
HVGOOD GREEN High Voltage at specified setting
HVLOW RED High Voltage lower than specified setting or not enabled
LVGOOD GREEN All Low Voltages in specified range
LVLOW RED One or more Low Voltages lower than specified range

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-11

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.3.4 LED’S ON THE DETECTOR EDC BOARD
An LED is located in the rear panel of the EDC Board. The LED should be flashing green at 0.5 Hz indicating that the
EDC Board is running. At power up or reset, the LED will be constantly red.

A flashing red light indicates that an error was detected during power up.

A5 COLLIMATOR ID A6 EVENT SIGNAL A7 DETECTOR CALIBRATION

RESET

PRGM
DET1

DET0
EDC Power LED indicator
located here

COLLIMATOR CABLE
9CBL1140
ANALOG SIGN. 9CBL0657

DETEBL0718
DETEBL0659

9C
9C

CTOR
TUNE CONTROL

CTO
9CBL0658

R LV

HV

DETECTOR CABLE
9CBL1079
DETECTOR EDC BOARD
POWER 9UNT1114
SUPPLY
9PSU0934

DETECTOR POWER
PIN 7-8
COLLISION JUMPER
9CBL0820 CAN-BUS
TERMINATOR
9CBL0561

ED
C 9 CB
PO L0
WE 66
ECG

R C1
AB
FIREWIRE
CAN-BUS

LE
Figure 6.6. EDC Module LED

6.3.5 LED’S ON THE MOTION CONTROLLERS

Each of the motion controllers has a 20-bit parallel input port and a 12-bit parallel output port. The input ports are pulled
up, i.e. a pin with no connection is high.

The status of each bit of the input and output ports is represented on LED panels. Green LED’s are used for the input port
and yellow LED’s are used for the outputs. The LED’s are lit when the port signal is pulled LOW.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-12

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Furthermore, 10 green LED’s (5 on each axis) are provided to monitor the status of the motor amplifier interface and
brake.

6.3.5.1 Roll/Table Motion Controller Port Assignments

Input Port
Input Port Asserted Hand Controller Other Signals
(green LED) Signals
IN 00 LOW (LED ON) MOTION
ENABLE
IN 01 LOW (LED ON) MARK
IN 02 LOW (LED ON) TABLE OUT
IN 03 LOW (LED ON) TABLE IN
IN 04 LOW (LED ON) TILT OUT
IN 05 LOW (LED ON) TILT IN
IN 06 LOW (LED ON) RADIUS OUT
IN 07 LOW (LED ON) RADIUS IN
IN 08 LOW (LED ON) ROLL CCW
IN 09 LOW (LED ON) ROLL CW
IN 10 LOW (LED ON) START ACQ
IN11 LOW (LED ON) OVERRIDE
IN12 HIGH (LED OFF) COLLISION OVR. SWITCH ON
IN13 HIGH (LED OFF) TABLE SW1, SLIT
IN14 HIGH (LED OFF) TABLE SW3, HALF
IN15 HIGH (LED OFF) ULT_RESET SWITCH ON
IN16 N/A INPUT FROM AVR
IN17 N/A INPUT FROM AVR

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-13

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Input Port Asserted Hand Controller Other Signals
(green LED) Signals
IN18 N/A INPUT FROM AVR
IN19 N/A INPUT FROM AVR

Output Port
Output Port Asserted Signal
(yellow LED)
OUT 00 HIGH (LED OFF) RUNAWAY_B signal to Safety Board
OUT 01 Flashes NMI. Flashes if +55 V power supply voltage has dropped
OUT 02 LOW (LED ON) BOOT. Power-up self test has completed successfully
OUT 03 LOW (LED ON) SHORT TABLE
OUT 04 LOW (LED ON) LONG TABLE
OUT 05 LOW (LED ON) PC ALIVE. Communication to PC OK
OUT 06 PARTLY LOW TIMER INTERRUPT RUNNING
(DIM LED)
OUT 07 LOW (LED ON) COMBINED AXES MOTION CONFLICT DETECTED
OUT 08 Flashes at 0.5 Hz VISUAL INFO, MC PROGRAM RUNS OK
OUT 09 LOW (LED ON) START SIGNAL TO INITIATE READING OF ABSOLUTE
ENCODERS
OUT 10 CLOCK SIGNAL FOR READING ABSOLUTE ENCODERS
OUT 11 LOW (LED ON) RESET AVR. Used when programming the device

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-14

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Status/Feedback
Channel Control Asserted Signal
(yellow LED)
CHA_POS LOW (LED ON) POS. ANALOG CONTROL SIGN. TO ROLL AMPL
Active when motion is in progress
CHA_NEG LOW (LED ON) NEG. ANALOG CONTROL SIGN. TO ROLL AMPL
Active when motion is in progress
CHB_POS LOW (LED ON) POS. ANALOG CONTROL SIGN. TO TABLE AMPL
Active when motion is in progress
CHB_NEG LOW (LED ON) NEG. ANALOG CONTROL SIGN. TO TABLE AMPL
Active when motion is in progress

Axis Status Port

Channel Control Asserted Signal
(green LED)
CHA_FAULT HIGH (LED OFF) FAULT INFORMATION FROM ROLL AMPL.
CHA_LR N/A
CHA_LL N/A
CHA_BRK LOW (LED ON) ROLL BRAKE RELEASED
CHA_ENA LOW (LED ON) ROLL AMPLIFIER ENABLED
CHB_ENA LOW (LED ON) TABLE AMPLIFIER ENABLED
CHB_BRK N/A
CHB_LL N/A
CHB_LR N/A
CHB_FAULT HIGH (LED OFF) FAULT INFORMATION FROM TABLE AMPL.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-15

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.3.5.2 Radius Motion Controller Port Assignment
Input Port
Input Port Asserted Signal
(green LED)
IN 00 N/A
IN 01 N/A
IN 02 N/A
IN 03 N/A
IN 04 N/A
IN 05 N/A
IN 06 N/A
IN 07 N/A
IN 08 LOW (LED ON) E-STOP
IN 09 LOW (LED ON) COLLISION
IN 10 HIGH (LED OFF) RADIUS AT ULTIMATE LIMIT (not used)
IN11 HIGH (LED OFF) ROLL AT ULTIMATE LIMIT
IN12 HIGH (LED OFF) TABLE AT ULTIMATE LIMIT
IN13 HIGH (LED OFF) ULTIMATE RELAY SET
IN14 LOW (LED ON) START RELAY ON (latched or MANUAL OVERRIDE
pressed)
IN16 N/A INPUT FROM AVR
IN17 N/A INPUT FROM AVR
IN18 N/A INPUT FROM AVR
IN19 N/A INPUT FROM AVR

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-16

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Output Port
Output Port Asserted Signal
(yellow LED)
OUT 00 HIGH (LED OFF) RUNAWAY_A SIGNAL TO SAFETY BOARD. When OFF, communication to
the other Motion Controller is failing and motor power is removed
OUT 01 Flashes +55 V power supply voltage has dropped
OUT 02 LOW (LED ON) BOOT. Power-up self test has completed successfully
OUT 05 LOW (LED ON) PC ALIVE, Communication to PC OK
OUT 06 PARTLY LOW TIMER INTERRUPT RUNNING
(DIM LED)
OUT 07 LOW (LED ON) COMBINED AXES MOTION CONFLICT DETECTED
OUT 08 Flashes at 0.5 Hz VISUAL INFO, MC PROGRAM RUNS OK
OUT 09 LOW (LED ON) START reading absolute encoders
OUT 10 CLOCK for reading absolute encoders
OUT 11 LOW (LED ON) AVR RESET. Used when programming the device

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-17

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Status/Feedback
Channel Control Asserted Signal
(yellow LED)
CHA_POS LOW (LED ON) POS. ANALOG CONTL SIGN. TO RADIUS AMPL
Active when motion is in progress
CHA_NEG LOW (LED ON) NEG. ANALOG CONTL SIGN. TO RADIUS AMPL
Active when motion is in progress
CHB_POS LOW (LED ON) POS. ANALOG CONTL SIGN. TO TILT AMPL
Active when motion is in progress
CHB_NEG LOW (LED ON) NEG. ANALOG CONTL SIGN. TO TILT AMPL
Active when motion is in progress

Axis Status Port

Channel Control Asserted Signal
(green LED)
CHA_FAULT HIGH (LED OFF) FAULT INFORMATION FROM RADIUS
AMPL.
CHA_LR N/A
CHA_LL N/A
CHA_BRK LOW (LED ON) RADIUS BRAKE RELEASED
CHA_ENA LOW (LED ON) RADIUS AMPLIFIER ENABLED
CHB_ENA LOW TILT AMPLIFIER ENABLED
CHB_BRK N/A
CHB_LL N/A
CHB_LR N/A
CHB_FAULT HIGH (LED OFF) FAULTY INFORMATION FROM TILT
AMPLIFIER

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-18

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.4 TEST TERMINALS
The electronic modules within Meridian offer a number of test pins for diagnostics.

6.4.1 GANTRY
6.4.1.1 Test Terminals on the Safety Board

+5V TO AVR FROM MOTOR CONTROLLER

+5VF

TP2

RTNF

TP1

ANA_IN
TP4
AMPLIFIER CONTROL VOLTAGE FROM MOTOR CONTROLLER
TP3
ANA_GND

Figure 6.7. Test pins on the Safety Board

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-19

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Signal Reference Normal value Possible cause for error
TP2, +5 V F TP1, RTNF +5 V ± 0.25 V Roll/table motion controller defect
Cable to motion controller outputs not mounted
TP4, ANA_IN TP3, ANA_GND Varies during table N.a.
motion within ± 10 V

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-20

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.4.1.2 Test Terminals on the Ring Board

ANA_GND

ANA_IN

TP4 TP3

RTNF +5VF

TP1 TP2

Figure 6.8. Test pins on the Ring Board

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-21

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Signal Reference Normal value Possible cause for error
TP2, +5 V F TP1, RTNF +5 V ± 0.25 V Radius motion controller defect
Cable to motion controller outputs not mounted
TP4, ANA_IN TP3, ANA_GND Varies during radius N.a.
motion within ± 10 V

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-22

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.4.2 DETECTOR

LOCATION OF TEST POINTS IN DETECTOR

Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune

WP WP WP WP WP WP WP WP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DRV7-8
OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

POWER
SMPL3-4
DRV1-2

STRIP
DRV3-4 SMPL5-6 +15V
-15V +5V
SMPL1-2 +13V DRV5-6
SMPL7-8 -5V

GND
GND
Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune
WP WP WP WP WP WP WP WP
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 EOUT 16
HI
OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

STRIP
LO

X-E
GND
THR

Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune

WP WP WP WP WP WP WP WP
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune

WP WP WP WP WP WP WP WP
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

Y-STRIP
OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune

WP WP WP WP WP WP WP WP
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

STRIP
TUNE
Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune Vtune
WP WP WP WP WP WP WP WP

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

Figure 6.9. Test points in the detector

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-23

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.4.2.1 PMT Strips
All measurements are referenced to GND, which is represented by any of the mounting screws.

Vtune is a DC test point that reflects the Tune Value for the particular PMT.
Range: 0 – 5 V = digital Tune Value 0 – 1023.

WP is a DC test point that reflects that the Autotune loop on the particular PMT is operational. At normal
operation, the voltage reading should be 2 – 4 V. If the voltage reading is lower or negative, the inherent
PMT gain is too low. In that case, either the High Voltage is too low or the PMT is defective.

OUT is an oscilloscope test point showing the output from the PMT Preamplifier. The magnitude of scintillation
signals from Technetium or Cobalt should be around 2-3 Vpp. Baseline should be 0 V +/- 30 mV.

Figure 6.10. Typical PMT output

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-24

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.4.2.2 POWER Strip
All measurements are referenced to local GND pins on the power strip.

+15V, +5V, -5V, -15V and +13V are DC test points for the Low Voltages used in the Detector. The readings should be
within 5% of these values.

DRV 1-2 is an oscilloscope test point for the Autotune LED drive signal
serving PMT # 1, 2, 9, 10, 17, 18, 25, 26, 33, 34, 41, and 42.

DRV 3-4 is an oscilloscope test point for the Autotune LED drive signal
serving PMT # 3, 4, 11, 12, 19, 20, 27, 28, 35, 36, 43, and 44.

DRV 5-6 is an oscilloscope test point for the Autotune LED drive signal
serving PMT # 5, 6, 13, 14, 21, 22, 29, 30, 37, 38, 45, and 46.

DRV 7-8 is an oscilloscope test point for the Autotune LED drive signal
serving PMT # 7, 8, 15, 16, 23, 24, 31, 32, 39, 40, 47, and 48.

Figure 6.11. LED drive signal

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-25

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
SMPL 1-2 is an oscilloscope test point for the Autotune LED sample signal
serving PMT # 1, 2, 9, 10, 17, 18, 25, 26, 33, 34, 41 and 42.

SMPL 3-4 is an oscilloscope test point for the Autotune LED sample signal
serving PMT # 3, 4, 11, 12, 19, 20, 27, 28, 35, 36, 43 and 44.

SMPL 5-6 is an oscilloscope test point for the Autotune LED sample signal
serving PMT # 5, 6, 13, 14, 21, 22, 29, 30, 37, 38, 45 and 46.

SMPL 7-8 is an oscilloscope test point for the Autotune LED sample signal
serving PMT # 7, 8, 15, 16, 23, 24, 31, 32, 39, 40, 47 and 48.

Figure 6.12. LED sample signal

6.4.2.3 X–E Strip

E-OUT is an oscilloscope test point showing the Energy output signal to the EDC Board. The magnitude of
scintillation signals from Technetium or Cobalt should be around 0.4 – 0.5 Vpp, negative going. Baseline
should be 0 V +/- 50 mV.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-26

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Figure 6.13. Typical Energy output signal

HIDYN is an oscilloscope test point showing the High Level DynCor signal. The magnitude of scintillation signals
from Technetium or Cobalt should be around 0.5 – 0.8 Vpp. Baseline should be 0 V +/- 10 mV.

LODYN is an oscilloscope test point showing the Low Level DynCor signal. The magnitude of scintillation signals
from Technetium or Cobalt should be around 0.2 – 0.4 Vpp. Baseline should be 0 V +/- 10 mV.

Figure 6.14. Typical HIDYN and LODYN signals

THRESH is an oscilloscope test point showing the Threshold signal. The magnitude of scintillation signals from
Technetium or Cobalt should be around 0.15 – 0.30 Vpp. Base line should be 0 V +/- 10 mV.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-27

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Figure 6.15. Typical Threshold signal

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-28

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.5 DIAGNOSTICS SOFTWARE UTILITIES
Software diagnostics is provided by the following means:
• Diagnostic pages on the Acquisition PC
• RS-232 access to motion controllers and EDC module
• FireViewer to check FireWire communication
• Error logs on Acquisition PC.

The access and use of the software diagnostic utilities are described in the following sections.

6.5.1 DIAGNOSTICS PAGES

6.5.1.1 Power-Up Diagnostics

When the Meridian application on the Acquisition PC is started, the PC will run power-up diagnostics of the gantry and
detector. If a fault is detected during power-up diagnostics, the diagnostic page will be displayed. See Figure 6.16 on the
next page.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-29

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Figure 6.16. Power Up Diagnostics page

This page is only presented to the operator if a fault condition is detected. The corresponding field indicates a failed
response and the appropriate error information will be displayed in the error message window. Refer to section 6.5.1.2
Details on the Individual Tests on page 6-33 for details on the type of error messages that may be displayed and the
corrective action required to resolve the failed condition.

Service engineers access the Diagnostics page for trouble-shooting information. Each of the diagnostic items in the
power-up diagnostics can be executed as a single selection or by a group of selections via the menu shown in Figure 6.17
on page 6-32. By checking one or more of the items in a dialog box, the specific diagnostic can be executed. A hand

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-30

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
controller diagnostic routine is also available. By starting the Handset tester dialog box it is possible to press each of the
buttons on the physical hand controller. This will result in a button press in the dialog box if the hand controller is working
properly.

To access the Service Diagnostics page:

Procedure Details

1. On the Acquisition PC’s Persistence

page, click on the Tools button to bring
up the Calibration & Configuration Tools
button
menu.
2. Select Service, and enter the service
password when prompted.
3. Select Diagnostics to bring up the
Service Diagnostics page shown in
Figure 6.17.

Calibration & Configuration Menu Service Calibrations Menu

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-31

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Figure 6.17. Service Diagnostics Page

The Service Diagnostics dialog makes it possible for a service technician to issue one or more diagnostic commands
simply by checking one or more items in the dialog box and clicking the Run Diagnostics button. The Diagnostics page
shown in Figure 6.16 will appear displaying the diagnostic result. Refer to the definitions of the individual diagnostics in
section 6.5.1.2 Details on the Individual Tests on page 6-33 for additional details on the diagnostics.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-32

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.5.1.2 Details on the Individual Tests
Group Test Description
EDC Board FireWire IEEE-1394 Verifies integrity of FireWire board in PC, FireWire
cable, FireWire interface on EDC and FireWire S/W
application
FireWire I/F Testing internal FireWire communication on EDC
board
DSP host I/F Testing internal communication On EDC board
Energy signal path Applies a test signal to the analog input for Energy
and qualifies result
X+ Signal path Applies a test signal to the analog input for X+ and
qualifies result
Applies a test signal to the analog input for X- and
X- Signal path
qualifies result
Applies a test signal to the analog input for Y+ and
Y+ Signal path
qualifies result
Applies a test signal to the analog input for Y- and
Y- Signal path
qualifies result
Detector Verifies communication with Work Point ADC on
Communication Tune Strip
High voltage Verifies communication with HV DAC in detector
communication PSU
Detector ID Verifies communication with Detector ID and/or
communication Collimator ID EEProms

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-33

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Group Test Description
PSU High Voltage Tests HV OK signal from detector PSU
Work Points Verifies proper operation of photomultipliers

Group Test Description

Motion control Volt. Positive Verifies integrity of the analog drive outputs in
positive direction
Volt. Negative Verifies integrity of the analog drive outputs in
negative direction
Handset Tests for short circuit in hand controller and its
cable
Abs. Encoders Communication test
Ultimate Switches Verifies that no Ultimate motion limits have been
State encountered.
Runaway/Stop Verifies STOP status on the Safety Board
Status (has to be in STOP state at power up)
+5VF Verifies presence of supply voltage for I/O opto
couplers
OUT_DIAG Verifies proper operation of output ports.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-34

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.5.1.3 Handset Tester

Running hand controller diagnostics is also possible. The Handset tester dialog box allows you to check that all buttons of
the hand controller are functioning properly. The dialog box indicates each time a button on the physical hand controller is
pressed.

To access the Handset Tester:

Procedure Details

1. On the Persistence page of the

Acquisition PC, click the Tools button
to bring up the Calibration & Tools
button
Configuration menu.
2. Select Service, and enter the service
password when prompted.
3. Select Handset test to bring up the
Handset tester (see Figure 6.18).
(The buttons on the Handset tester
light up when a hand controller button
is pressed.)

Calibration & Configuration Menu Service Calibrations Menu

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-35

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Figure 6.18. Handset tester

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-36

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.5.2 MOTION CONTROLLER DIAGNOSTICS
The Meridian motion controllers are equipped with a serial interface that can be used for troubleshooting purposes. This is
accomplished by using various utilities resident within the firmware of the motion controller. This section describes only a
few commands that may be helpful in troubleshooting Meridian system related failures.

When contacting Service Technical Support for assistance, you may also be asked to access the motion controller utilities
using the Meridian Acquisition PC or laptop and the motion controller cable P/N 9CBL0818.

6.5.2.1 Configuring HyperTerminal for Terminal Access to the Motion Controllers

Procedure Details

1. Connect one end of the serial interface

cable to the motion controller’s serial
port labeled BZ2 RS232. This does not
require the removal of any other cables
already connected to the motion
controller.
2. Connect the opposite end of the cable
to the COM1 serial interface on the
Acquisition PC. In this case, there is no
requirement for the use of a null
modem cable adapter as there is for
the EDC board.
3. Reboot the Acquisition PC and start up
Windows.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-37

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

4. In the Windows Start menu, select

Programs, Accessories,
Communications and HyperTerminal.

5. When HyperTerminal starts, it displays

the Connection Description dialog.
In the Name field, enter MC. Select OK.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-38

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

6. HyperTerminal displays the Connect

To dialog.
Ensure that COM1 is selected. Select
OK to continue.

7. The COM1 Properties dialog appears.

Set the following parameters for the
serial interface:
Baud rate: 19200
Data bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: None
Select OK to continue.
The HyperTerminal main window
appears.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-39

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

8. In the top menu bar, select File,

Properties. The MC Properties dialog
appears.
Select the Settings tab. This will allow
you to configure the terminal emulation.
In the Emulation drop-down, select
VT100.

HyperTerminal is now configured to communicate with the motion controller.

In the HyperTerminal main window, you should see the prompt ->. Press ENTER. This should cause the MC prompt to
appear.

Please refer to section 6.5.2.2 Motion Controller Interface Commands on page 6-41 for further details on the
communication.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-40

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.5.2.2 Motion Controller Interface Commands
The interface commands listed below are only accessible via the motion controller serial interface labeled BZ2 RS-232.
These commands are a useful tool for diagnosing system failures and intermittencies.

Boot prompt
Assuming that HyperTerminal is connected to the motion controller and configured as described above, the following
message appears in the HyperTerminal window when the motion controller boots:

@
@Meridian Motion Controller
@Hardware version 9MOT0652 1
@Software version 7MMS0163-nnn
@Compile time mmm dd yyyy - hh:mm:ss
@
NodeID = 33 - This node should be controlling Roll/Table

->

nnn represents the actual software version, e.g. A07. The hardware version supplied is a comment; it is not read from the
actual hardware.

The message shown is for the Roll/Table controller. The Radius/Tilt controller displays the following NodeID information:

NodeID = 34 - This node should be controlling Radius/Tilt

When pressing ENTER, you should now receive a new prompt (->). However, if the motion controller DIP switch is set
incorrectly, you receive the following message:

NodeID = <switch setting> - This node should be controlling **NOTHING**

***THIS SWITCH SETTING IS INVALID

1
The motor controller part number is 9MOT1145.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-41

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
If SW8 is set, a warning message is displayed:

************************************
*** Safety overrule mode enabled ***
************************************

Command List
If you enter a ? in the HyperTerminal main window, the motion controller responds with the list of available commands.
Optional parameters are displayed in [].

->
?
RDB Read byte {Address}
WRB Write byte {Address,Value}
RDW Read word {Address}
WRW Write word {Address,Value}
RDL Read long {Address}
WRL Write long {Address,Value}
PRGAVR Program AVR {1|2}
VERAVR Verify AVR {1|2}
TIME Print time since reset
POS Print positions
RSDO, RDSDO Read from object dictionary {Index,[SubIndex]}
TSDO, WRSDO Write to object dictionary {Index,SubIndex,Value}
CSDO Client SDO {R|W,Index,Subindex,Value}
CPSDO Copy SDO from server {Index,Subindex}
GETNODEID Print node ID
MOVE, MOV Move to absolute position {1|2,Position}
REL Move relative to actual position {1|2,Position}
SPEED, VEL Set/Get Velocity {1|2,[Velocity]}
STOP Stop motion(s) {[1|2]}
ERRLOG Set error logging flags {[Flags|Blank=HELP]}
ACC Set/Get accelerations {1|2,[Acc,[Stop,[Quickstop]]]}
S, SETPIN Set output pin high {0..11,0..11,...}
C, CLRPIN Set output pin low {0..11,0..11,...}
IN Print input pins
PID Set/Get PID gain parameters {[1|2,[P,[I,[D,[IL]]]]]}
P Set/Get PID proportional gain {[P]}

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-42

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 I Set/Get PID integration gain {[I]}
D Set/Get PID differential gain {[D]}
L Set/Get PID integration limit {[IL]}
EXERCISE Continuous motion exercise {1|2,MinPos,MaxPos}
CAL Calibrate motion {1|2,-1=Roll|-2=Table|-4=Radius}
VERSION Print version information
GETDEBUG Print debug buffer {[n]}
BAUD Change baud rate {9600|19200|38400|57600}
HELP, ? Print list of commands
->

The most important of these commands are described below.

NOTE
Be cautious! By using some of these commands, especially the ones that are not
described in detail in this manual, you can seriously jeopardize the operation of the
motion controller – with the possibility of causing damage to persons and/or the gantry.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-43

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Logging
The logging facility provides you with more or less detailed information. By default, all logging is set off.

The command errlog without any parameters makes the motion controller return a list of the possibilities:

-> errlog
Logging Help:
0x0001=CAN
0x0002=CANOPEN
0x0004=CANREPORT
0x0008=CANPDOS
0x0010=MOTION LOG AX1
0x0020=MOTION LOG AX2
0x0080=MOTION
0x0100=HANDSET
0x0200=HOMING
0x0400=COLLISION
0x0800=TILT
0x1000=TRAJECTORY AX1
0x2000=TRAJECTORY AX2
0x8000=TIMERS
Logging Level = All logging disabled!

The logging setting is the result of an OR operation performed on these individual hexadecimal values. For example,
specifying errlog 0x0380 enables logging of HOMING, HANDSET and MOTION.

If you enable CAN, CANOPEN, and CANREPORT logging, you get a logging of all activity on the CANbus that can be
seen by this motion controller, with the exception of the CANbus messages generated by the motion controller itself. Even
when no motion is in progress, you can see the two motion controllers exchanging information at regular intervals. If the
Acquisition PC is active, and the system has completed motion calibrations, you can also see the PC alive messages
arriving every second – these messages have the ID = 128.

To see the messages generated by this motion controller to the PC (PDO’s), you enable CANPDOS.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-44

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 NOTE
PDO’s are only sent when the motion controller state is OPERATIONAL, i.e. that the
acquisition PC has established contact. You can check the state by pressing CTRL-Q.

Further useful settings:

MOTION When this mode is enabled, relevant information regarding the motions controlled by this motion
controller are provided, such as motion start and stop, faults encountered etc. This setting is useful for
both controllers.

HANDSET Displays the handset key actions. This setting is only useful for the Roll/Table Controller.

HOMING Displays the progress of the motion calibration process, e.g. whenever the calibration changes state.

Commands
The list below describes some of the commands. The remaining ones are only included for software debugging purposes.
Some of the commands are only meaningful for one of the controllers while others have a common use for both.

Command Description
RDB, WRB, RDW, Direct read/write of the processor memory/registers – do not use!
WRW, RDL, WRL
PRGAVR Program AVR. Used to program the AVR micro controllers. If you
should ever need to use this command, you will receive detailed
descriptions.
VERAVR Verification of the AVR micro controller flash memory.
TIME Print time since reset. The system has a 1-second time tag you can
read using this command. The time restarts when the controller is
booted.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-45

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Command Description
POS Print positions. This command causes the following response:
-> pos
Encoders : X = 0 Y = 0
Demand : X = 0 Y = 0
Actual : X = 0 Y = 0
Error : X = 0 Y = 0
The X-axis is the roll axis for the Roll/Table controller and the
radius axis for the Radius/Tilt controller. The y-axis is the table axis
for the roll/table controller and the tilt axis for the radius/tilt
controller.
Encoders is the last value for the incremental encoder – this
is normally of no interest.
Demand is the last position requested by the trajectory
generator (not necessarily the target position
received in a command).
Actual is the actual position.
Error is the difference between Demand and Actual. A
small discrepancy is fully acceptable.
The positions are given in “ticks” (internal units). The significance is
as follows:
Roll: 1° = 12000 incremental encoder counts,
range: –3300000 to 3300000 (approx. –275° to
+275°).
Table: 1 mm = 1500 incremental encoder counts,
range long table: 0 to 3382500 corresponding to
0 mm to 2255 mm
range short table: 0 to 2041500 corresponding to
0 mm to 1361 mm.
Radius: 1 mm = 2429 encoder counts,
range: 194320 to 930307 corresponding to 80 mm
to 383 mm.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-46

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Command Description
Tilt: 1° = 32914 incremental encoder counts,
range: –329140 to 5924520 corresponding to –10°
to 180°.
RDSDO Read from Object Dictionary. The Object Dictionary holds all
settings and status. Each entry has an index and a sub-index.

Use:
RDSDO 0x6040 to read the control word for the X-axis
RDSDO 0x6041 to read the status word for the X-axis
RDSDO 0x6840 to read the control word for the Y-axis
RDSDO 0x6841 to read the status word for the Y-axis.
NOTE: Do not use with other parameters unless explicitly
instructed to do so.
TSDO, WRSDO Write Object Dictionary.
NOTE: Do not use unless you receive further instructions.
CSDO Client SDO.
With this command, you can read/write from one motion controller
to the other. This is a fast way to verify whether the communication
between the two controllers is OK. It also allows you to access
information from the Radius/Tilt controller if it is not physically
accessible due to the roll position of the gantry.
For example, you can read the radius axis status from the
Roll/Table controller by the command: CSDO R 0x6041.
If an “errval” is printed, the communication between the two
controllers is not working correctly.
CPSDO Copy SDO from server.
NOTE: Do not use unless you receive further instructions.
GETNODEID Print node ID
Prints the DIP switch address setting.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-47

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Command Description
MOV Move. Move to absolute position.
For Roll/Table controller:
MOV 1 {pos} move roll to a given absolute position
MOV 2 {pos} move table to a given absolute position.

For Radius/Tilt controller:

MOV 1 {pos} move tilt to a given absolute position.
See the description of the POS command for an explanation on
how to enter position values.
REL Move relative to actual position.
For Roll/Table controller:
MOV 1 {pos} move roll relative to the present position.
MOV 2 {pos} move table relative to the present position
For Radius/Tilt controller:
MOV 1 {pos} move tilt relative to the present position
See the description of the POS command for an explanation on
how to enter position values.
SPEED, VEL Set/Get velocity.
NOTE: Do not use unless you receive further instructions.
STOP Stop motion(s).
Acts like a stop command from the Acquisition PC, i.e. ramps
smoothly down.
ERRLOG Described in the section
Logging on page 6-44.
ACC Set/Get accelerations.
NOTE: Do not use unless you receive further instructions.
S, SETPIN Set output port pin high – SETPIN 3 sets OUT03 high.
NOTE: Do not use unless you receive further instructions.
C, CLRPIN Set output port pin low – CLRPIN 3 sets OUT03 low.
NOTE: Do not use unless you receive further instructions.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-48

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Command Description
IN Print input pins.
Reads the input port.
PID, P, I, D, L NOTE: Do not use unless you receive further instructions.
EXERCISE Continuous motion exercise.
NOTE: Do not use unless you receive further instructions.
CAL Calibrate motion.
NOTE: Do not use unless you receive further instructions.
VERSION Print version information.
Prints the same information as after boot.
GETDEBUG Print debug buffer.
Some of the important parameters are stored in an internal debug
buffer. This command dumps the buffer to the terminal. Normally it
is best to enable a log file before issuing this command, as quite a
lot of information is printed.
BAUD Change baud rate.
You can change the baud rate of the interface.
NOTE: Remember to change the terminal baud rate immediately
afterwards.
Help, ? Print command list.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-49

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.5.3 EDC MODULE DIAGNOSTICS
The EDC board is equipped with a serial port that can be used for troubleshooting purposes using various utilities resident
within the EDC firmware. This section identifies only a few commands that may be helpful in troubleshooting Meridian
system related failures.

6.5.3.1 Configuring HyperTerminal for Terminal Access to the EDC board

Procedure Details
COLLIMATOR CABLE

1. Connect one end of the serial interface ANALOG SIGN. 9CBL0657

9CBL1140

cable to the EDC ECG connector

DETEBL0718
DETEBL0659

9C
9C

CTOR
TUNE CONTROL

CTOR
9CBL0658

labeled A1 RS232. This requires that

HV
LV

DETECTOR CABLE
9CBL1079
the ECG cable be removed.
DETECTOR EDC BOARD
POWER

2. Connect the opposite end of the cable

9UNT1114
SUPPLY
9PSU0934

DETECTOR POWER
to the COM1 serial interface on the PIN 7-8

Acquisition PC. COLLISION JUMPER

9CBL0820 CAN-BUS
TERMINATOR
9CBL0561

ED 9
A1 RS 232 interface

C P CB
NOTE: The cable must be a Null

OW L06
ER 61
ECG

CA
FIREWIRE

BL
CAN-BUS

E
Modem cable or a standard serial cable
with a Null Modem Adapter.
3. Reboot the Acquisition PC and start up
Windows.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-50

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

4. In the Windows Start menu, select

Programs, Accessories,
Communications and HyperTerminal.

5. When HyperTerminal starts, it displays

the Connection Description dialog.
In the Name field, enter EDC. Select
OK.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-51

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

6. HyperTerminal displays the Connect

To dialog.
Ensure that COM1 is selected. Select
OK to continue.

7. The COM1 Properties dialog appears.

Set the following parameters for the
serial interface:
Baud rate: 57600
Data bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: Hardware.
Select OK to continue.
The HyperTerminal main window
appears.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-52

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

8. In the top menu bar, select File,

Properties. The EDC Properties dialog
appears.
Select the Settings tab. This allows you
to configure the terminal emulation.
In the Emulation drop-down, select
VT100.

HyperTerminal is now configured to communicate with the EDC board.

In the HyperTerminal main window, you should see the prompt ->. Press ENTER. This should cause the EDC prompt to
appear.

Please refer to section 6.5.3.2 EDC Interface Commands on page 6-54 for further details on the communication.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-53

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.5.3.2 EDC Interface Commands
The interface commands listed below are only accessible via the EDC board’s serial interface labeled A1 RS232. These
commands are a useful tool for diagnosing system failures and intermittencies

NOTE
The EDC interface only accepts numerical parameter(s) to commands. Parameters can
be entered either as decimal or hexadecimal values. Parameters shown in brackets {..}
are optional.

Command List
Command Description
? This is a help command that displays and provides a brief explanation of available
commands and utilities. It is useful when attempting to recall a specific command
and associated command flags.
Example:
?
STATUS Print status information
RDB Read byte from memory {Address}
…
VERSION Print version information
HELP, ? Print list of commands

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-54

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Command Description
Version This command will print the software version. The hardware part number printed with
the same command is just a comment and does not reflect the actual hardware
revision.
Example:
-> VERSION
EDC Board
Hardware version 9EDC0654-n 1
Software version 7CTL0079-nnn
Compile time mmm dd yyyy - hh:mm:ss
-hv {value} Set high voltage to specified value. If no value is specified, the actual high-voltage
setting is printed. This is useful when troubleshooting techniques require the detector
high voltage to be changed.
An alternative method is to edit the hvcal.dat file on the Acquisition PC and load
tables.
Example:
-> hv
High Voltage = 1200 V
Or:
-> hv 1200
High Voltage = 1200 V
-pmt {number} {value} Set PMT gain value. If number is 0, all PMT’s will be set to the same value. If no
value is specified, the current gain setting will be printed. This is useful when
attempting to manually change a specific PMT gain value or print the currently
loaded values.

1
9EDC0654 is the part number of the assembled PCB inside the EDC module

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-55

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Command Description
Example:
-> PMT
PMT gain:
1:947 424 533 402 560 525 413 417
9:648 374 334 281 180 346 187 266
17:380 211 383 525 377 298 158 162
25:233 350 273 233 206 537 256 385
33:340 167 103 352 215 482 118 119
41:292 332 232 416 309 584 262 318
-wp Print PMT work points. This is useful to determine if PMT gains are under control. All
24 WP numbers must be in the range 20 to 150.
Example:
-> WP
PMT Workpoints
1: 70 82 83 76 71 65 66 74
9: 72 66 76 90 72 83 85 74
17: 63 86 77 109 66 81 71 62
25: 71 57 77 97 72 76 90 63
33: 65 96 81 90 75 76 65 80
41: 77 68 79 74 78 68 76 73
-dyncor {selector} {value} Set the selected DYNCOR value. If no value is specified, the current values will be
printed. Do the printing to see which selector to use. This is useful to determine if the
DYNCOR calibration file is properly loaded.
Example:
-> DYNCOR
Dyncor: 0:HiDyn = 300, 1:LoDyn = 160, 2:Thresh = 400
-event {value} Enable/disable event transmission to the PC. The following values apply:
0: Disable event transmission.
1: Send uncorrected events.
2: Send energy corrected events.
3: Send linearity corrected events.
4: Send energy and linearity corrected events.
On power-up and reset, the correction tables are initialized with zeros, which is

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-56

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Command Description
equivalent to 'uncorrected'.
This utility is useful for troubleshooting detector performance problems. The utility
allows for specific corrections to be loaded when acquiring an acquisition to
determine if a failure resides in the correction table or detector.
Example:
Event 1
NOTE: Remember to execute this command after the tables have been loaded when
accessing an acquisition screen.
Time Makes the EDC board print the length of time that has elapsed since the EDC board
(system) was last reset.
Example:
-> TIME
System time is 404658 seconds since reset
ERRLOG The logging facility can be used to obtain more or less detailed information. By
default, all logging is disabled.
errlog 0x1000 CanBus communication
errlog 0x2000 CanBus errors
errlog 0x400 FireWire input.
The logging setting is the result of an OR operation performed on these individual
hexadecimal values. For example, specifying errlog 0x7000 enables logging of
CanBus communication, CanBus HW errors and FireWire input.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-57

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.5.4 FIREVIEWER
This program is part of the FireWire driver installation on the Acquisition PC. The program enables a quick check of the
integrity of the FireWire communication.

To start the FireWire program:

Procedure Details

1. In the Windows Start menu, select

Programs, ubCore and FireViewer.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-58

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

2. After having been started, the

FireViewer program immediately shows
the status of the communication.
In the Meridian system, the Firewire
comprises three nodes. The controlling
node, the Acquisition PC, is shown as
a white box and the detector EDC Correct FireWire communication
module as regular nodes indicated by
green.

3. If the green node is missing, it indicates

a problem.

Problem in FireWire communication between Acquisition PC and EDC Module

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-59

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.5.5 ACQUISITION PC ERROR LOGS
The log file information that is recorded on the Meridian Acquisition PC is a useful tool in diagnosing system failures and
intermittencies. Technical Support may request that copies of these files be provided in an effort to better diagnose a
system problem.

The following information is being provided as a reference only. Detailed information regarding the contents of these files
is not identified but is useful to Engineering when troubleshooting certain error conditions.

6.5.5.1 /temp/acqTrace.txt
This file contains a record of higher level tasks performed by the Meridian application software. This includes information
on the previous or current session of the Meridian software (depending upon whether the application is running or has
been closed down). This information can be useful for determining what tasks were being performed by the application
when a certain error condition occurred or caused the Meridian software to crash (automatically close). Every time the
Meridian software is restarted, the file is copied into a backup file (titled /temp/acqTraceBK.txt).

6.5.5.2 /temp/acqTraceBK.txt
This file contains a backup record of higher level tasks performed by the previous session of the Meridian application
software. This file only contains information on the previous session of the Meridian software. In other words, the Meridian
application has been closed down and restarted.

6.5.5.3 /WinNT/drwtsn32.log
Dr. Watson for Windows NT is a program error debugger that detects and diagnoses program errors, and then logs the
resulting diagnostic information. In the event of a program error, Dr. Watson for Windows NT starts automatically.
Technical support personnel can occasionally use the information logged by Dr. Watson to diagnose problems.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-60

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.5.6 SCREEN CAPTURE
The section briefly describes how to perform a screen capture on the Acquisition PC. This procedure is useful for
recording error messages presented to the operator and for describing a particular symptom that is seen only on the
Acquisition PC.

Service Technical Support may ask you to perform a screen capture as a part of troubleshooting various types of
problems. When a screen capture has been performed, the file is saved as a bitmap image file (<filename>.bmp). This file
can be saved to a floppy disk or transferred to the Odyssey workstation and sent to Technical Support by modem.

The procedure below describes how to perform a screen capture and save the file on the Meridian Acquisition PC’s hard
disk. To transfer the file to the Odyssey, refer to section 6.5.7 FTP File from Meridian to Odyssey on page 6-63.

6.5.6.1 Screen Capture Procedure

1. Ensure that the window or message box to be documented is visible on the Acquisition PC monitor.
Simultaneously press the CTRL and PRINT SCREEN keys on the keyboard. The entire Acquisition PC screen will be
copied into the Windows clipboard memory.
2. Start the Windows Paint Program:
In the lower left-hand corner of the monitor select Start, Programs, Accessories and Paint.

The Paint program has the icon .

The Acquisition PC’s keyboard may have a special WINDOWS button (labeled á) allowing you to access the Start
menu.
3. In the Paint program’s menu bar, select Edit, Paste to copy the contents of the clipboard into the Paint program.
If Paint displays a dialog box asking you whether you wish to enlarge the bitmap (the screen capture you are pasting
into Paint being quite large), click Yes to confirm.
4. When the screen capture has been pasted into the Paint program, you save the image into a file:
From the top menu bar, select File, Save As. The Save As dialog is displayed.
You may want to save the file in the root directory of the C: disk – or on the Acquisition PC’s desktop. This makes it
easier to find the file again when you need to transfer it to a floppy disk or the Odyssey workstation.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-61

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 In the File name field, enter an appropriate name for the file. Click Save.
5. When the file is saved, it can be copied onto a floppy disk using the Windows Explorer program. Alternatively, it can be
sent to the Odyssey workstation by FTP (see FTP File from Meridian to Odyssey on page 6-63). If Technical Support
personnel have access to the Odyssey workstation via modem, they can transfer the screen capture file(s) to their own
site for further investigation.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-62

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.5.7 FTP FILE FROM MERIDIAN TO ODYSSEY
This section briefly outlines how to transfer files from the Meridian Acquisition PC to the Odyssey using FTP (File Transfer
Protocol). Transferring files to the Odyssey may be requested by Service Technical Support as a part of troubleshooting
various types of problems. In the procedure below, three files are transferred to the Odyssey. Definitions of those files are
identified at the end of this procedure.

6.5.7.1 FTP Procedure

1. Open a DOS window.
To open a DOS window, select Start (in the lower, left-hand corner of the acquisition PC’s monitor), Programs and
Command Prompt. The Acquisition PC’s keyboard may have a special WINDOWS button (labeled á) allowing you
to access the Start menu.
Note: If the Acquisition PC is using the Windows 2000 operating system, you must select Start, Programs,
Accessories and Command Prompt.
2. In the DOS window, enter the command ftp <IP address of the Odyssey>. For example:
C:\users\WINNT\> ftp 144.54.128.93
You should expect a response similar to:
Connected to 144.54.128.93
220 service FTP server (Digital UNIX Version 5.60) ready
3. When prompted to enter a user name, enter pcsnet. For example:
User (144.54.128.93:(none)): pcsnet
4. When prompted to enter a password, enter pcsnet90. For example:
331 Password required for pcnet.
Password: <ENTER pcsnet90 on this line>
Note that the characters you enter are not echoed. Take care not to make typing errors.
You should expect a response similar to:
230 User pcsnet logged in.
ftp>

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-63

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
5. Now enter the command binary to set up the communication protocol to perform a binary transfer: For example:
ftp> binary
200 Type set to I.
6. Use the command mput <path\filename> to transfer the log file. For example:
ftp> mput c:\winnt\drwtsn32.log
In this example, the file drwtsn32.log is transferred to the Odyssey. The file is placed in the directory /prism/pcsnet on
the Odyssey.
7. The ftp program asks you to confirm that you wish to transfer the file. Enter y to confirm. For example
mput c:\winnt\drwtsn32.log? yes
You should expect a response similar to:
200 PORT command successful.
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for drwtsn32.log
(144.54.129.131.1604).
226 transfer complete.
ftp: 547bytes sent in 0.00seconds 547000.00Kbytes/sec.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for any additional files that should be transferred. For example:
ftp> mput c:\winnt\acqTrace.txt
mput c:\winnt\acqTrace.txt? yes
200 PORT command successful.
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for acqTrace.txt
(144.54.129.131.1604).
226 Transfer complete.
ftp: 553 bytes sent in 0.00seconds 589000.00Kbytes/sec.
And:
ftp> mput c:\winnt\acqTraceBK.txt
mput c:\winnt\acqTraceBK.txt? yes
200 PORT command successful.
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for acqTraceBK.txt
(144.54.129.131.1604).
226 Transfer complete.
ftp: 512bytes sent in 0.00seconds 543000.00Kbytes/sec.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-64

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 In these examples, the files acqTrace.txt and acqTraceBK.txt files are transferred to the Odyssey.
9. Enter the command quit to exit the ftp program.
ftp> quit
You should expect a response similar to:
221 Goodbye.
C:\users\WINNT\>

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-65

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.6 IDENTIFICATION OF ACQUISITION FILES
Past experience has shown a need to identify specific acquisition files within the MirDB database in order to be able to
transfer a corrupted file to the Odyssey for investigation.

This section contains information on how to identify, locate and send a Meridian Raw Image file to the Odyssey. This may
be requested by Technical Support as a part of troubleshooting various types of problems on the Meridian.

To determine which file to transfer from the Meridian system can be a somewhat difficult task. Meridian image files should
reside in the Acquisition PC’s C:\Meridian\MirDB directory.

Image files have names similar to e.g. 0000012.img. However, the first thing to do is to locate the file under the Meridian
application and determine the date on which it was acquired.

Procedure Details

1. On the Acquisition PC’s Persistence

page, click the Database icon to go to
the Patient Database page.
The Patients in Meridian lists the
patients in the database.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-66

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

2. Locate the patient of interest and click

on the patient’s name to have this
patient’s files displayed in the list at the
bottom of the window.

3. Click on the acquisition of interest.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-67

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

4. The acquisition details appear on the

far right side of the window.
5. Make a note of the study date.

Study date

6. Open the Windows Explorer:

Right-click Start, and select Explore.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-68

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

7. Locate the directory:

C:\Meridian\MirDB.
8. In the folder list on the left, click on
MirDB to see the contents of the
Modified
directory.
9. Click on Modified to have all the study
files listed in order of date and time.
10. Locate image files that were modified
on a date corresponding to the date
recorded in step 5.
NOTE: There may be several image
files with the same date.

11. Use the Windows Notepad application

to open each of the files located in
step 10.
To start Notepad, select Start (in the
lower, left-hand corner of the screen),
Programs, Accessories, Notepad.
Windows Notepad is a utility allowing
you to view (and modify) the contents
of text files.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-69

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

12. At the start of the image file, you will

see random characters. This section is
the actual image data viewed in ASCII
format.
Close to the end of the file, you can
find the acquisition parameter
information. Try to correlate the
acquisition name, acquisition time and
other parameters as shown under the
Meridian application with the
parameters seen in the file.
NOTE: The study date in the file should
also correspond to the study date
shown in the Meridian application.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-70

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

13. Once the file(s) have been narrowed

down to a few or a single file, use
Windows Explorer to rename the file,
carefully noting the original name.
To rename the file, right-click on its
name in the Explorer file list. Select
Rename from the pull-down menu.
The new file name can be anything,
e.g. myfile. Do not give the renamed
file the extension .img.
14. Next, try to view the file in the Meridian
application:
To attempt to view the image, reselect
the same specific study in the Meridian
application. See step 1 – 3.
Now, if you have found and renamed
the correct image file, Meridian will not
be able to find the data for the selected
study and displays the error message:
“Dataset selected is inconsistent”. Also,
the image cannot be displayed.
15. Go to Windows Explorer and rename
the file back to its original name. You
now know that this is the raw Meridian
image file you were looking for.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-71

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
When the specific raw Meridian image file has been located, it can be copied onto a floppy disk (depending upon the file
size). The file may be sent to Technical Support via e-mail or transferred to the Odyssey workstation via FTP. To FTP the
raw Meridian image file to the Odyssey, refer to section 6.5.7 FTP File from Meridian to Odyssey on page 6-63.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-72

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.7 DETECTOR CALIBRATION FILES
Detector calibration files are stored on the Acquisition PC in the directory C:/Meridian/Calibrations. 5 of these files are
stored in ASCII format, meaning that the files can be reviewed using the Windows Notepad program. These 5 files are:
• DYNcor.dat
• Ecal.dat
• Geocal.dat
• HVcal.dat
• PMTcal.dat.

Figure 6.19 on page 6-74 shows typical contents of these files, along with a brief explanation.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-73

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Basic size X direction
Threshold Energy related size X direction
Basic size Y direction
High Dyncor Energy related size Y direction
Basic offset X direction
Low Dyncor Basic offset Y direction
Energy related offset X direction
Energy related offset Y direction

Coefficient 0
Coefficient 1
Coefficient 2

Number of PMTs (must be 48)

Index 0 (must be zero)
Tune value for PMT #1
Tune value for PMT #2
Tune value for PMT #3
-etc.
-etc.
-etc. all the way to PMT#48
-
-
-

Figure 6.19. Detector calibration files

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-74

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6.7.1 DETECTOR CALIBRATIONS
As an aid to troubleshooting detector calibration problems, this section describes how individual calibrations can be turned
on and off to allow inspection of uncorrected detector images.

Detector calibrations can be turned on and off by communicating with the detector EDC Board via its RS 232 interface. To
access the RS 232 interface of the EDC Module, follow the procedure described in the section EDC Module Diagnostics
on page 6-50.

Use the command:

Command Description
-event {value} Enable/disable event transmission to the PC. The following values apply:
0: Disable event transmission.
1: Send uncorrected events.
2: Send energy corrected events.
3: Send linearity corrected events.
4: Send energy and linearity corrected events.

NOTE
If an acquisition is started, the event flag is automatically set to 4, applying all
corrections.

The images shown below have been acquired intrinsically (without a collimator) using a Tc99m point source positioned at
2.5 m (8’2”) from the detector, with the detector uniformly exposed to the source.

The images are persistence images (256 x 256 matrix) in a 20% window with a 5% offset applied. The refresh rate has
been set to 20 seconds.

NOTE
The images shown are all without uniformity correction.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-75

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
-event 0: Disable event transmission No counts shown on the Acquisition PC.

-event 1: Uncorrected events.

No correction has been applied.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-76

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
-event 2: Energy corrected events.

Only Ecor has been applied.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-77

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
-event 3: Linearity corrected events.

Only LinCor has been applied.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-78

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
-event 4: Energy and linearity
corrected events.

Detector is fully calibrated with the exception

of Uniformity correction.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-79

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 6-80
07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
7 REPAIR PROCEDURES

CONTENTS
7.1 About This Chapter ................................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2 Gantry Repairs .......................................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.1 General ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.2 Tools ............................................................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.2.3 Removing the Tilt Drive ................................................................................................................................ 7-4
7.2.3.1 Removing the Tilt Motor ............................................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.3.2 Removing the Tilt Encoder ........................................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.3.3 Reassembling the Tilt Drive ......................................................................................................... 7-9
7.2.4 Removing the Radius Drive ........................................................................................................................ 7-10
7.2.4.1 Reassembling the Radius Drive ................................................................................................. 7-14
7.2.4.2 Radius Motor Defective.............................................................................................................. 7-15
7.2.5 Removing the Roll Drive ............................................................................................................................. 7-16
7.2.5.1 Remounting the Roll Drive ......................................................................................................... 7-21
7.2.5.2 Roll Motor Defective................................................................................................................... 7-21
7.2.6 Motor Controller Replacement .................................................................................................................... 7-23
7.2.7 Mounting Table Drive on Ball Screw ........................................................................................................... 7-25
7.3 Detector Repairs ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-31
7.3.1 General ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-31
7.3.2 Tools ........................................................................................................................................................... 7-31
7.3.3 Replacement of Detector Power Supply and EDC Board ........................................................................... 7-31
7.3.4 Replacement of Analog Detector Boards (Strips) ....................................................................................... 7-31
7.3.5 Replacement of PMT’s ............................................................................................................................... 7-32
7.4 Collimator Cart ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-36
7.4.1 Alignment of Linkage on Collimator Cart .................................................................................................... 7-36

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-1

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
7.1 ABOUT THIS CHAPTER
This chapter provides instructions on repairing the Meridian system in the field.

The general philosophy for repairing the Meridian is to repair at a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) level. The hardware
indicators and software diagnostic utilities allow fault isolation to FRU level.

7.2 GANTRY REPAIRS

7.2.1 GENERAL
Most parts of the Meridian are easily replaceable in the field. No written procedures are required for these. Some parts,
however, require more comprehensive procedures to replace. These procedures are described in the following
paragraphs.

WARNING
Some gantry components represent risks of serious injury if removed. Make sure that
heavy parts are adequately supported or in balance during repairs on these.

WARNING
Disconnect power to the gantry before replacing any electrical parts. Not disconnecting
power entails a risk of serious injury from electrical shock and may lead to damage of
the electronic parts.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-2

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
7.2.2 TOOLS
Tools needed for gantry repairs are:
• Metric Allen keys 1.5 to 10 mm
• A 5 mm hex nut driver
• A 17 mm spanner
• A selection of standard and Phillips screwdrivers
• Assorted cable binders for re-cabling.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-3

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
7.2.3 REMOVING THE TILT DRIVE

7.2.3.1 Removing the Tilt Motor

The tilt motor is located on the inside of the left detector arm. It is not necessary to remove the detector in order to remove
the tilt motor.

Procedure Details

1. Remove the three retaining screws

holding the tilt gear cover on the upper
side of the left detector arm.
2. Remove the tilt gear cover.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-4

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

3. On the lower side of the left detector

arm, remove the four retaining screws
holding the tilt gear bottom cover.
4. Remove the tilt gear bottom cover.

5. Use a small screwdriver to loosen the 1

four locking screws holding the two
DB9 connectors on the tilt cable (1). 2

6. Push the tilt cable to the side.

7. Remove the four female screw locks
holding the next two DB9 connectors to
the bracket (2).
8. Pull the connectors free of the bracket.

Note:
The photo on the right was taken with the
detector removed to obtain a better view.
Replacing parts of the tilt drive does not
require the detector to be removed.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-5

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

9. Remove the two M6 bolts holding the

tilt motor bracket to the detector arm.
10. Pull out the tilt motor together with its
bracket.

7.2.3.2 Removing the Tilt Encoder

Procedure Details

1. Proceed as described in section 7.2.3.1

Removing the Tilt Motor.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-6

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

2. Remove the four screws from the cover

on the outside of the detector arm.

Under the cover, you find a timing belt and

two pulleys, as shown in the photo on the
right.
3. Remove the smaller pulley from the
encoder shaft together with the timing
belt.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-7

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

4. Unscrew the four screws holding the

detector top cover.
Remove the detector top cover.

5. Manually turn the gear wheel on the tilt

drive until the detector is in the vertical
position.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-8

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

6. Remove the three screws holding the

absolute encoder to the arm.
7. Remove the absolute encoder from the
inside of the detector arm.

7.2.3.3 Reassembling the Tilt Drive

To reassemble the tilt drive, proceed as described in the previous sections, reversing the order of the steps.

NOTE
When the tilt drive has been taken apart, the tilt absolute encoder must be reset. See
Chapter 5 Calibrations for instructions.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-9

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
7.2.4 REMOVING THE RADIUS DRIVE

Procedure Details

1. Use the hand controller to set detector

radius to approximately 220 mm.
If it is not possible to use the hand
controller to set the detector radius,
follow the procedure provided in
section 7.2.4.2 on page 7-15 to adjust
detector radius.

2. Unscrew the two outer radius end stop

bars and remount them in the reverse
position.
Radius end stop bar –
normal orientation

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-10

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

Radius end stop bar –

reversed orientation

3. Carefully increase detector radius until

stopped by the two reversed end stop
bars.
4. Use the hand controller to set detector
rotation to – 150°.
5. Remove both covers from the gantry
rear.
6. Power off the gantry.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-11

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

7. Unplug the following cables:

• The absolute encoder cable from
connector F12 on the ring board.
• The motor brake cable from
connector F7 on the ring board.
• The incremental encoder cable from
connector BZ10 on the motion
controller.
Cut any cable ties holding these
cables.

8. Use the hand controller button to

set detector rotation to – 185°.
9. Loosen the roll cable entry bracket and
pull out the roll cable as far as it goes.

10. Remove the banana-shaped cover

plate from the radius drive.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-12

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

11. On the absolute encoder bracket, mark

the position of the 3 mounting screws
for the encoder.
12. Loosen each of the 3 mounting screws
for the encoder by one turn.
13. Turn the enocoder to obtain the
maximum slack of the timing belt.
Remove the timing belt.
14. Remove the four M6 bolts holding the
bracket to the radius drive. Remove the
bracket with the encoder.
15. Unplug the motor cable.

16. Remove the two socket-headed bolts

holding the radius drive onto the main
bearing (6 mm Allen key).
17. Pull the entire radius drive away from
the ring and take it out of the gantry.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-13

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
7.2.4.1 Reassembling the Radius Drive
To reassemble the radius drive, apply the procedure outlined above, in the reverse order.

NOTE
If the radius drive is being replaced, the pinion of the new drive must be turned to a
position where its teeth are aligned with those on the drive being replaced. Otherwise it
will not be possible to mount the new drive due to interference with the teeth in the
rack.

Procedure Details

To align the pinion:

1. Place a short M6 screw in the threaded
hole of the motor shaft at the brake
end.
2. Tighten the screw.
3. Use an Allen key to turn the motor
shaft, thus overcoming the friction of
the brake.

NOTE
Do not forget to turn the radius end stops to the normal orientation (see page 7-10).
The radius absolute encoder must be reset. See the Chapter Calibrations.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-14

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
7.2.4.2 Radius Motor Defective
If the Radius Motor is defective and it is not possible to use the hand controller to operate radius, follow the procedure
outlined below:

Procedure Details

1. Use a short Allen key to remove the

radius drive cover. Remove the three
screws holding the radius brake
magnet.
2. Remove the magnet and pull out the
brake disc.

3. Remount the brake disc but reversed.

4. Now the disc functions as a handle that
can be used to adjust detector radius in
the desired direction.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-15

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
7.2.5 REMOVING THE ROLL DRIVE

Procedure Details

1. Use the hand controller to set detector

radius to 256 mm.
If it is not possible to use the hand
controller to set detector radius, follow
the procedure provided in section
7.2.4.2 on page 7-15 to adjust detector
radius.
2. Remove the lower back cover from the
gantry.

3. Use the hand controller to set detector

rotation to 180°.
4. Power off the gantry.

CAUTION
The detector must be rotated to 180° before removal of the roll drive is attempted.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-16

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

5. Remove the roll drive cover from the

gantry front.

6. Remove the three M8 bolts holding the

absolute encoder bracket and remove
the bracket from the roll drive.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-17

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

7. Unplug the roll brake from the G6

connector on the safety board. Cut
relevant cable ties.

8. Remove the roll amplifier from its

bracket.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-18

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

9. Unplug the roll motor power cable from

the motor.

10. Unplug the roll motor encoder cable

from the BZ10 connector on the
roll/table motion controller. Cut relevant
cable ties.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-19

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

11. From the front of the gantry, use a

6 mm Allen key to loosen the five
socket-headed bolts holding the roll
drive onto the gantry casting.
12. Support the roll drive while completely
unscrewing the bolts.

13. Remove the roll drive from the gantry

rear side.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-20

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
7.2.5.1 Remounting the Roll Drive
To remount the roll drive, apply the procedure outlined above, in the reverse order.

NOTE
The roll absolute encoder must be reset subsequently. Refer to Chapter 5 Calibrations.

7.2.5.2 Roll Motor Defective

If the roll motor is defective and it is not possible to use the hand controller to rotate to 180°, follow this procedure:

Procedure Details

1. Use a short 3 mm Allen key to remove

the three bolts holding the roll brake
magnet.
2. Remove the magnet and take the
brake disc out.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-21

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

3. Remount the brake disc on the motor

shaft, but in the reversed position.
4. Turn the brake disc by hand in the
direction that moves the detector
towards the bottom (180°) position.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-22

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
7.2.6 MOTOR CONTROLLER REPLACEMENT

Procedure Details

1. Replacing a motion controller requires

unplugging all cables to it and
unscrewing the two Phillips screws.
Screws to be
removed.

2. Take the motor controller out of its

chassis:
Carefully pull out the end where the
Phillips screws came out by about
3 cm.
Slide the other end out of the chassis
(two latches are holding that end
down).

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-23

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

3. When a replacement motion controller Switch # Roll/Table Radius/Tilt

is installed, its DIP switches must be Motion controller Motion Controller
set according to its allocation. 1 OFF ON
2 ON OFF
3 ON ON
4 ON ON
5 ON ON
6 OFF OFF
7 OFF OFF
8 OFF OFF
9 OFF OFF
10 OFF OFF

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-24

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
7.2.7 MOUNTING TABLE DRIVE ON BALL SCREW
Procedure Details

1. Insert the ball screw through the table

drive so that the ball screw nut meets
the brass bearing on the table drive
(see next page).

NOTE
Do not remove the nut from the ball screw.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-25

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

2. Fasten the 6 M3 x 12 screws to join the

ball screw nut to the table drive. The
force used should be 1.5 Nm.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-26

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

3. The assembly (drive and ball screw) is

placed in the table guide and slid in.
The assembly is slid into the table
guide from the end that is on the
opposite side of the gantry from the
detector.
Ensure that the drive is oriented with
the motor towards the gantry.
Be careful not to damage the
optocouplers mounted on the table
drive.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-27

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

4. A brass bushing is mounted onto the

ball screw at each end. The two brass
bushings are tightened equally so that
the length of the ball screw with
bushings exactly meets the length of
the table guide.
Use the two end mounting plates to
ensure this length adjustment.

5. Fasten the brass bushing at one end

by tightening the set screw with a force
of 1.5 Nm.
6. Mount the ball screw onto the mounting
plate at the same end by fastening the
two M 4 x 16 screws with a force of
3 Nm.
7. Fine tune the length of the ball screw
by turning the brass bushing at the
other end.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-28

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

8. Remove the set screw from the brass

bushing. Mount the bushing onto the
mounting plate by fastening the two
M 4 x 16 screws using a force of 3 Nm.
9. Check the length of the ball screw by
sliding it from side to side at one end.
If needed, remove the mounting plate
and turn the brass bushing either way
to increase or decrease the length of
the ball screw.

NOTE
The ball screw must have a length that allows it to move from side to side with some
difficulty.
If too lose, the ball screw will vibrate during table motion and make it noisy.
If too tight, table motion may stop unintentionally as the table drive cannot overcome
the load.

Procedure Details

10. Fasten the bushing by fastening the set

screw with a force of 3 Nm.
11. Slide the table guide with table drive
and ball screw into the Gantry.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-29

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

12. Join the table drive to the gantry by

fastening the 2 mounting nuts. See
photo on the right.
13. Mount the two table end consoles on Mounting nut
the table guide.
Mount the table top.
14. Check the vertical and horizontal
position of the ball screw at both ends
with relation to the position next to the
table drive. Ensure that there are no
misalignments.
15. If there are misalignments, use a screw
driver or plastic hammer to adjust end
positions to match position at table
drive.
16. Use the hand controller to translate the
table all the way from one end position
to the other two or three times.
Verify that the table has not become
noisy and does not stop unexpectedly
on the way.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-30

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
7.3 DETECTOR REPAIRS
7.3.1 GENERAL
For repairs inside the detector, it is most convenient to place the detector at 0° rotation, 0° tilt and with the radius set to its
minimum. Use the hand controller to move the detector to this position. Turn the power off.

WARNING
High voltage is present inside the detector. Be sure to power off the detector before
removing internal covers.

7.3.2 TOOLS
In addition to the tools listed for gantry repairs, a 5 mm hex nut driver is needed for replacement of Detector Strips.

Optical couplant grease is needed when a PMT is replaced.

Two bolts, 50 – 100 mm long, are useful for lifting the PMT support plate out.

7.3.3 REPLACEMENT OF DETECTOR POWER SUPPLY AND EDC BOARD

These units are located under the top cover, mounted on a hinged platform.

7.3.4 REPLACEMENT OF ANALOG DETECTOR BOARDS (STRIPS)

To get access to these boards, the hinged platform must be turned to an upright position. Then the two lead covers can
be removed. Handles are provided for this.

The Analog Boards are mounted in two layers. The upper layer consists of 8 PMT inter-connecting strips. Each of these is
held in place by 4 hex socket screws.

The lower layer consists of 4 strips oriented at right angles to the PMT strips. These are:
• Power Board
• X-E Board
• Y-Board

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-31

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
• Tune Board.

These Boards are held in place by a number of hex connecting nuts.

7.3.5 REPLACEMENT OF PMT’S

WARNING
To replace PMT’s, you must always wear safety glasses and rubber gloves.

Procedure Details

1. Disassemble the detector as described

on page 7-31.
However, lower layer strips need not
be removed.
2. Disconnect all cables.
3. Remove the six M6 screws along the
edges of the PMT Support Plate, and
use a couple of M8 bolts as handles to
lift the support plate out.
4. Remove the rubber seal from the faulty
PMT.
5. Hold the faulty PMT by its the glass
neck and pull it carefully away from the
crystal, at the same time turning the
PMT slightly back and forth. Applying a
slight oblique pull at the same time may
be helpful.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-32

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

After a while the PMT should come

loose.
6. Lift the PMT out and wipe the old
coupling compound away from the
crystal surface, using a plastic spatula
or e.g. a plastic ruler.
7. Check that the face plate of the
replacement PMT is clean.
Press approx. 1 cm (3/16”) strip of
optical couplant onto the center of the
PMT face plate. Be careful that no air
bubbles are trapped in the couplant.

8. With a plastic spatula (ruler), distribute

a part of the ‘blob’ towards each of the
corners of the PMT face plate. The
layer of optical couplant must still be
thickest around the center of the face
plate.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-33

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

9. Rotate the PMT to position the

connector consistently with the other
PMT’s.
Align the PMT and press down to seat
the PMT on the face of the crystal.
Apply so much pressure as to make
excessive couplant become visible
around all four edges of the PMT.
10. Remount the rubber seal and remount
the detector, reversing the procedure
described above.
11. Before remounting the lead covers,
power up the system and run a few
iterations of PMT Update Calibration.
12. Assess the images to see if the new
PMT matches the rest of the PMT’s.
If the new PMT shows a pronounced
pattern, the LED aperture should be
changed.

NOTE
The LED aperture is changed by turning the slot on the back of the PMT. The slot can
be accessed with a screwdriver trough a hole in the PMT Strip Board.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-34

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

13. Now remount the rest of the detector

and run a complete PMT Update
Calibration.
14. Run a Daily QC uniformity test to
determine if further calibrations seem
necessary.

15. Leave the detector to stabilize until the

following day. Then repeat the PMT
Update Calibration.
16. Repeat step 14.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-35

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
7.4 COLLIMATOR CART
7.4.1 ALIGNMENT OF LINKAGE ON COLLIMATOR CART
Procedure Details

1. Set the collimator handle to the position

Collimator Locked to Cart (handle in
end position at the front of cart).
2. Loosen the four screws attaching the
code pin to the wire.
The screws must be loosened so that
the wire can move freely.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-36

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

3. Loosen the two screws securing the

wire to each of the four collimator
locks.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-37

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

4. With the handle on the collimator cart

in position Collimator Locked to
Detector (turned all the way to the end
on the short side of the cart), align
each of the four collimator locks to be
parallel to the long side of the cart.

5. Turn the handle through 90° to position

Collimator Locked to Cart.
Observe that all four locks also turn by
90° synchronized to the handle.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-38

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

6. If all four locks do not turn correctly, the

wire needs to be tightened.
Tighten the wire and realign each of
the four locks.

Turn to tighten
wire

7. Turn the handle from one side to the

other a few times and observe smooth
and synchronized operation of the four
locks.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-39

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

8. Secure the wire to each of the four

locks by fastening the two screws in
each lock.

Lock wheel

NOTE
The screws must secure the wire at places where the wire just has a single turn on the
lock wheel.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-40

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

9. Set the handle in one end position.

10. Turn the code pin into its
corresponding end position.
11. Fasten the four screws to secure it to
the wire.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-41

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

12. While keeping the code pin pressed

down, operate the handle, moving it
from one end position to the other a
few times to observe smooth operation.

Press down with finger and keep

depressed while operating the handle

13. Place the handle in position Collimator

locked to detector (turned fully
counterclockwise).

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 7-42

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
8 SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURES

CONTENTS
8.1 About This Chapter ................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Procedures ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.2.1 Upgrading EDC Firmware ............................................................................................................................. 8-2
8.2.1.1 Tools Required ............................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.2.1.2 Procedure to Upgrade EDC Firmware (Revision C and Newer) .................................................. 8-3
8.2.2 Collimator ID Programming........................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.2.2.1 Tools Required ............................................................................................................................ 8-8
8.2.2.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.2.3 Upgrading Motion Controller Firmware ....................................................................................................... 8-11
8.2.3.1 Tools Required .......................................................................................................................... 8-11
8.2.3.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................. 8-11
8.2.4 Upgrading Meridian Acquisition Software ................................................................................................... 8-16
8.2.4.1 Tools Required .......................................................................................................................... 8-16
8.2.4.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................. 8-16
8.2.5 Complete Installation of Acquisition Software ............................................................................................. 8-18
8.2.5.1 Tools Required .......................................................................................................................... 8-18
8.2.5.2 Installation of FireWire Driver ..................................................................................................... 8-20
8.2.5.3 Installation of Meridian Application Software ............................................................................. 8-21
8.2.5.4 Adding a Meridian Icon to the Desktop ...................................................................................... 8-22
8.2.6 Backup of Calibration Tables and User Protocols....................................................................................... 8-24
8.2.6.1 Tools Required .......................................................................................................................... 8-24
8.2.6.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................. 8-24
8.2.7 Restore Calibration Tables and User Protocols .......................................................................................... 8-26
8.2.7.1 Tools Required .......................................................................................................................... 8-26
8.2.7.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................. 8-26

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-1

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
8.1 ABOUT THIS CHAPTER
This section comprises a set of procedures to be followed when updating or reinstalling software in the Meridian system.

Furthermore, a procedure is given to program collimator ID.

8.2 PROCEDURES
8.2.1 UPGRADING EDC FIRMWARE
The EDC module contains two software packages: One for the on-board micro controller, and one package for the
programmable logic devices on the board. When re-installing or upgrading software on this board, the readme.txt file will
include information on what to upgrade.

8.2.1.1 Tools Required

• NULL modem cable
• Meridian Software Installation Disk, part number 9UNT1041.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-2

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
8.2.1.2 Procedure to Upgrade EDC Firmware (Revision C and Newer)

Procedure Details

1. Remove the detector top cover to

access the EDC module.
Serial interface
2. Connect one end of the serial interface cable
cable to the EDC ECG port labeled
A1 RS232. This will require the
removal of the ECG cable.
ECG cable
3. Connect the opposite end of the cable
to the COM1 serial port on the Meridian
Acquisition PC.

4. Insert the Meridian Software

Installation CD-ROM in the CD-ROM
drive.
5. Start the Windows Explorer program.
On the CD-ROM, locate the folder
‘EDC Meridian programming for hw rev
9EDC0654-C07’
6. Read the file readme.txt in this
directory.

7. Start the EDC Module software

download program. Proceed as follows:
• In the Windows Explorer’s Folders
list, select the folder ’EDC Meridian
programming for hw rev 9EDC0654-
C07‘on the CD-ROM.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-3

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

• In this folder, start the program

named flash.exe by double-clicking
the program file’s icon.
• Click Select Hex file and browse to
find the file to download. The file
name is of the form
7CTL0079-Xnn.h86 where ‘Xnn’ is
the version of the software.
• Select the COM port used (COM1).

8. Click Program Target Device.

The program issues the message:
“Please ensure that the Target Board is
in Bootstrap Loader Mode”. Detector select
switch
9. When this message pops up, proceed
as follows:
• On the EDC board, hold the
Detector Select switch in position Reset push
PGRM (towards the Reset button). button

• While holding the detector select

switch in the PGRM position
(momentary switch function), press
and release the Reset button.

10. Click OK to download the software to

the EDC Module. A progress bar
should now appear.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-4

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

11. Wait until the progress bar is replaced

by a completion message appears.
Click OK.
12. Click Exit to close the download
program.

NOTE
If an error message appears instead of the progress bar, click OK. Repeat from step 8
to reattempt the download. The ReadMe.txt file in the MC folder on the CD-ROM
provides further details on error messages from the flash.exe program.

Procedure Details

13. When the download is complete, reset

the EDC Board (this time by pressing
the board’s Reset button alone).

NOTE
The following steps provide instructions on downloading logic firmware to the EDC
board. Do not reprogram the logic unless specifically instructed to do so by an FMI
(field modification instruction).

Procedure Details

14. To download logic firmware to the EDC

board, you use the terminal emulator

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-5

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

program ttermpro. Proceed as follows:

• In the Windows Explorer, select the
folder \EDC Meridian programming
for hw rev 9EDC0654-C07\
TTERMPRO on the CD-ROM.
• From the CD-ROM, start the
program ttermpro.exe by double-
clicking the program file’s icon.

• Press ENTER to check if the have

terminal prompt -> appears. If it
does not, check the serial port
setup:
Baudrate: 57600
Data: 8
Parity: none
Stop: 1
Flow control: hardware (or none)
Transmit delay: 0 and 1
communication.
15. At the prompt, type the following
commands:
-> dspreset
-> ispsvf

16. In the File menu, select Send File.

17. Select the file LSI.svf from the directory
‘EDC Meridian programming for hw rev

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-6

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

9EDC0654-C07’ on the CD-ROM.

18. When the software is successfully

downloaded, the ECG connection must
be restored, and the EDC module must Connector A4 POWER on
be power cycled: the EDC board

Remove the EDC power cable from the

connector A4 POWER.
Reconnect the power cable.
19. When done, remount the detector top
cover.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-7

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
8.2.2 COLLIMATOR ID PROGRAMMING
The collimator type ID is programmed into an EEPROM located on the collimator ID board.

8.2.2.1 Tools Required

• Meridian Software Installation Disk, part number 9UNT1041.

The programming tool is located in the \Unicorn folder on the Meridian software installation disk. The file name of the
programming tool named \Unicorn\unicorn1.exe.

8.2.2.2 Procedure

Procedure Details

1. Mount the collimator that is to be

programmed on the detector. Refer to
the Operator’s Manual for a description
of the collimator exchange procedure.
2. Close down the Meridian application on
the Acquisition PC.
3. Insert the Meridian software CD into
the CD-ROM drive on the Acquisition
PC.
4. Run unicorn1.exe. Proceed as follows:
• In the Windows Explorer, select the
Unicorn folder on the CD.
• Double-click the program
unicorn1.exe.
Depending on the setup of the
Explorer program, the name of the

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-8

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

unicorn.exe program may be shown

as just unicorn1 (without the
extension).

5. Initialize communication by clicking the

Initialize button. Check the status line
to see that this was successful.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-9

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

6. Press the R/W EEPROM button to

bring up the programming panel.
7. Ensure that Collimator is checked off.
8. Enter the Collimator # into the field:
0 for LEGP
1 for LEHR
2 for LEUHR
3 for MEGP
4 for LEPH
5 for HEGP
6 for HEPH.
9. Enter the collimator type according to
the list above.
10. Click the Update button and then
Done.

11. Press R/W EEPROM button to bring up

the programming panel again.
Check that the input collimator data are
present in the respective fields.
12. Click Done and then Exit to stop the
program.
13. Start the Meridian program once again
by double-clicking the Meridian icon.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-10

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
8.2.3 UPGRADING MOTION CONTROLLER FIRMWARE

NOTE
The two motion controllers must have the same software version installed at all times.

8.2.3.1 Tools Required

• SW Load Cable for Motion Controller, part No. 9CBL0818
• Meridian Software Installation Disk, part No. 9UNT1041.

8.2.3.2 Procedure

Procedure Details

1. Remove the upper and lower rear

covers from the Gantry to access the
two motion controller modules. One is
located in the Gantry base, the other in
the Gantry ring.
2. For safety reasons, press one of the
EMERGENCY STOP buttons.

NOTE
You may have to rotate the detector to access the radius/tilt motion controller.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-11

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

3. Connect the SW load cable to the

motion controller serial port labeled
BZ2 RS232. This does not require the
removal of any other cables to the
motion controller.

NOTE
Use caution when inserting the connector of the SW load cable into the BZ2 RS232
serial port. The connector must fit into the socket quite easily – if it does not, try turning
the connector.

Procedure Details

4. Connect the opposite end of the cable

(with the 9 pin connector) to the COM1
serial port on the Meridian Acquisition
PC. In this case, it is not necessary to
use a null modem cable adapter (as it
is for the EDC board).
5. Insert the software CD-ROM in the CD-
ROM drive.
6. Use the Windows Explorer program to
copy the \MC folder from the CD-ROM
drive into a working directory on the
hard disk.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-12

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

7. Start the motion controller software

download program:
In the folder that you just copied to the
hard disk, start the program named
flash.exe by double-clicking the
program file’s icon.

8. Click Select Hex File.

Browse to find the file to download. The
file name is of the form 7MMS0163-
Xnn.h86 where ‘Xnn’ is the version of
the software.
9. Select the COM port to be used
(COM1).
10. Click Program Target Device.

The program displays the message shown

to the right.
11. When this message pops up, proceed
as follows:
• Set SW10 on the motion controller
in position UP to reset the motion
controller.
• Set SW9 in position UP to set the
motion controller in program mode.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-13

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

• Set SW10 back to DOWN position

to remove the reset.
12. Click OK to initiate software download
to the motion controller.
A progress bar should now appear.
13. Wait until the progress bar is replaced
by a completion message. Click OK.
14. Be sure to set SW9 back to the DOWN
position after completing the software
download.

NOTE
If an error message appears instead of the progress bar, click OK. Then repeat from
step 10 to reattempt software download. For further details, refer to the ReadMe file in
the MC folder on the CD-ROM.

Procedure Details

15. If the other motion controller also

needs updating:
Move the software load cable to this
motion controller.
Repeat the above procedure from step
10 to step 14 to update the other
motion controller, as well.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-14

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

16. Remove the software load cable.

17. Power cycle the Gantry to reset both
motion controllers.
18. Remount the two gantry rear covers.
Remove the Emergency Stop
condition.
Press COLLISION OVERRIDE on the
hand controller to enable power to the
motors.
19. Delete the working directory that you
created on the hard disk, along with all
its contents.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-15

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
8.2.4 UPGRADING MERIDIAN ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
The Meridian software CD-ROM includes two batch files that are used to update or completely install the acquisition
software.

NOTE
A complete installation will overwrite all existing Meridian acquisition software, detector
calibrations, non-default protocols, the patient database etc. Make sure that up-to-date
backup disks are available before making a complete installation.

8.2.4.1 Tools Required

• Meridian Software Installation Disk, part number 9UNT1041.

NOTE
As a precaution in case anything should go wrong, please ensure that the older SW
version CD-ROM is available. This will enable you restore the original version of the
acquisition software.

8.2.4.2 Procedure

Procedure Details

1. Insert the Meridian Software

Installation disk in the Acquisition PC’s
CD-ROM drive.
2. Close all programs on the Acquisition
PC.
3. Start the Windows Explorer and select
the CD-ROM drive.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-16

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

4. Run the file setupMeridianprogram.bat

by double-clicking on the name of the
file.
5. Follow the instructions given.
6. When the software installation is
completed, remove the software CD-
ROM and store it in a safe place along
with the backup disks.
7. Start the Meridian acquisition software
by double-clicking the Meridian icon on
the desktop.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-17

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
8.2.5 COMPLETE INSTALLATION OF ACQUISITION SOFTWARE

The Meridian software CD-ROM includes two batch files that are used to update or completely install the acquisition
software.

To perform a complete installation, administrator privileges are required. To log on as Administrator:

1. Close down the Meridian application.
2. Click the Windows Start button.
3. Select Shut Down.
4. Select Log off <user>.
If the option says Log off Administrator, click Cancel and proceed to section 8.2.5.1 Tools Required.
5. Click the OK button and wait for the Log on to Windows dialog to be displayed.
6. Log on to the Acquisition PC as administrator:
In the User name field, enter Administrator.
Enter the administrator password.
7. Click OK.

NOTE
A complete installation will overwrite all existing Meridian acquisition software, detector
calibrations, non-default protocols, the patient database etc. Make sure that up-to-date
backup disks are available before making a complete installation.

8.2.5.1 Tools Required

• Meridian Software Installation Disk, part No. 9UNT1041.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-18

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 NOTE
As an extra precaution: If the Meridian software is already installed on the PC, the
existing version can be saved by copying it to a backup directory. This ensures that
customized protocols etc. are saved.
Copy the directory C:\Meridian to a working directory on the C: drive.
Proceed as follows:
• In the Windows Explorer, select the Meridian Directory.
• Right-click on the directory name and select Copy from the pop-up menu.
• In the folder list, select the destination directory.
• Right-click in the file list, and select Paste from the pop-up menu.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-19

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
8.2.5.2 Installation of FireWire Driver
If Meridian software has never been installed on the PC, the FireWire driver must be installed.

Procedure Details

1. Insert the Meridian software installation

disk in the CD-ROM drive on the
Acquisition PC.
2. Close all programs.

3. Start the Windows Explorer. Select the

CD-ROM drive.
4. Select the directory ubCore.
5. Start the program ubCore.exe by
double-clicking on its name in the file
list. (Depending on the setup of the
Explorer program, the extension .exe
may not be visible.)
6. Follow the instructions provided.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-20

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
8.2.5.3 Installation of Meridian Application Software

Procedure Details

1. Insert the Meridian software installation

disk in the Acquisition PC’s CD-ROM
drive.
2. Start the Windows Explorer. Select the
CD-ROM drive.
3. Start the batch file
setupMeridiantotal.bat by double-
clicking on its name in the file list.
4. Follow the instructions provided.
5. When the software installation is
completed, install the backup
calibration tables and customer specific
protocols from the backup disks
following the procedure given in section
8.2.7 Restore Calibration Tables and
User Protocols on page 8-26.
6. When done, remove the software CD-
ROM. Store it in a safe place along
with the backup disks.

To add a Meridian icon to the Windows

2000 desktop, refer to section 8.2.5.4
Adding a Meridian Icon to the Desktop
on page 8-22.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-21

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
8.2.5.4 Adding a Meridian Icon to the Desktop
To provide the user with a convenient way to start the acquisition software, create a Meridian icon on the Acquisition PC’s
desktop.

Procedure Details

1. First, you must log out of the

Administrator account and log back in
as the newly created user Meridian:
Click the Windows Start button and
select Shut Down from the menu.

2. In the drop-down list in the Shut Down

Windows dialog, select the option Log
off Administrator.

3. When prompted, press CTRL + ALT +

DEL to log in.
Specify the user name Meridian and
the password Meridian.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-22

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

4. When you see the Windows desktop

again, right-click somewhere on the
desktop.
5. From the pop-up menu, select New,
Shortcut.

6. In the Create Shortcut dialog, enter the

file location C:\Meridian\DDDAcq.exe.
Click Next.
7. In the next window, enter a name for
the shortcut: Meridian. Click Finish.

The shortcut is now placed on the

Meridian user’s desktop.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-23

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
8.2.6 BACKUP OF CALIBRATION TABLES AND USER PROTOCOLS

8.2.6.1 Tools Required

• Backup diskettes.

8.2.6.2 Procedure
Procedure Details

1. Exit the Meridian application. The first floppy will backup:

2. Insert an empty disk into the floppy disk Detector Calibrations:

drive. c:\Meridian\Calibrations\
dyncor.dat
3. Start the Windows Explorer program. Hvcal.dat
4. In the folder list, select the Meridian pmtcal.dat
folder on the C: drive. All files and ecal.dat
folders in the Meridian directory are geocal.dat
now displayed in the file list on the ecor.dat
right. lincor.dat.
5. In the file list, double-click on the file Motion Calibrations:
Backup.bat (depending on the setup of c:\Meridian\Calibrations\
Windows Explorer, the extension .bat motions.ini
may not be visible). User & Factory defined protocols:
6. Follow the instructions provided. c:\Meridian\Acquisition\*.*
Dynamics
Gated
Gated Tomo
Static
Tomographics
WB steps
Whole Body.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-24

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

User & Factory defined Isotopes and Energies:

c:\Meridian\Acquisition\
Radiopharma.dir
EnergySets.dir.
Processing station configuration:
c:\Meridian\nodescnf.ini.

The next floppies will contain Uniformity Correction files from the
directory:
c:\Meridian\Calibrations\”Uniformity Maps”\Unifcor.*

The next floppies will contain COR files from the directory:
c:\Meridian\Calibrations\corcor

and collimator map files from directory

c:\Meridian\Calibrations\”Collimator Maps”\unicor.*

The last floppy will contain the QC uniformity correction file:

c:\Meridian\Calibrations\QCunif.dat.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-25

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
8.2.7 RESTORE CALIBRATION TABLES AND USER PROTOCOLS
Calibration files and all acquisition protocols are saved on a set of labeled floppies. All these files are stored in a directory
structure identical to the structure on the hard disk of the Acquisition PC. The files must all be restored manually using the
Windows Explorer.

Section 8.2.6 Backup of Calibration Tables and User Protocols on page 8-24 lists the structure of the backup files.

8.2.7.1 Tools Required

Labeled Backup disks, i.e. created using the procedure described in section 8.2.6 Backup of Calibration Tables and User
Protocols on page 8-24.

8.2.7.2 Procedure
Using the Windows Explorer program, copy the files one by one from the floppy disks to the respective directories on the
Acquisition PC’s hard disk.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 8-26

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

CONTENTS
9.1 Installation Requirements .......................................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.1.1 Ideal Floor Space Allocation ......................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.1.2 Minimum Floor Space Allocation .................................................................................................................. 9-5
9.1.3 Ceiling Height ............................................................................................................................................. 9-10
9.1.4 Ancillary Services ....................................................................................................................................... 9-10
9.1.5 Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................................................. 9-10
9.1.5.1 General ...................................................................................................................................... 9-10
9.1.5.2 Floor........................................................................................................................................... 9-10
9.1.5.3 Telephones ................................................................................................................................ 9-10
9.1.5.4 Lighting ...................................................................................................................................... 9-11
9.1.5.5 Housekeeping ............................................................................................................................ 9-11
9.1.6 Environment................................................................................................................................................ 9-11
9.1.6.1 RFI Considerations .................................................................................................................... 9-11
9.1.6.2 EMI Considerations.................................................................................................................... 9-11
9.1.6.3 Gamma Events .......................................................................................................................... 9-12
9.1.6.4 Magnetic Fields .......................................................................................................................... 9-12
9.1.7 Safety ......................................................................................................................................................... 9-12
9.2 Shipping, Handling, Installation and Storage ........................................................................................................... 9-13
9.2.1 Shipping Containers and Weights............................................................................................................... 9-13
9.2.2 Passageway Clearances ............................................................................................................................ 9-14
9.2.3 Equipment Storage ..................................................................................................................................... 9-15
9.2.4 Power Requirements .................................................................................................................................. 9-17
9.2.4.1 Quality of Power......................................................................................................................... 9-17
9.2.4.2 Transient Voltage ....................................................................................................................... 9-17
9.2.4.3 Voltage Regulation..................................................................................................................... 9-17
9.2.4.4 Brownouts .................................................................................................................................. 9-17
9.2.4.5 Source Configuration ................................................................................................................. 9-18

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-1

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 9.2.4.6 Emergency Power...................................................................................................................... 9-18
9.2.5 Environmental Specifications ...................................................................................................................... 9-18
9.2.6 Meridian Raceway Layout and Diagram ..................................................................................................... 9-19
9.2.7 Meridian Floor Levelness ............................................................................................................................ 9-20
9.3 Installation ............................................................................................................................................................... 9-21
9.3.1 Installation Overview ................................................................................................................................... 9-21
9.3.2 Tools ........................................................................................................................................................... 9-24
9.3.2.1 Tools Shipped With System ....................................................................................................... 9-24
9.3.2.2 Tools Not Shipped With System ................................................................................................ 9-24
9.3.3 Installation Procedure ................................................................................................................................. 9-25
9.3.3.1 Unpacking .................................................................................................................................. 9-25
9.3.3.2 Determining the Actual Position for the System ......................................................................... 9-38
9.3.3.3 Installing Gantry Anchors ........................................................................................................... 9-40
9.3.3.4 Moving the Gantry to the Installation Room ............................................................................... 9-43
9.3.3.5 Securing the Gantry to the Floor ................................................................................................ 9-48
9.3.3.6 Installing the Table Rail.............................................................................................................. 9-49
9.3.3.7 Assembling the Table ................................................................................................................ 9-55
9.3.3.8 Mounting the Floor Rail .............................................................................................................. 9-58
9.3.3.9 Leveling the Gantry .................................................................................................................... 9-60
9.3.3.10 Mains Voltage Configuration ...................................................................................................... 9-67
9.3.3.11 Alternative Position of Rear Connector Panel ............................................................................ 9-68
9.3.3.12 Alternative Routing of Mains Cable and Network Cable ............................................................ 9-68
9.3.3.13 Location of Hand Controller ....................................................................................................... 9-69
9.3.3.14 Assembly of PC Cart.................................................................................................................. 9-70
9.3.3.15 Assembly of Acquisition PC Station ........................................................................................... 9-70
9.3.3.16 Connecting External Cables ...................................................................................................... 9-70
9.3.3.17 Mounting Protective Clamps ...................................................................................................... 9-71
9.3.3.18 Protecting Cables on the Floor .................................................................................................. 9-73
9.3.4 Software Setup ........................................................................................................................................... 9-76
9.3.4.1 Local Area Network Setup ......................................................................................................... 9-76
9.3.4.2 Setup of Processing Station IP Addresses ................................................................................ 9-80
9.3.4.3 Meridian Application DICOM Configuration ............................................................................... 9-84
9.3.4.4 DICOM Setup on the Odyssey ................................................................................................... 9-86

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-2

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 9.3.4.5 DICOM Setup on the Pegasys ................................................................................................... 9-86
9.3.4.6 DICOM Worklist Setup ............................................................................................................... 9-87
9.3.5 Configuration of Patient Table and patient Load Position ........................................................................... 9-89
9.3.6 Configuration of Regional Settings ............................................................................................................. 9-92
9.3.7 Setting Date and time ................................................................................................................................. 9-95
9.3.8 Institution Name Setup ............................................................................................................................... 9-97
9.4 Final System Calibration and Performance Testing ................................................................................................ 9-99
9.5 Unpacking Spare Collimators ................................................................................................................................ 9-100
9.6 Installation Verification........................................................................................................................................... 9-104

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-3

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

9.1.1 IDEAL FLOOR SPACE ALLOCATION

Some general considerations should be followed for all nuclear camera systems. These include comfortable workspace,
good visual contact with the patient on the patient table, sufficient service access and regard for patient safety. All nuclear
equipment contains components – e.g. sodium iodide crystals and high speed electronics – that require reasonably well
controlled temperature, humidity, and power.

Complete camera systems may be installed in a single room or with the gantry and Acquisition PC in one room and the
processing station in a separate room.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-4

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.1.2 MINIMUM FLOOR SPACE ALLOCATION
Minimum floor space layouts are shown for the Meridian system including processing station electronics.

The electronics do not require a separate environmentally controlled room, provided that the proper cooling and humidity
ranges are available.

# Equipment Width Depth Height Weight

1a Gantry and table 141.3“ 61.5” 57.6” 2090 lbs.
assembly*. 359 cm 165 cm 162 cm 950 kg
Cardiology version (short
table)
1b Gantry and table 193,7” 61.5” 57.6” 2090 lbs.
assembly* 492 cm 165 cm 162 cm 950 kg
Standard version (long
table)
2 Collimator cart 17” 17” 38” 75 lbs.
43 cm 43 cm 97 cm 33 kg
3 Acquisition PC and cart 3’ 0” 3’ 0” 5’ 5” 130 lbs.
90 cm 90 cm 165 cm 60 kg
4 Processing station on 27” 28” 20” 45 lbs
desktop 69 cm 71 cm 48 cm 20 kg
* Meridian is available in a standard configuration (1b) and a cardiology version with a shorter patient table (1a).

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-5

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Figure 9.1. Minimum room size in standard configuration

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-6

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Figure 9.2. Minimum room size in standard configuration

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-7

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Figure 9.3. Minimum room layout with short table (cardiology version)

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-8

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Figure 9.4. Minimum room layout with short table (cardiology version)

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-9

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.1.3 CEILING HEIGHT
To provide sufficient service access, permit NEMA standard flood testing and allow for proper air circulation, the minimum
allowable ceiling height should be 8’ 0” (245 cm) A/FF * (9’ 0” (275 cm) A/FF ceiling height is recommended).

9.1.4 ANCILLARY SERVICES

The ancillary services for the system should also be considered, when determining the floor space allocation. This would
include areas such as:
• Reception/waiting room
• Darkroom
• Hot lab
• Storage
• Dressing rooms
• Toilets
• Physician’s office, etc.

9.1.5 MISCELLANEOUS

9.1.5.1 General
While planning the site, please keep in mind that storage space for supplies, such as linens, on-site spare parts, film and
medical supplies is needed.

9.1.5.2 Floor
The room floor must consist of a finished concrete floor covered with an industrial-grade anti-static tile. No carpet may be
used on the floor.

9.1.5.3 Telephones
The room must be provided with a dedicated telephone line (bypassing the internal switchboard). This line is used by
Philips Medical Systems personnel to set up a high-speed modem connection to Philips service network.

*
A/FF = above finished floor.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-10

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.1.5.4 Lighting
Lighting fixtures, vents, etc. shall be flush with finished ceiling.

Dimmers should be used to control light levels in control and exam rooms. Locate dimmers conveniently for gantry and
controls.

9.1.5.5 Housekeeping
Housekeeping rules, which should be observed in the nuclear room, include:
• Never use steel wool for cleaning in any of the rooms. The fine metal fibers can enter enclosures via air cooling
systems and cause internal short circuits, difficult to detect and correct and causing equipment downtime.
• Buffing of wax on floors can circulate a fine powder, which could collect inside the components on open contacts.
Consequently, only liquid waxes should be used.

NOTE
Past experience indicates that it is advantageous to install a sink in the nuclear room.

9.1.6 ENVIRONMENT

9.1.6.1 RFI Considerations

The hospital’s surrounding conditions, internal and external to building structure, may cause radio frequency interference.
These problems are sometimes derived from high wattage transmitters such as: TV station, radio station, or other nearby
transmitters.

Many RFI problems are difficult to define and may require analysis by an outside specialist or consultant in this field,
employed by the customer.

9.1.6.2 EMI Considerations

The main power lines of the system should be dedicated lines directly from the nearest hospital mains distribution
transformer. It is advised that no other electrical equipment be connected to these power lines now or in the future.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-11

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
H.V. transformer equipment, electric meters, and other electro-magnetic devices may cause interference to the
microprocessor and computer equipment and should not be located adjacent to the camera room.

9.1.6.3 Gamma Events

The camera detects gamma events from a radioactive source and measures their intensity. The hospital’s physicist must
consider this when a hot lab or patient waiting area is located adjacent to a camera room. Consideration must also be
given to the layout of new equipment with respect to gamma cameras already installed.

NOTE
Meridian is designed for low and medium energy imaging. Accordingly, the detector is
shielded for up to 400 keV only.

9.1.6.4 Magnetic Fields

The camera is adversely affected by magnetic fields produced by MRI equipment, transformers, etc. The camera must not
be located within a field > 0.5 gauss. The distance will depend on the strength of the magnetic field, shielding and the
technology being applied.

9.1.7 SAFETY
It is suggested that oxygen and suction services be provided in exam room convenient to gantry. These services may be
of portable or permanent type.

Fire protection for the type of equipment and systems specified shall be provided in accordance with local codes.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-12

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.2 SHIPPING, HANDLING, INSTALLATION AND STORAGE

9.2.1 SHIPPING CONTAINERS AND WEIGHTS

Prior to installation, either the customer or a structural engineer must qualify that the proposed room location is capable of
supporting a Meridian system. Furthermore, the entire equipment path from the receiving dock to the clinical room must
also be qualified. This includes all freight elevators, if applicable.

The system is shipped in four containers, with either a long or a short patient table. The following table lists size and
weight.

Shipping box containing Shipping Weight Size W x D x H

Gantry incl. detector, collimator and collimator cart 2434 lbs. 61” x 47.2” x 63”
1104 kg 155 cm x 120 cm x 160 cm
Acquisition PC with monitor, cables, 361 lbs. 47” x 31,5” x 52”
PC-cart. 164 kg 120 cm x 80 cm x 130 cm
Iv-pole, dolly carts, accessory box and tools
Table end support 243 lbs. 47” x 31.5” x 29.5”
110 kg 120 cm x 80 cm x 75 cm
Long table and mattress* 276 lbs. 105” x 14.5” x 15.7”
125 kg 266 cm x 37 cm x 40 cm
*
Short table and mattress 258 lbs. 105” x 14.5” x 15.7”
117 kg 266 cm x 37 cm x 40 cm

*
The system is shipped with either a long or a short table

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-13

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.2.2 PASSAGEWAY CLEARANCES
Check all doors, corridors and elevators to ensure adequate clearance for the moving of the equipment.

The tables below specify the minimum required passage clearances for moving a Meridian system. The following
requirements apply for equipment moved in boxes on pallet jacks:

Minimum requirement
Door width 61” (155 cm)
Corridor width (90º turn) 69” (175 cm)
Door height 81” (205 cm)
Elevator width (if required) 63” (160 cm)
Elevator depth (if required) 52” (130 cm)
Elevator height (if required) 81” (205 cm)

The following requirements apply for equipment – without the boxes – moved on the dolly shipped with the system:

Minimum requirement
Door width (with/without jack beams mounted) 39” (99 cm)/36” (90 cm)
Corridor width (90º turn) 69” (175 cm)
Door height 81” (205 cm)
Elevator width (if required – with/without jack 39” (99 cm)/36” (90 cm)
beams mounted)
Elevator depth (if required) 60” (150 cm)
Elevator height (if required) 81” (205 cm)

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-14

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
The primary method of transporting the Meridian gantry and table base from the receiving dock to the clinical room is a
special dolly supplied with the system. The table and the remaining packages are best transported by means of a
standard pallet jack.

Figure 9.5. Minimum clearance for turns

9.2.3 EQUIPMENT STORAGE

If the equipment is to be stored by the customer prior to installation, the storage facility housing the equipment must be
dry and be kept at a constant temperature. The temperature at the storage facility should be regulated between 50° F and
86° F (10° C and 30° C), the relative humidity should be kept between 45% and 80%, and the environment should be free
of dust. A relative humidity of 55% is recommended.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-15

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 IMPORTANT
The detector crystal assemblies are extremely fragile and sensitive to sudden changes
in temperature. The detector heads are thermally protected within the gantry shipping
container. The collimator is also mounted and shipped on the detector providing
additional thermal protection. The thermal protection controls the temperature change
rate of the crystals.

CAUTION
You must never remove this thermal protection before the detector has been in a
controlled environment and has reached room temperature. In instances where
the equipment is being relocated from one temperature to an environment where
the temperature is very much different, it is suggested to allow the temperature of
the detector to stabilize for a period of 24 hours with the thermal protection on the
detector.
The accepted rate of temperature change should be less than 15° F (8° C) per
hour. Do not locally heat or cool the detector so as to produce gradients greater
than 5° F (3° C) across the detector face. Failure to comply may result in detector
crystal breakage.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-16

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.2.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS

9.2.4.1 Quality of Power

Power quality specifications are based on measurements taken at the nuclear room power distribution panel.

9.2.4.2 Transient Voltage

> 240 V None allowed

180-240 V, < 100 μseconds 1/day max
90-180 V, < 400 μseconds 6/hr, 24/day max
50-90 V, < 800 μseconds 6/hr, 24/day max

NOTE
If transients on the line exceed specified tolerances, a transient suppressor is
recommended in order to prevent equipment damage.

9.2.4.3 Voltage Regulation

All combinations of line variation shall not cause the line-to-line or line voltage to deviate from either its nominal or
average value by more than 7%, whichever is less. For example, assuming a nominal voltage of 120 V, if the line sags
below 111 V or surges above 128 V, an UPS line conditioner is required. The need for UPS is covered in section 9.2.4.4
Brownouts.

9.2.4.4 Brownouts
If there are consistent voltage losses exceeding a 30% drop in peak voltage for greater than 5 cycles, a battery
uninterrupted power supply (UPS) is recommended. Using an uninterruptible power supply will allow at least the case in
progress to be completed and should be considered where there is any concern for periodic power loss from any cause
(line drop out, generator testing, etc.) of the magnitude mentioned. The UPS also has significant benefit in that patient
studies are not lost in the event of power failure or generator test.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-17

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.2.4.5 Source Configuration
The power source supplying the Meridian system shall be single phase, neutral plus dedicated/isolated ground (3-wire).

Nominal AC V 100, 120, 200, 220 or 240

Line Phase Single
Full Load kVA 1.4 kVA
Line Amps 12 A (100 – 120 V), 6.25 A (200 – 240 V)
Voltage Variation +10% -10% from nominal

9.2.4.6 Emergency Power

Emergency power is not necessary for Meridian systems since the procedure being performed at the time of the power
failure would be lost anyway (unless the system is connected to an uninterruptible power supply). Using an UPS is
strongly suggested for each nuclear system.

9.2.5 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS

The temperature in the examination room must be regulated at 59° F to 86° F (15° C to 30° C). The humidity must be
regulated at 45 to 80% relative humidity (non-condensing). The optimum is a relative humidity of 55%. The table below
indicates the heat dissipation of some components of the Meridian system.

Component Heat output (BTU/hour)

Gantry including acquisition computer 4800 maximum
Processing station system unit 1000
Processing station monitor, keyboard, mouse 1000
Codonics color printer (optional) 1360
IVY ECG gate (optional) 900

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-18

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.2.6 MERIDIAN RACEWAY LAYOUT AND DIAGRAM
Meridian Gantry

Meridian Acquisition
Station

14’ (4.5m) cables in nylon

sleeve, must be protected in
Rubber Cable Protector
Processing Station

Codonics (optional).
16’ (5 m) Twisted pair Ethernet to Network cable provided with the
hospital network Codonics printer

NOTE
Network Hub An optional crossover cable may be used in place of the network
hub. However, no other network devices would be accessible if the
crossover cable is used. This includes the codonics printer. In most
cases, either a network hub or an existing hospital hub will be used.

16’ (5m) Twisted pair Ethernet to

hospital network

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-19

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.2.7 MERIDIAN FLOOR LEVELNESS
The floor occupied by the Meridian system must be in level within ½ inch (12.5 mm).
12" (30 cm) Not to Scale

8" (20 cm)

8' 7" (260 cm)

16' or 14' (490 or 430 cm)

Existing floor

1/2" (12.7 mm)

Allowable tolerance

Floor grade (levelness) within

occupied area

Figure 9.6. Floor levelness requirement

The floor levelness of an examination room shall not exceed 1/2” (13 mm) when measured between any two peripheral
points within the shaded area.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-20

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.3 INSTALLATION
This section describes the steps to install the Meridian nuclear gamma camera system. It is important that you understand
the wide scope of this installation procedure before attempting to install a Meridian system.

NOTE
Seismic (OSHPD) installation requires the optional Seismic Installation Kit.

The Meridian system is shipped in four boxes. Refer to section 9.2.1 Shipping Containers and Weights on page 9-13 for
details on the contents of each box.

The processing station and other accessories provided by Philips Medical Systems are shipped separately.

9.3.1 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW

This section provides a short form installation instruction, intended for the experienced service engineer who has
performed Meridian system installation before.

NOTE
Before starting the installation, make sure to study the document “Meridian Camera
Site Planning”.

Installation involves the following main steps:

1. Open the boxes and remove packing materials. Leave the detector insulation in place.
2. Remove the wooden end bars from the gantry pallet.
3. After allowing the detector temperature to stabilize, remove the detector insulation.
4. Remove the dolly beam from the gantry rear side. Configure the system for the required mains voltage, connect the
hand controller and power up the gantry.
5. Raise the detector and remove the collimator cart. Remount the rear dolly beam.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-21

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
6. Remove the gantry shipping pallet using the jack beams. Place the dolly under the gantry and lower the gantry onto
the dolly by adjusting the jack screws.
7. If required in order to move the gantry to the installation room, remove the jack beams. Power up the gantry and use
the hand controller to tilt the detector to 90°.
8. Determine actual position of system using the template shipped with the equipment, and tape template to floor.
9. Drill holes using the template. Insert the expansion anchors and set the anchors using a mandrel.
10. Using the dolly, transport the gantry to the installation room. Position the gantry. Mount the jack beams (if removed),
jack up and remove the dolly.
11. Lower the gantry taking care that the holes in the gantry base align with the anchors.
12. Secure the gantry to the floor using the front and rear anchoring brackets.
13. If installing the cardiology version of the Meridian (short patient table), remove the table end stop screw from the side
of the table rail. Install the table rail from the rear of the gantry. Tighten mounting nuts.
14. Connect table limits, table motor and table encoder cable to the safety board.
15. On the short patient table, remount the end stop screw into the table rail.
16. Mount the rear end table console on the table rail.
17. Position the table top through the gantry opening. Fix the table top to the rear console.
18. Mount the front end table console. Fix the table top to the front console.
19. Tighten all table bolts.
20. When installing the standard version of the Meridian (long patient table), position the floor rail. Ensure that it level,
shimming either end as required. Fasten using Philips screws.
21. Level the gantry using the shims provided.
22. Screw anchoring bolts through the holes in the gantry base into the anchors in the floor.
23. Assemble the PC cart. Assemble the acquisition PC and place it on the PC cart. Connect the PC cable to the gantry.
24. Mount power cable clamps on the PC’s rear panel, on the PC monitor and on the power distribution panel. Strap the
power distribution panel to one leg of the PC cart.
25. Install cable protection on the floor of the installation room, as required.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-22

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
26. Power up the gantry and acquisition PC.
27. Perform acquisition PC software setup:
Configure the length of the patient table and the patient load position
Set up the name and ID of the institution (hospital/clinic)
Configure regional settings
Configure the LAN
Configure the connection to the processing station
Configure DICOM on the acquisition PC and on the processing station
Set up DICOM worklist on the acquisition PC.
28. Perform final system calibration:
PMT update tune
Daily QC uniformity calibration
Uniformity correction for isotopes different from Tc99m
Center of rotation calibration.
29. Test system performance:
Center of rotation (COR) analysis
Flood uniformity test
SPECT performance test.
30. Unpack spare collimators.
31. Fill in the installation verification form.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-23

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.3.2 TOOLS

9.3.2.1 Tools Shipped With System

• Gantry dolly
• ½” ratchet (1)
• Gantry and table shims
• 4 plastic protection feet
• 2 pcs. tool for dolly.

9.3.2.2 Tools Not Shipped With System

• Standard FSE tool kit including:
- Metric Allen keys, 1.5 through 10 mm
- 2’ crowbar
- Pallet jack
- 3/8" drill with Philips heads bit (used for disassembly of the shipping containers)
- Philips screwdriver
- 3 mm standard screwdriver
- Wrenches 2 pieces 11/16”, one ¾”, one 10 mm
- Impact drill
- Tape measure
- Hammer
- Extension cord
- Utility razor
- Safety glasses
- 2 metric impact bits (5 mm and 15 mm impact bits)
Alternatively, “Hilti bits” of the same dimension can also be used. Hilti bits are available through the Philips
Cleveland Parts Organization under P/N 00205300 (5 mm) and P/N 00205366 (15 mm)
- Spirit level with tolerance +/- 0.05°.
• Optional:
- De Luxe Data Spectrum phantom.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-24

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.3.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NOTE
Check the packing list, and make sure that all parts are present.

9.3.3.1 Unpacking
Move the crates as close to the installation place as the access permits, still having workspace to unload around it.

If corridors have a 90° corner, the width must be at least 67 ” (170 cm) Required work space for unpacking and unloading:
102” x 150” (260 x 380 cm)

Figure 9.7. Minimum corridor width and workspace

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-25

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Unpacking the Box Containing Accessories, Dolly, Acquisition PC etc.
It is most practical to start by unpacking this box as it contains the tools needed for the installation, e.g. the dolly used for
transporting the gantry to the installation room.

Procedure Details

1. Remove the screws (marked with red)

holding the lid of the box. Remove the
lid.
Accessory box
2. Remove the screws holding the sides
of the box to the pallet. Lift off the sides
of the box.
Dolly front
3. Remove the aluminum bag protecting
the contents.
4. Get out the accessory box and the two
parts of the dolly.

5. Open the accessory box to locate the

tools you will need for the installation.
6. Assemble the dolly using the screws
already mounted.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-26

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Unpacking the Gantry

Procedure Details

The gantry is shipped in a wooden crate

(61” x 47,2” x 63” / 155 x 120 x 160 cm),
weight 1104 kg.
1. To remove the plywood sides and top
of the box, unscrew the screws
indicated by red markings.
2. Remove the top and sides of the box.

3. Remove the protection bag by carefully

cutting around the edges.

NOTE
Leave the detector insulation in place at this point.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-27

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

4. Remove the four small wooden plates

at the corners of the pallet. Each plate
is held in place by six screws, which
much be removed.
5. Remove the two wooden bars on the
sides of the pallet.

6. On the side of the detector, strapped to

the leg of the collimator cart, you find a
cardboard tube containing the
installation template. Remove this tube.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-28

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 CAUTION
You must never remove the thermal protection from the detector before the detector has
been in a controlled environment and has reached room temperature. In instances
where the equipment is being relocated from one temperature to an environment where
the temperature is very much different, it is suggested to allow the temperature of the
detector to stabilize for a period of 24 hours with the thermal protection on the detector.
The accepted rate of temperature change should be less than 15° F (8° C) per hour. Do
not locally heat or cool the detector so as to produce gradients greater than 5° F (3° C)
across the detector face. Failure to comply may result in detector crystal breakage.

Procedure Details

7. Remove the insulation from the

detector.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-29

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

The collimator cart is packed below the

detector.
8. Remove the collimator cart
maneuvering handle from where it is
strapped to the leg of the collimator
cart.
9. Unpack the handle. Remove the 2
screws mounted at either end of the
handle.

10. Mount the handle on the collimator cart

by fastening the two screws from the
inside of the cart.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-30

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

11. Use a 10 mm Allen key to remove the

dolly beam from the rear side of the
gantry.

To remove the collimator cart, it is

necessary to raise the detector. In order to
accomplish this, the gantry must be
powered up and the hand controller
connected. Refer to section 9.3.3.10 Mains
Handset
Voltage Configuration on page 9-67 for connector
instructions on connecting power to the
gantry.
Mains power
12. Make sure that the gantry Power connector
Supply is configured for the Mains
voltage applied. Connect the power
cord to the mains inlet at the gantry
rear panel.
13. Connect the hand controller (packed in
the accessory box) to the connector
labeled Handset.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-31

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

14. On the hand controller, press

and simultaneously to raise the

detector.
15. Carefully pull the collimator cart out
from under the detector and remove it
from the pallet.

At a later stage of the installation, it may

become necessary to tilt the detector to
90° (see page 9-44).
16. If you can see that it will be necessary
to tilt the detector, do so already now to
avoid having to reapply power to the
gantry.

17. Power off the gantry, unplug the mains

cable and the handset.
18. Remount the dolly beam on the rear
side of the gantry.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-32

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

To get the gantry off the pallet on which it

was shipped, the gantry is raised by
means of 4 jack screws, mounted on the
dolly beams attached to the gantry – see
photo on the right.
19. Remove the jack screws from where
they are strapped to the dolly beam
and unpack them.
20. Place a small amount of light grease in
each of the plastic feet packed with the
jack screws. This will reduce the
amount of friction.
21. Mount a jack screw into each end of
both dolly beams, placing a plastic foot
under each jack screw.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-33

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

22. Remove the 8 screws holding the

gantry to pallet.

Screws holding the

gantry to the pallet

23. Use the ½” ratchet (located in the

accessory box) to raise the gantry from
the pallet by turning all four jack screws
max. 4 turns at a time in sequence.
24. Repeat the sequence until the gantry is
clear of the pallet.
25. Now slide the pallet out from under the
gantry.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-34

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 WARNING
When the gantry is raised on the jack screws, its stability is rather limited. Use extra
caution when attempting to remove the pallet and positioning the dolly under the
gantry. Do not apply a sideways thrust.

Placing the Gantry on the Dolly Cart

Procedure Details

1. Turn the jack screws as required to

obtain enough clearance.
2. Roll the dolly under the gantry as
shown.
3. Turn the jack screws to lower the
gantry until it rests on the dolly.

4. Secure the dolly assembly to the gantry

using 4 M12x25 button head cap
screws (located in the accessory box)
and an 8 mm Allen key.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-35

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Unpacking the Table

Procedure Details

1. Remove the top and sides from the

box.
2. Remove the protective bag.
3. Cut the nylon straps holding the patient
table mattress.
Take out the mattress.

4. Remove the screws holding the table

top to the wooden brackets used to
pack the table parts.
Take out the table top.

5. Remove the screws holding the

wooden brackets (two screws in each
bracket).
Remove the wooden brackets.
6. Remove the screws fastening the
straps to the table rail.
The table rail can now be removed.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-36

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Unpacking the Table Consoles

Procedure Details

1. Remove the top and sides of the box.

2. Remove the screws indicated in red.

3. Cut the nylon straps.
4. The table consoles can now be
removed.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-37

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.3.3.2 Determining the Actual Position for the System

NOTE
Use the template shipped with the system to determine the actual position of the
system.

The template (Figure 9.8) shipped with the system provides information on:
• The minimum distance to the walls
• The minimum room size for installing the standard Meridian system (long table)
• The minimum room size for installing the cardiology version (short table)
• The preferred position of the holes for anchors.

Alternative hole positions are provided in case rebars or tensioning cables in the floor obstruct drilling.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-38

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Figure 9.8. Installation template

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-39

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.3.3.3 Installing Gantry Anchors
Non-seismic locations only require that the gantry be anchored in four locations. The purpose of the anchoring is to
prevent the gantry from shifting during daily use on a slippery floor. The normal positions of the anchors are two in the
base of the gantry casting and two at the front of the protruding gantry feet. If rebars or tensioning cables in the floor
obstruct drilling, alternative holes are provided in the front anchor brackets. The rear anchors can alternatively be bolted to
optional brackets on the back.

Figure 9.9 reflects the gantry anchor locations. The sequence for choosing the anchor holes should be as follows:
• 1st choice locations: 1 & 2 for the back anchors and 10 & 8 or 9 & 7 for the front side anchors.
• 2nd choice locations: 5 & 3 or 6 & 4 for the back anchors and 10 & 8 or 9 & 7 for the front side anchors.
• 3rd choice locations: 12 & 14 or 11 & 13 for the back anchors and 10 & 8 or 9 & 7 for the front side anchors.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-40

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Anchor #9 Anchor #7

Anchor #10 Anchor #8

Anchor #11 Anchor #13

Anchor #12 Anchor #14

Anchor #2 Anchor #1
Anchor #5 Anchor #3
Anchor #6 Anchor #4

Note
All dimensions in mm unless
otherwise noted

Figure 9.9. Gantry anchor locations

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-41

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

1. Using the installation template and a

plan of the room layout, determine the
minimum distance to the walls.

2. Position the template.

3. Secure the template to the floor using
adhesive tape.

4. Through the template, drill 4 holes, 2

¼” (55 mm) deep, as determined on
page 9-40. Use the 15 mm masonry
drill provided.
You can use a hammer drill to drill a
pilot hole.
5. Remove the template and clean the
holes.
6. Use a mandrel to set the anchors.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-42

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 NOTE
If rebars or tensioning cables in the floor obstruct drilling, use the alternative holes
provided.

9.3.3.4 Moving the Gantry to the Installation Room

NOTE
The gantry on the dolly with the dolly beams mounted can pass through 99 cm (39”)
doorways. A 90 cm (36”) doorway can be passed if the dolly beams are removed and
when the detector is tilted out to 90°.

NOTE
If the gantry must pass through a corridor with a 90° corner, the corridor must be at
least 69” (175 cm) wide.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-43

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

1. Once the gantry is secured to the dolly,

raise the jack screws about 2” above
the floor level to ensure sufficient
clearance when moving the gantry to
its final destination.

If it is necessary to tilt the detector, the

gantry must be powered up and the
Handset connected. Before this can be
done, the rear dolly beam must be
removed. See page 9-31.
2. Make sure that the gantry power supply
is configured for the mains voltage
applied. Refer to section 9.3.3.10
Mains Voltage Configuration on page
9-67 for further details on connecting
power to the gantry.

Configured for 39” doorways Configured for 36” doorways

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-44

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Figure 9.10. Passage clearance for gantry

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-45

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 NOTE
If you are installing the Meridian system in a room offering limited space, refer to
section 9.3.3.6 Installing the Table Rail on page 9-49 before proceeding.

Procedure Details

3. Roll the gantry in position over the

anchors. Make sure that the anchors
are exactly under the designated holes.
4. Remount the dolly beams if you have
had to remove these during relocation
of the gantry.
5. Place the plastic feet under the jack
screws.
6. Remove the four bolts securing the
gantry to the dolly.
7. Raise the gantry by turning the jack
screws sufficiently and pull out the dolly
from under the gantry.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-46

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

8. Lower the gantry all the way to the floor

by turning the jack screws. Keep
checking that the dedicated holes are
aligned with the anchors. This will Aligning holes in
ensure that the gantry is not in an gantry base with
unbalanced state where it is likely to anchor holes
fall.
9. When the gantry is standing firmly on
the floor, remove both dolly beams.

NOTE
Do not attempt to push the gantry over the anchor holes. If pushed, the gantry is likely
to damage the floor. If the gantry is not correctly positioned over the anchor holes, the
gantry may be nudged in order to position it precisely. Be sure to check the condition of
the flooring so as to ensure that it is not damaged.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-47

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.3.3.5 Securing the Gantry to the Floor

Procedure Details

1. Mount the front anchoring brackets on

the gantry feet using 2 pcs. M12x20
bolts located in the accessory box.

2. If you are using 2nd choice locations for

anchoring the gantry (see page 9-40),
mount the rear anchoring brackets
using 2 pcs. M12x20 bolts.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-48

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 NOTE
Do not use all four anchor holes. Using all four holes may compromise the concrete
flooring resulting in a poorly secured anchor.

9.3.3.6 Installing the Table Rail

Actions to be Taken if Gantry is to be Installed in Limited Space

When the gantry on its dolly is in the final destination room, and before the dolly cart is removed, it must be determined
whether there is enough room for the table rail at its full length on the rear of the gantry.

In order to install the table rail, there must be room enough for the table rail between the rear of the gantry and the wall.
The minimum distance to the wall behind the gantry is 260 cm (102”) for the long table and 230 cm (90”) for the short
table. If there is less distance to the wall when the gantry is in its final position, the table rail must be installed while the
gantry is still on the dolly, without the jack beams mounted.

1. Position the gantry on its dolly in a position where the table rail can be installed from the gantry rear. Refer to the
procedure on the following pages.
2. When the table rail is installed, move the dolly with the gantry and table rail to the final position in the room.
3. Move the table rail all the way through to the front of the gantry before mounting the jack beams. When mounting the
jack beam on the front side of the gantry, first screw the enclosed tools for dolly onto the gantry feet. Then mount the
front jack beam using the holes in the top of the tool. See Figure 9.11 on page 9-50.
4. Lower the gantry to the floor as described in section 9.3.3.4 Moving the Gantry to the Installation Room (page 9-43).

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-49

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Tool for dolly

Figure 9.11. Tools for dolly mounted on gantry feet

NOTE
The table rail is heavy. It requires 2 persons to move it around.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-50

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 WARNING
The table rail is shipped with a protection plate mounted between the rail and the
flange of the table drive.
Do not remove this protection plate before the drive is mounted on to the gantry base.

Procedure Details

1. When installing the short Meridian

patient table (cardiology version),
remove the end stop screw on the side
of the table rail before proceeding.
The location of the screw is indicated
by a yellow label.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-51

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

2. Slide the table rail into the base of the

gantry from the gantry rear. Make sure
to slide in the correct end first as
indicated by the arrows.
3. Align the table drive cable with the slot
in the gantry base. Table drive flange
4. Loosen the two mounting nuts from the
table drive flange and fit the flange into
its slot in the gantry base. Protection plate

5. Use a 10 mm wrench to re-tighten the

nuts fixing the table drive to gantry.
6. Remove the protection plate.
Mounting nut

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-52

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 NOTE
Use caution when installing the table rail to ensure that cables are not damaged or
pinched.

Procedure Details

7. Connect the three cables to the safety

board as shown in the photo on the
right:
• Table limits cable to connector G20
• Table motor cable to connector G9
Table limits G20
• Table encoder cable to connector
G11.

Table motor G9

Table encoder G11

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-53

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

8. When installing the short patient table

(cardiology version of the Meridian),
remount the end stop screw as shown.

NOTE
The table end stop screw must be mounted only when installing the short patient table.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-54

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.3.3.7 Assembling the Table

Procedure Details

1. Identify the table end console that has

a groove in the middle of its roller.
2. Mount the rear end console onto the
table rail pointing out of the gantry rear
end using 6 pcs. M12x55 bolts.

NOTE
Do not tighten the six M12 bolts at this time.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-55

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

3. Place the table top through the gantry

opening with the narrow part (the
pediatric cutout) towards the rear of the
gantry.

4. Fix the table top to the console using

16 low-headed screws (in the
accessory box). Do not tighten the
screws fully.
5. Mount the front end console onto the
Rail.

NOTE
Do not tighten the bolts at this end either.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-56

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

6. Fix the table top to the front console

with the remaining 16 low-headed
screws.
7. Now tighten all bolts securing the
patient table top and the bolts securing
the table consoles.
The reason for doing the bolt tightening in
this manner is to pre-stress the table rail
by means of the patient table top.
The table rail is designed to travel linearly
so that the patient table console rollers do
not touch the floor.

NOTE
When tightening the bolts of the rear console, the table must be moved fully forwards in
order to ensure that the table is aligned with the support rollers in the gantry opening.
Similarly, when tightening the front console, the table must be moved fully backwards to
ensure alignment with the support rollers.

NOTE
Tightening the bolts at the console ends first makes it extremely difficult to install and
secure the patient table bolts.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-57

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.3.3.8 Mounting the Floor Rail

NOTE
The floor rail is only required for installations with a long patient table (standard version
of the Meridian)

NOTE
This section describes procedures requiring the patient table to be moved. Even
though the table can be pushed manually, it is probably easier to power up the gantry
and use the hand controller to initiate motions. Refer to the section Motion Calibration
in Chapter 4 of this manual.

Procedure Details

1. Move the table in to the position where

the inside of the front console (the
console located on the detector side of
the gantry) is flush with the ends of the
gantry feet.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-58

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

2. Place the floor rail on the floor at the

rear console (the console with the
grooved roller) and slide its end ½” in
under the roller, the ridge aligned with
the groove.
3. Place the long dolly beam on the floor
next to the table rail and in close
proximity to it.
4. With a ruler, align the free end of the
floor rail so it is parallel with the dolly
beam.
5. On the floor, mark the six mounting
holes of the rail.

6. Move the table away from the floor rail

to provide a working area.
7. Keep the floor rail over the screw
marks and check that it is level.
Shim either end if required.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-59

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

8. Drill a 6 mm hole at each of the six

screw marks and insert the provided
plugs in the holes.
9. Fasten the floor rail with the Philips
screws provided.

9.3.3.9 Leveling the Gantry

Move the table slowly in the direction of the floor rail. As the grooved roller enters the floor rail, check that the table end is
not lifted by more than 1 mm and that the gap between the roller and the floor rail does not exceed 1.5 mm.

If these restrictions are not met, shims must be placed under the gantry base, either in each side, directly in front of the
two anchoring bolts or under the front end of the gantry feet. In this way, the gantry can be tilted in the desired direction.

The installation kit includes 1 mm and 2 mm thick shims. A 1 mm shim equals 2.2 mm at the table end.

When attempting to level the gantry, it is important to realize that the gantry is being leveled with respect to the floor rail.
The underside of the patient table must be level and driven along the same horizontal plane as the rail in order for the
patient table to travel smoothly and unhindered through its entire travel path. Refer to figures below.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-60

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 NOTE
When too many shims are placed
under the front side of the gantry, it
causes the gantry to drive into the
back rail as opposed to being driven
Level Back Rail along the same plane. There will also
be far too much clearance under the
front side of the rail when the patient
table is driven out of the gantry.

Excessive shims placed under

Patient Table Rail is not level. The
the front side of the gantry
patient table cannot be driven any
further because it is being driven
into the rail

NOTE
When too many shims are placed
under the back side of the gantry, it
Level Back Rail causes the gantry to drive above the
back rail as opposed to being driven
on the same plane. This will also
create too little clearance under the
front side of the rail when the patient
table is driven out of the gantry.

Patient Table Rail is not level. When the

patient table is being driven, the end of the
patient table is not secured by the guide Excessive shims placed under
strip on the rail the back side of the gantry

Figure 9.12. Incorrect methods of shimming

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-61

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 NOTE
The correct amount of shims under
the front and back side of the gantry
allows the gantry to easily drive onto
the back rail without any interference.
Level Back Rail Assuming that the front table rail will
also have adequate clearance, this
ensures that nothing is easily caught
under the rail.

The Patient Table Rail is level. The The correct amount of shims placed
patient table can easily be driven under the front and back sides of the
further onto the back rail without any gantry
interference

Figure 9.13. Correct method of shimming

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-62

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

1. Use a crowbar as shown to lift the

gantry while placing the shims at the
rear. It is suggested to place a shim
under the crowbar so as to ensure that
the flooring is not damaged.

2. Use a crowbar under the table rail as

shown to lift the front of the gantry
while placing the shims.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-63

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

3. When the rear end of the table is within

limits, move the table all the way out to
the front side of the gantry. The roller
on the front table console should be
free of the floor all the way or just
touching the floor.
4. If this is not the case, place additional
shims in such a way that the
restrictions on the floor rail are not
compromised.
5. When the gantry is leveled, screw the
anchoring bolts through the holes in the
gantry base and/or the anchor
brackets, into the anchors in the floor.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-64

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

When using 1st choice anchoring locations

(see page 9-40), i.e. mounting anchoring
bolts through the holes in the gantry base:
6. Remove the lower rear cover from the
gantry.
7. Remove the cover plate from the right-
hand side of the gantry rear to get to
the anchoring hole. See the photo on
the right. Anchoring
hole

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-65

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

8. Also remove the cover plate from the

left-hand side of the gantry rear to get
to the anchoring hole in this side. See
photo on the right.

Anchoring
hole

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-66

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.3.3.10 Mains Voltage Configuration

Procedure Details

1. Remove the lower gantry back cover.

2. Remove the rectangular plate on the
AC power supply.
3. Place the plug in the socket with the
closest match to the actually measured
mains voltage (see table on following
page).
4. Verify that both fuses match the rating
at the chosen socket. Leave the
differently rated fuses in the plastic bag MAINS VOLTAGE
in the bottom of the voltage selector SETTING

compartment. 100V 120V 200V 220V 240V FUSE RATING

5. If configuring power for the final ( both fuses )
12A 12A 6.25A 6.25A 6.25A
installation, the remaining fuses should
be discarded. This ensures that they
are not mistakenly used as I
FUSE

replacement fuses as they will have the 0 FUSE

wrong value for the power setting.
6. Remount the rectangular cover plate.

NOTE
The power cord provided is an un-terminated cord. The mains wiring is approved to be
supplied either with a plug into a wall outlet or hardwired to the installation.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-67

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Nominal mains voltage Setting
90 – 107 V AC 100 V
108 – 132 V AC 120 V
180 – 208 V AC 200 V
209 – 228 V AC 220 V
229 – 264 V AC 240 V

9.3.3.11 Alternative Position of Rear Connector Panel

The gantry is shipped from the manufacturer with the rear panel located in the same side of the gantry as the mains inlet
connector. Depending on the actual installation, it may be convenient to run the hand controller cable and the PC interface
cable from the other side. In that case, the rear panel should be moved to the other side, immediately behind the roll/table
motion controller. Swap the connector panel with the blind panel and strap up the internal cables so they do not interfere
with moving parts or the back cover.

9.3.3.12 Alternative Routing of Mains Cable and Network Cable

It is often convenient to have the mains cable and/or the network cable exit the gantry opposite the connector side. For
that purpose, cut-outs are provided in the lower back cover.

With the lower back cover off, run the cable(s) over the table rail tunnel as shown on the left in Figure 9.14 below.

When remounting the back cover, make sure the cable(s) is/are located in the cut-outs in the back cover (Figure 9.14,
right-hand photo).

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-68

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Figure 9.14. Alternative mains and network cable routing

9.3.3.13 Location of Hand Controller

The holder for the hand controller must be placed at the same side of the gantry back cover as the rear panel.

The alternative mounting hole should be covered using the stainless steel washer and screw. See Figure 9.15.

Figure 9.15. Location of handset holder

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-69

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.3.3.14 Assembly of PC Cart
To assemble the cart for the acquisition PC, follow the instructions provided with the cart.

9.3.3.15 Assembly of Acquisition PC Station

To unpack and interconnect the PC, monitor, keyboard and mouse, follow the instructions provided with the PC.

9.3.3.16 Connecting External Cables

Connect the gantry-PC interface cable as shown. Make sure that all strain is transferred via the PC power cable strain
relief only. The end of the FireWire cable should be slightly longer to avoid strain on its connector.

GANTRY REAR
PANEL
EKG
TRIGGER

IEEE1394

GANTRY-PC INTERFACE
PC
CABLE, 9CBL0793 FUSE
POWER RESET
ACQ PC POWER OK
115V AC/4A
50/60 Hz

ETHERNET
CONNECTOR

Figure 9.16. Gantry – PC cabling

• The PC end of the gantry-PC interface cable is strapped to the PC table structure.
• The AC cable plugs into the IEC QuadBox.
• The FireWire cable plugs into one of the FireWire socket on the PC’s rear panel.
• The EtherNet cable plugs into the RJ45 socket on the PC’s rear panel.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-70

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
• Connect the hand controller to the connector labeled Handset.

9.3.3.17 Mounting Protective Clamps

Procedure Details

Power cable clamp on PC backside

1. Remove the screw on the right-hand
side of the plug. Use the same screw to
mount the PC box clamp.

Power cable clamp on monitor

backside
1. Use two Ø3.3 x 9,5 screws to mount
the plug and the bracket PC Monitor
clamp (low).

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-71

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

Power cable clamp gantry backside

1. Use two M3 x 6 screws to mount the
plug and the bracket PC cart power
clamp (high).
The photo on the right shows the result
without the connector inserted.

Power Cable Clamp on power

distribution panel
1. Place the plugs in the quad four way
IEC. Do not place a plug in the middle Quad four way Power cable
hole. Slide on the PC clamp from one IEC clamp
end.
2. Mount the M4x 45 screw from the side.
3. Tie-wrap the assembly to one leg of the
PC cart.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-72

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.3.3.18 Protecting Cables on the Floor

Procedure Details

1. 3 m (10 feet) of rubber cable protectors

are provided to cover cables running
from the gantry to the wall (power and
network cables) and the cable between
gantry and PC. The cable protectors
should be applied where traffic across
the cables must be expected.
Cut the cable protectors to the desired
lengths.
On the base of the protector a
membrane is easily opened to slide in
the cables.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-73

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

2. In the case where an insulator is

required to separate the power line Slice or cut this column within
from a network cable, one of the the rubber cable protector to
columns within the rubber cable separate the power line from the
network cable
protector can be sliced to place one of
the two cables within the separate
compartment.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-74

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Meridian Acquisition
Computer and Cart
14’ (4.5 m) cables
in nylon sleeve

Meridian Gantry

16’ (5 m) Twisted Pair Ethernet

to hospital network

Processing station

NETWORK HUB

16’ (5 m) Twisted Pair 6’ (2 m) network cable

Ethernet to hospital network

NOTE:
An optional crossover cable may be used in Codonics (optional)
place of the network hub. However, no other Network cable provided
network devices would be accessible if the with the Codonics printer
crossover cable is used. This includes the
Codonics printer. In most cases, either a
network hub or an existing hospital hub will be
used.

Figure 9.17. Meridian interconnections

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-75

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.3.4 SOFTWARE SETUP

9.3.4.1 Local Area Network Setup

This section explains how to set up DICOM. The actions needed may jeopardize the Windows 2000 network operation.
Extreme caution must be taken when modifying the network configuration.

You should contact the institution’s systems administrator for setup parameters for the local area network. The following
information must be provided by the systems or network administrator:
• An IP address for the Meridian
• A network node name for the Meridian
• The gateway IP address (if the connection between the processing station (Odyssey/Pegasys) and Meridian
acquisition PC is routed through a Gateway or Router).

Procedure Details

1. To perform network setup, open the

Control Panel.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-76

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

2. Double-click the network configuration

icon.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-77

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

The dialogs shown on the right appear.

3. Right-click on Local Area Connection.
4. In the next dialog box, click Properties.
In the next dialog, select Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) and click
Properties.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-78

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

5. Select the radio button Use the

following IP address and enter the IP
address for the Meridian system, the
Subnet mask and the Default gateway.
Click OK.
6. Click OK and reboot the Acquisition
PC.

NOTE
When connecting the Acquisition PC to the site network, IP addresses, subnet mask
and default gateway must be provided by the institution’s network administrator.

Further information about network setup is available in the Windows 2000 Help system.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-79

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.3.4.2 Setup of Processing Station IP Addresses

This section explains how to set up IP addresses for the Odyssey and Pegasys processing station used with the Meridian
system. To accomplish this, you need to edit a file named Hosts on the acquisition PC’s hard disk:

Procedure Details

1. The Hosts file (the file does not have

an extension) can be edited using the
Windows Notepad utility. To access
Notepad, click the Windows Start
button. Select Programs, Accessories
and Notepad.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-80

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

2. In the Notepad program, select Open

from the File menu.
The Open window appears.
3. In the Look in box, click the drive and
folder that contains the file that is to be
edited. In this case, the Hosts file is
located in the path
C:\WINNT\System32\Drivers\etc.
4. In the File of type box, select All Files.
A listing of all the files contained in
C:\WINNT\System32\Drivers\etc should
now appear.
Select the Hosts file and click Open.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-81

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

5. The Hosts file should contain # Copyright (c) 1993-1995 Microsoft Corp.
#
information similar to the window
# This is a sample HOSTS file used by Microsoft TCP/IP for Windows NT.
shown to the right. #
# This file contains the mappings of IP addresses to host names. Each
# entry should be kept on an individual line. The IP address should
# be placed in the first column followed by the corresponding host name.
# The IP address and the host name should be separated by at least one
# space.
#
# Additionally, comments (such as these) may be inserted on individual
# lines or following the machine name denoted by a '#' symbol.
#
# For example:
#
# 102.54.94.97 rhino.acme.com # source server
# 38.25.63.10 x.acme.com # x client host

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-82

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

6. At the bottom of the Host file, add an

entry for the Odyssey or Pegasys
workstation. In the example shown to
the right, the IP address for the
processing station is 192.168.10.143
and the node name is ‘odyssey’. Do not
enter a ‘#’ as the first character on the
line.
7. When you have finished editing the file,
select Save from the File menu to save
the changes to the file.
8. Select File, Exit to close the Notepad
program.

NOTE
It is important that the IP address is valid and does not conflict with any other IP
address in the network.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-83

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.3.4.3 Meridian Application DICOM Configuration

Procedure Details

1. Start the Meridian application. Click the

Tools button shown on the right.
Tools
2. In the Calibration & Configuration button
menu, click Service.
When prompted, enter the access code
(currently, the code is ‘DDD’).
3. In the Service: Calibrations menu, click
Node configuration.

Calibration & Configuration Menu Service Calibrations Menu

The Nodes configuration window shown

on the right appears.
4. Click the + button.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-84

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

The Add a new node window appears.

5. Select the line saying
DICOM: Connected station.
Click Select.

6. Enter the values shown in the dialog on

the right (Odyssey or Pegasys
processing station).
7. When finished editing the DICOM
settings, click Save.
8. In the Nodes configuration window,
click Exit.
The configuration is now complete.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-85

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 NOTE
To have the changes take effect, reboot the Meridian acquisition PC.

9.3.4.4 DICOM Setup on the Odyssey

Refer to the Odyssey Service Manual for details on how to configure DICOM on the Odyssey workstation. The DICOM
default configuration is:
• Port Number 104
• IP Address – unique for each site
• Node Name – Odyssey (although it can be unique for each site)
• Application Entity Title – e.g. MERIDIAN_NM_STORE.

Having configured the Odyssey, you should check DICOM transfer by exporting some of the test images located in the
patient database on the Acquisition PC. Follow the procedure given in the Meridian Operator’s manual.

9.3.4.5 DICOM Setup on the Pegasys

Refer to the Pegasys Service Manual for details on how to configure DICOM on the Pegasys workstation. The DICOM
default configuration is:
• Remote Server
• Description – Meridian
• Host name – meridian
• TCP port# – 104
• Calling AE title – adac
• Called AE title – PC
• Query cache – 0
• Host in Pegasys – yes
• Local Server
• Description – ADAC_SCP@adac
• Hostname – adac IP 192.9.200.1
• TCP port# – 104
• Called AE title – adac

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-86

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
• Admitted calling AE’s - *
• Admitted hosts - *

9.3.4.6 DICOM Worklist Setup

Procedure Details

1. In the Meridian application, click the

Tools button shown on the right.
Tools
2. In the Calibration & configuration button
menu, click Service.
When prompted, enter the access code
(currently, the code is ‘DDD’).
3. In the Service: Calibrations menu, click
Node configuration.

Calibration & Configuration Menu Service Calibrations Menu

The Nodes Configuration window shown

on the right appears.
4. Click the + button.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-87

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

The Add a new node window appears.

5. Select the line saying DICOM: Worklist
station.
Click Select.

6. In the dialog shown on the right, enter

the appropriate values for your system.
The Worklist station may be the same
as the Odyssey or Pegasys processing
station configured in section 9.3.4.3 or
it may be a different unit in the
hospital’s IT system.
7. When finished editing DICOM settings,
click Save.
8. In the Nodes Configuration window,
click Exit.
The configuration is now complete.

NOTE
To have the changes take effect, reboot the Meridian acquisition PC.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-88

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.3.5 CONFIGURATION OF PATIENT TABLE AND PATIENT LOAD POSITION

In the standard version, the Meridian system is equipped with a full-length patient table (2653 mm). The cardiology
version of Meridian has a shorter patient table (2348 mm). During installation, it is necessary to set up the Meridian
software to use the appropriate table.

Furthermore, it is necessary to specify the patient load position, according to the layout of the room where the Meridian
system is installed.

Procedure Details

1. Exit the Meridian program:

In the Meridian application’s
Persistence window, click the
5button in the top right corner of the
window.

2. In the top left corner of the Windows

desktop, double-click the My Computer
icon.

3. In the My Computer window, double-

click on the (C:) icon.
4. In the (C:) window, double-click the
Meridian icon.
5. In the C:\Meridian window, double-click
the Calibrations icon.
6. In the C:\Meridian\Calibrations window,
double-click the motions icon. The
Notepad utility will open the motions.ini
file.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-89

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

As shown in the Notepad window on the

right, the length of the patient table must
be specified for the upright imaging
position.
7. Within the [Upright] entry, locate the
two lines saying ‘TablePos=’. One of
the two lines starts with a ‘;’ indicating
that this line is disabled.
8. If required, move the ‘;’ to the
appropriate line. For example, if the
Meridian system is equipped with the
long table, the ‘;’ must be at the start of
the line ending ‘short table’ (as shown
on the right). The semicolon disables
the ‘short table’ line.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-90

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

9. Within the [PatientLoad] entry, locate

the line saying ‘RollPos=…’. Edit the
line to reflect the desired patient load
position, either ‘RollPos=90’ or
‘RollPos= -90’.
10. When you have finished editing, select
Save from the File menu to save the
changes.
11. Select File, Exit to exit the Notepad
program.
12. Exit all active windows by clicking the
button in the top right corner.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-91

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.3.6 CONFIGURATION OF REGIONAL SETTINGS

During installation, the acquisition PC must be configured to use the desired date format: either the US yy-mm-dd or the
international dd-mm-yy format.

Procedure Details

1. Start the Windows Control Panel.

2. Double-click the Regional Options icon.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-92

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

The Regional Options dialog appears.

3. Select the appropriate language from
the drop-down list box. Having
performed this step enables you select
the appropriate date format as follows:
4. Click on the Date tab.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-93

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

5. Select the desired date format from the

Short date format drop-down list.
Next, select the desired format from the
Long date format drop-down list.
6. When finished setting the Regional
information, click Apply and then OK.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-94

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.3.7 SETTING DATE AND TIME

To ensure that the date and time settings of the acquisition PC are correct, proceed as follows:

Procedure Details

1. Start the Windows Control Panel as

explained on page 9-92.

2. Double-click the Date/Time icon.

3. In the Date/Time Properties dialog,

click the Time Zone tab.
4. Select the appropriate time zone from
the drop-down list.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-95

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

5. Click the Date & Time tab.

6. Set the date and time as required.
7. Click OK to accept and close the dialog
box.
8. Click in the upper right corner of the
Control Panel window to close the
Control Panel.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-96

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.3.8 INSTITUTION NAME SETUP

Procedure Details

1. On the acquisition PC, activate the

Persistence page by clicking the Exit
button in the lower right corner of the
Meridian application window.
2. Close the Meridian application by
clicking the button in the upper right
corner of the window.

3. Click the Windows Start button and

select Programs, Accessories, and
Notepad to start the Windows program
Notepad.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-97

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

4. Select File, Open and set the Files of

type field to All Files.
5. Select the file C:\Meridian\institution.

6. The institution file displays the

following:
InstitutionName=<name>
InstitutionAddress=<address>
InstitutionID=<ID>.
7. Edit the name, address and ID of the
institution as required.
8. Select File, Save to save the changes.
9. Click the button to exit the Notepad
program.

10. Double-click the Meridian icon on the

Windows desktop to start the meridian
application.
11. Check that the institution name,
address and ID that you entered are
displayed during start-up.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-98

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.4 FINAL SYSTEM CALIBRATION AND PERFORMANCE TESTING
Refer to Chapter 3, Getting Started, of the Meridian Operator’s Manual for information on system start-up.

Procedures for detector calibrations are given in Chapter 5, Calibrations, of this manual. Perform the following calibration
procedures:
• PMT update tune
• Daily QC Uniformity calibration
• Uniformity Correction for isotopes different from Tc99m
• Center Of Rotation calibration.

Perform the following performance tests:

• Center of Rotation (COR) Analysis
See Chapter 5, Maintenance, of the Meridian Operator’s Manual for details.
• Flood Uniformity Test
See Chapter 5, Maintenance, of the Meridian Operator’s Manual for details.
• SPECT Performance Test (optional)
See Chapter 5, Calibrations, of this manual.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-99

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.5 UNPACKING SPARE COLLIMATORS
This procedure details a safe and easy way of unpacking spare or replacement collimators for the Meridian system.

Procedure Details

1. To access the collimator cart and

collimator, use a Philips screwdriver to
remove the packing material.

2. Cut the metal straps on the collimator

shipping box and remove the lid.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-100

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

3. Remove the collimator cart. The handle

must be in the unlocked position as
shown on the photo on the right.

4. Carefully lift up the collimator, letting it

rest on its edge.
5. Check the position of each of the four
locks. The locks must be parallel to the
collimator short axis.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-101

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

6. Carefully lift the collimator out of the

shipping box.
Place it on the collimator cart with the
white collision pad facing downwards
and the collimator id board in the same
side of the cart as the locking handle.

NOTE
Collimators are heavy.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-102

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

7. Gently place the collimator on the cart.

Take care not to damage the collimator
by dropping it or hitting it against any
objects.

8. Mount the handle on the collimator

cart.
9. To mount the collimator on the
detector, follow the procedure
described in the Operator’s Manual.
Check that the collimator is properly
locked to the detector before removing
it once again.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-103

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
9.6 INSTALLATION VERIFICATION

Meridian Installation Verification

The purpose of this verification sheet is to document that the information for the installation of the Meridian system has been
available and has been used during the installation of the equipment. This is a requirement to comply with the Medical Device
Directive.
After installation please return this verification sheet to the manufacturer (see below).
Manufacturer: Danish Diagnostic Development
Dr. Neergaards Vej 5F,
DK-2970 Horsholm.
DENMARK
Product distributor: Philips Medical Systems
Product: Meridian, 9SYS0650
Product serial numbers:

Installation date:

I, the responsible service person, hereby declare that the Meridian system mentioned above has been installed according to DDD
installation instructions given in the Meridian Service Manual in Section 9, Installation.
Responsible service person:

Date:

Signature:

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 9-104

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
10 SPARE PARTS
CONTENTS
10.1 Spare Parts Listing .................................................................................................................................................. 10-2
10.1.1 Detector ...................................................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.1.2 Collimators .................................................................................................................................................. 10-3
10.1.3 Gantry ......................................................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.1.4 Acquisition PC ............................................................................................................................................ 10-7
10.1.5 Accessories ................................................................................................................................................ 10-7
10.1.6 Service Tools and Spares for Service Tools ............................................................................................... 10-8
10.2 Location of Spare Parts ......................................................................................................................................... 10-10
10.2.1 Detector .................................................................................................................................................... 10-10
10.2.2 Collimators ................................................................................................................................................ 10-12
10.2.3 Collimator Cart .......................................................................................................................................... 10-13
10.2.4 Detector Bracket ....................................................................................................................................... 10-14
10.2.5 Gantry ....................................................................................................................................................... 10-14
10.2.6 Acquisition PC .......................................................................................................................................... 10-18
10.2.7 Accessories .............................................................................................................................................. 10-19
10.3 Service Tools ......................................................................................................................................................... 10-20
10.3.1 Motion Controller S/W Load Cable (9CBL0818) ....................................................................................... 10-20
10.3.2 NEMA Kit (9UNC0753) ............................................................................................................................. 10-21
10.3.3 Calibration Service Kit (9UNC0754) ......................................................................................................... 10-22

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-1

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
10.1 SPARE PARTS LISTING

10.1.1 DETECTOR
P/N DESCRIPTION QTY PER SYSTEM
2FAN1309-A FAN FOR EDC BOARD 1
2HDL0327-A DETECTOR HANDLES – RUBBER HANDLE 4
2SCR0056-A SCREWS FOR EDC BOARD CAGE 6
2SCR0749-A ALLEN SCREWS FOR DETECTOR 10
BACKPLATES
2SCR1102-A DETECTOR HANDLE – SCREWS 8
2SCR1243-A DETECTOR HEAD COVER MOUNTING 4
SCREWS
2WAS1178-A DETECTOR HEAD COVER MOUNTING 4
WASHERS
4UNC1199-A M8 BOLT REWORK 2
4UNT1654-A DETECTOR HANDLES – END CLASPS 8
4UNT1659-A DETECTOR LOCK NUT 4
4UNT1732-A DETECTOR HEAD COVER 1
4UNT1755-A PMT SUPPORT PLATE 1
4UNT1760-A BACKPLATE – RIGHT 1
4UNT1761-A BACKPLATE – LEFT 1
4UNT1812-A CRYSTAL 1
4UNT1820-A GUIDE FOR DETECTOR 2
9CBL0284-A GROUNDING FOR MOUNTING PLATE 1
9CBL0657-A ANALOG SIGNAL CABLE 1
9CBL0658-A TUNE CONTROL CABLE 1
9CBL0659-A DETECTOR LV CABLE 1
9CBL0661-A EDC POWER CABLE 1

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-2

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 P/N DESCRIPTION QTY PER SYSTEM
9CBL0718-A EXTERNAL HV CABLE 2
9CBL0781-A CRYSTAL HV CABLE 1
9CBL0820-A COLLI. JUMPER FOR DETECTOR PSU 1
9CBL1140-A COLLIMATOR IF CABLE 1
9PSU0934-A DETECTOR PSU ASSY 1
9SER0791-A PMT & LIGHT SEAL KIT 48
9STB0627-C TUNE STRIP 1
9STB0628-A PMT STRIP 8
9STB0629-B POWER STRIP 1
9STB0631-D X-E STRIP 1
9STB0632-C Y STRIP 1
9TER0561-A CANBUS TERMINATOR 1
9UNT1068-A DETECTOR HEAD 1
9UNT1114-A EDC BOARD 1

10.1.2 COLLIMATORS
P/N DESCRIPTION QTY PER SYSTEM
2LAB1181-A COLLIMATOR CART LABEL 1
2LAB1221-A ATTENTION LABEL NA
2LAB1222-A DO NOT PLACE ITEMS LABEL 1
2LAB1782-A COLLISION COVER LABEL – LEHR 2
2LAB1783-A COLLISION COVER LABEL – LEGP 2
2LAB1784-A COLLISION COVER LABEL – LEUHR 2
2LAB1785-A COLLISION COVER LABEL – MEGP 2
2LAB1786-A COLLISION COVER LABEL – HEGP 2
2LAB1787-A COLLISION COVER LABEL – LEPH 2
2LAB1788-A COLLISION COVER LABEL – HEPH 2
3COL1678-A COLLIMATOR ID BOARD 1

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-3

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 P/N DESCRIPTION QTY PER SYSTEM
4UNT1560-A PIN HOLE APERTURE SIZE 3.8 MM Optional
4UNT1561-A PIN HOLE APERTURE SIZE 4.5 MM Optional
4UNT1562-A PIN HOLE APERTURE SIZE 3.0 MM Optional
4UNT1586-A PIN HOLE APERTURE KEY Optional
4UNT1587-A PIN HOLE APERTURE ACCESSORY BOX Optional
4UNT1735-A COLLISION PAD FOR PINHOLE COLLIMATOR Optional
4UNT1770-A BEARING FIXATOR 4
4UNT1771-A SCREW CAP 4
4UNT1772-A COLLIMATOR CART SPRING FIXATOR 4
4UNT1773-A GLIDING WHEEL FIXATOR 4
4UNT1785-A COLLISION PAD FOR PARALLEL HOLE 1
COLLIMATOR
4UNT1791-A COLLIMATOR CART GROOVED CABLE 1
BLOCK
4UNT1792-A COLLIMATOR CART LOCKING PIN 1
4UNT1809-A COLLIMATOR LOCKING PIN 4
4UNT1833-A COLLIMATOR CART CABLE W. LINKAGE 1
4UNT1838-A CART HANDLE BUTTON 1
4UNT1842-A DISK FOR LOCKING 4
9SER1112-A BOX WITH PINHOLE INSERTS Optional
9UNT1050-A COLLIMATOR CART 1
9UNT1091-A LEHR COLLIMATOR 1
9UNT1094-A LEGP COLLIMATOR Optional
9UNT1096-A LEUHR COLLIMATOR Optional
9UNT1098-A MEGP COLLIMATOR Optional
9UNT1101-A HEGP COLLIMATOR Optional
9UNT1103-A LEPH COLLIMATOR Optional
9UNT1105-A HEPH COLLIMATOR Optional

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-4

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
10.1.3 GANTRY
P/N DESCRIPTION QTY PER SYSTEM
2BEL1638-A TILT BELT 1
2LAB1600-A POSITION LABELS 7
2SCR0048-A SCREW FOR GANTRY COVER 13
2SCR0256-A ALLEN SCREWS FOR PULLEYS NA
2TIE0116-A CABLE TIE WRAPS NA
2TIE1091-A TIE WRAP GRIPS NA
2WAS0097-A WASHER FOR GANTRY COVER SCREW 13
4UNT1650-A BASE PLATE FOR LEGS 1
4UNT1683-A E-STOP MOUNTING BRACKET 2
4UNT1692-A TOP + BOTTOM COVER KIT 1
4UNT1695-A FLOOR PLATE ROLLER 1
4UNT1700-A BUSHING FOR IV-POLE / T-BAR 4
4UNT1729-A RADIUS TOOTH BAR 1
4UNT1744-A TILT GEAR 1
4UNT1804-A TILT PULLEY 1
6TAB1539-A MEASURING SCALE FOR TABLE RAIL 1
9AMP0819-A ROLL/RADIUS AMPLIFIER 2
9CBL0665-A ROLL AMPLIFIER CONTROL CABLE 1
9CBL0667-A SHORT I/O CABLE 3
9CBL0669-A MC BRAKE CABLE 2
9CBL0725-A ROLL MOTOR CONTROLLER POW CBL 1
9CBL0751-B ROLL AMPLIFIER POWER CABLE 1
9CBL1046 ULT. RADIUS JUMPER 1
9CBL1054-A ROLL CABLE 1
9CBL1055-A TILT ABSOLUTE ENCODER 1
9CBL1056-A RING MOTOR COMTROLLER POW CBL 1
9CBL1057-A RADIUS AMPLIFIER CONTROL CABLE 1

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-5

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 P/N DESCRIPTION QTY PER SYSTEM
9CBL1058-A RADIUS AMPLIFIER POWER CABLE 1
9CBL1059-A AMPLIFIER CONTROL CABLE 2
9CBL1060-A RADIUS ABSOLUTE ENCODER 1
9CBL1079-A DETECTOR CABLE 1
9CBL1116-A TABLE ENCODER CABLE 1
9CBL1117-A ULTRA SHORT I/O CABLE 1
9CBL1144-A TILT CABLE 1
9CBL1146-A ROLL ABSOLUTE ENCODER 1
9CBL1148-A 24V E-STOP CABLE 1
9CBL1151-A ROLL LIMIT CABLE 1
9CBL1152-A RADIUS MOTOR CABLE 2
9CBL1157-A 180 V REGENERATOR LOAD 1
9CBL1158-A 180 V REGENERATOR INPUT CABLE 1
9CBL1160-A SAFETY BOARD POWER CABLE 1
9CBL1161-A MUSHROOM CABLE 2
9MOT1145-A TWO AXES MOTOR CONTROLER 2
9RBG1122-A RING BOARD 1
9RGB1150-A 180 V REGENERATOR CONTROL BOARD 1
9SAF1123-A SAFETY BOARD 1
9TER0562-A CAN BUS TERMINATOR MALE 1
9TLT1143-A TILT MOTOR ASSEMBLY 1
9UNF0643-A POWER SUPPLY 1
9UNT1051-A TABLE DRIVE 1
9UNT1061-A RADIUS DRIVE 1
9UNT1071-A ROLL DRIVE 1
9UNT1077-A TABLE SUPPORT 1
9WIR1078-A REAR PANEL WIRING 1

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-6

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
10.1.4 ACQUISITION PC
P/N DESCRIPTION QTY PER SYSTEM
2TAB1105-A PC CART 1
3ACQ1508-A ACQ PC MOUSE 1
3ACQ1537-B ACQ PC MONITOR 1
3ACQ1573-C ACQ PC W. WIN2000 1
3BRD1444-A IEEE 1394 FIREWIRE BOARD 1
3KBD1443-A ACQ PC KEYBOARD 1
6CBL1075-A PC/MONITOR MAINS CABLE 2
9CBL0793-A CABLE PC - GANTRY 1
9UNT1084-B CD WITH COMPLETE MERIDIAN SOFTWARE 1

10.1.5 ACCESSORIES
P/N DESCRIPTION QTY PER SYSTEM
1MAN0342-A OPERATOR’S REFERENCE GUIDE 1
1MAN0343-A TECHNICAL MANUAL 1
2LID0549-A LID FOR VIAL 2TUB0548 1
2TUB0548-A VIAL 75X10 MM 1
4CSY1542-A COR SOURCE HOLDER 1
4UNC1213-A IV POLE 1
4UNT1706-A LONG TABLE TOP
4UNT1707-A SHORT TABLE TOP
4UNT1708-A LONG TABLE MATTRESS Optional
4UNT1709-A SHORT TABLE MATTRESS Optional
6CBL1080-A ETHERNET CABLE 1
6FED1110-A 50 ML TEFLON LUBRICANT NA
9DER0411-A POWER CABLE 1
9PHA0841-A SOURCE HOLDER + TRIPOD KIT 1
9UNC0635-B HAND CONTROLLER 1

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-7

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 P/N DESCRIPTION QTY PER SYSTEM
9UNC0764-A BAR PHANTOM Optional
9UNT1083-A QC KIT 1
9UNT1113-A ARMREST Optional

10.1.6 SERVICE TOOLS AND SPARES FOR SERVICE TOOLS

P/N DESCRIPTION QTY PER SYSTEM

2BOT1132-A BOTTLE FOR RADIOACTIVITY 4
2PHR1200-A SERVICE KIT SHIPPING CASE 1
2PHR1203-A NEMA SHIPPING CASE NA
2WHL0510-A HANDWHEEL BLACK W KNURLED GRIP 2
4PHA0525-A KNURLED NUT FOR PHANTOM 2
4PHA0526-B LOCKING PIN FOR PHANTOM 2
4PHA1429-A SOURCE HOLDER TRIPOD 1
4PHR1318-A NEMA MASK NA
4PHR1319-A Y-LINE NEMA PHANTOM NA
4PHR1320-A X-LINE NEMA PHANTOM NA
4PHR1323-A FIX PLATE FOR GEOCAL 1
4PHR1325-A LINE PHANTOM 6.8 MM Y-DIR 1
4PHR1326-A LINE PHANTOM 6.8 MM X-DIR 1
4SOU1324-A POINT SOURCE HOLDER 4
4UNT1710-A GANTRY DOLLY 1
4UNT1720-A 1 MM ALIGNMENT PLATE FOR 8
INSTALLATION
4UNT1721-A 2 MM ALIGNMENT PLATE FOR 16
INSTALLATION
4UNT1766-A GANTRY BEAM 2
4UNT1860-A TABLE DRIVE PROTECTION PLATE 1
9CBL0818-A MOTION CONTROLLER RS232 CABLE 1

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-8

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 P/N DESCRIPTION QTY PER SYSTEM
9PHA0150-A SOURCE HOLDER AND TRIPOD KIT 1
9UNC0753-A NEMA KIT NA
9UNC0754-A CALIBRATION SERVICE KIT 1
9UNT1082-A QC SOURCE HOLDER 1

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-9

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
10.2 LOCATION OF SPARE PARTS
10.2.1 DETECTOR
Figure 10.1 shows the location of the parts under the detector top cover. These parts are all accessible after removal of
the detector top cover.

ANALOG SIGN. COLL. CBL

9CBL0284 9CBL1140
9CBL0657

PROT. GND
DETECTOR HV
9CBL0718
DETECTOR LV
9CBL0659
TUNE CONTROL
9CBL0658

DETECTOR

9CBL0656
CABLE
DETECTOR
POWER SUPPLY
9PSU0934
EDC POWER CABLE

COLLISION JUMPER
9CBL0661

9CBL0820

TERMINATOR FIREWIRE
9TER0561
CANBUS ECG

Figure 10.1 Parts under detector top cover

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-10

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Figure 10.2 shows the location of internal parts under the detector lead covers. Most of these parts are accessible after
the two detector lead covers have been removed. In order to replace the PMT’s, crystal and the internal collimator cable,
more disassembly of the detector is required. Please refer to Chapter 7 for repair procedures.
BELOW COVER: CRYSTAL 4UNT1812

9STB0627

9STB0632

9CBL0871
( BELOW COVER )

48 pcs
9SER0791

9STB0631

SAMPL 1-2
SAMPL 7-8

XTAL HV
DRIVE 7-8

DRIVE 5-6

SAMPL 5-6

SAMPL 3-4
+15V

- 15V

DRIVE 3-4
DRIVE 1-2
+5V
-5V

+13V
9STB0629

8 pcs PMT Strips, 9STB0628 9CBL0718

Figure 10.2. Parts location internal to the detector

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-11

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
10.2.2 COLLIMATORS
9UNT1091 is a complete LEHR collimator including Collimator ID board and the 4UNT1785 collimator collision pad.

9UNT1094 is a complete LEGP collimator including Collimator ID board and the 4UNT1785 collimator collision pad.

9UNT1096 is a complete LEUHR collimator including Collimator ID board and the 4UNT1785 collimator collision pad.

9UNT1098 is a complete MEGP collimator including Collimator ID board and the 4UNT1785 collimator collision pad.

9UNT1103 is a complete LEPH collimator including Collimator ID board, a pinhole specific collimator collision pad
(4UNT1735), interchangeable inserts (9SER1112) and collision sensor.

9UNT1105 is a complete HEPH collimator including Collimator ID board, a pinhole specific collimator collision pad
(4UNT1735), interchangeable inserts (9SER1112) and collision sensor.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-12

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
10.2.3 COLLIMATOR CART

Parallel hole
collimator

9UNT1050
Collimator Cart

Figure 10.3. Collimator cart with parallel hole collimator

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-13

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
10.2.4 DETECTOR BRACKET

TILT ABSOLUTE ENCODER

9CBL1055
TILT MOTOR ASSEMBLY
9TLT1143
LEFT DETECTOR ARM

Figure 10.4. Detector arm spare parts

10.2.5 GANTRY
To ease identifying of the location of the gantry FRU’s, this section has been divided into separate sections for the gantry
base and the gantry ring.

The figures on the next two pages show the gantry cabling in the stationary part (gantry base) and the ring part (rotating
part) of the gantry.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-14

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 9CBL1054
9CBL1161
9CBL1161

9CBL0665
9CBL751

9CBL1146
9CBL1151

MOTION
CONTROLLER

9WIR1078
BZ3

BZ1
BZ4

C7
G5 G6 OC1
G10 9CBL1160 C6
G3
G2

9CBL1117
G15
G1

G17
9CBL1148 C8 AC POWER
BZ6

BZ5

G16 G7 G8 G20 G9

SUPPLY
C5 OC2
G14
G12

9CBL0667 C4
G13
C3
BZ10

OC3
BZ7
BZ11

BZ8

G4

C2
G19 G11
BZ12

C1
9UNT1080
9CBL1116
9CBL1059
9CBL0669
9CBL0725

Figure 10.5. Cables on stationary part of gantry

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-15

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 DETECTOR
CABLE
9CBL1079

CABLES ON ROTATING
PART OF GANTRY
LE
CAB
T ILT L1 1 4 4
9CB

F1
4
RADIUS
VE ABS. ENC F8
DRI 9CBL1060
IUS 061

9C
R AD 1

BL
T F2
9U N 0 RI
F1

F2

10
3
F1 N

59
9 G

F3
BO F1
F4 2

F9
AR

5
F1
D

F5
6
F1

F7

F1

9C
1
05 8

F1
9CBL1

F6

BL
0
F1

066
7
06 69

BZ12
BL
9C

BZ1
BZ1
BZ9

0
1
BZ8
9C B
9C

BZ7
BL

L 06

BZ6
10
9CBL1057

56
67

BZ5

BZ3
J1 ROLL CABLE

BZ1
BZ4
9CBL1054
J2 I ON
MOT LLER
TR O
CO N
RADIUS
AMPLIFIER
9AMP0819

Figure 10.6. Cables on rotating part of gantry

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-16

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 RADIUS ABSOL
ENC 9CBL1060
RADIUS DRIVE
9UNT1061 RING BOARD
9RBG1122

RADIUS AMPLIFIER
9AMP0819 RADIUS MOTION
CONTROLLER
9MOT1145

TABLE SUPPORT
9UNT1077
ROLL AMPLIFIER
9AMP0819
ROLL DRIVE
9UNT1071 180V REG. LOAD
9CBL1157

ROLL ABS. ENC 180V REG. CNTRL

9CBL1146 9CBL1150

CANBUS TERM.
9TER0562
REAR PANEL
9WIR1078
ROLL AND TABLE
MOTION AC POWER SUPPLY
CONTROLLER 9UNF0643
9MOT1145

TABLE DRIVE
SAFETY BOARD 9UNT1051
9SAF1123
Figure 10.7. Gantry spare parts

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-17

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
10.2.6 ACQUISITION PC

3ACQ1537
Acq. PC Monitor

3ACQ1508
Acq. PC Mouse

3KBD1443
Acq. PC Keyboard

3ACQ1573 Acq. PC
with Win2000 2TAB1105
PC Cart

3BRD1444 Firewire
board located inside

Figure 10.8. Acquisition PC

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-18

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
10.2.7 ACCESSORIES

Accessory Part No. Description of Part

9UNT1083-A Complete QC kit, comprising source holder, bracket for source
holder and teflon bottle
9UNC0764-A 4-field bar phantom
9UNT1707-A Aluminum table top for short table option
4UNT1709-A Mattress for short table option
4UNT1706-A Aluminum table top for long table option
4UNT1708-A Mattress for long table option
9UNC0635-B Meridian hand controller
4CSY1542-A Source holder for center-of-rotation calibration and checking
9UNT1113-A Arm rest that attaches onto the side of the table top
9PHA0841-A Source holder and tripod kit
6FED1110-A 50 ml teflon lubricant
2TUB0548-A Vial for tripod source holder
2LID0549-A Lid for 2TUB0548

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-19

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
10.3 SERVICE TOOLS

10.3.1 MOTION CONTROLLER S/W LOAD CABLE (9CBL0818)

Figure 10.9. Motion controller SW load cable

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-20

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
10.3.2 NEMA KIT (9UNC0753)

Figure 10.10. NEMA kit

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-21

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
10.3.3 CALIBRATION SERVICE KIT (9UNC0754)

Figure 10.11. Calibration service kit

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-22

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Figure 10.12. Calibration service kit – close-up

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-23

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 10-24
07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
11 NEMA PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT

CONTENTS
11.1 About This Chapter ................................................................................................................................................. 11-2
11.2 NEMA Energy Resolution ........................................................................................................................................ 11-4
11.2.1 Test Requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 11-4
11.2.2 Test Procedure ........................................................................................................................................... 11-4
11.3 NEMA Uniformity ..................................................................................................................................................... 11-7
11.3.1 Test Requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 11-7
11.3.2 Test Procedure ........................................................................................................................................... 11-7
11.4 NEMA Spatial Resolution and Linearity ................................................................................................................... 11-9
11.4.1 Test Requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 11-9
11.4.2 Test Procedure ........................................................................................................................................... 11-9
11.5 NEMA Multiple Window Spatial Registration (MWSR) .......................................................................................... 11-13
11.5.1 Test Requirements ................................................................................................................................... 11-13
11.5.2 Test Procedure ......................................................................................................................................... 11-13

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 11-1

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
11.1 ABOUT THIS CHAPTER
This section of the Meridian service manual describes procedures to be followed when performing NEMA performance
measurements on the Meridian detector.

NOTE
The detector must be uncollimated for all NEMA performance measurements. As the
detector is uncollimated, the hand controller OVERRIDE button must be kept pressed
during all motion.

The Acquisition PC has dedicated software for performing these NEMA measurements. To access any NEMA tests,
follow the procedure described below.

Procedure Details

1. Click the Tools button to access the

Calibration & Configuration menu.
Tools
2. Click on the Service button. button

Calibration & Configuration Menu

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 11-2

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

3. Enter the service password (currently

DDD) in the pop-up box and click OK.
The Service menu appears.

4. Click on the NEMA button to access

the NEMA menu.
The NEMA menu gives access to four
NEMA procedures.

Service Calibrations Menu NEMA Menu

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 11-3

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
11.2 NEMA ENERGY RESOLUTION
11.2.1 TEST REQUIREMENTS

Detector: Intrinsic no collimator

Source: Tc99m ~ 8 MBq or 0.2 mCi
Phantom: NEMA Mask
Source holder: Tripod source holder
Total Test Time: Approximately 5 minutes.

11.2.2 TEST PROCEDURE

Procedure Details

1. Ensure that the detector is

uncollimated.
2. Use the hand controller to translate the
table to the patient load position
(0 mm).
3. Tilt the detector to 90° using the hand
controller. Detector rotate must be set
to 0°.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 11-4

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

4. Place the NEMA Mask on the detector

and secure it with two phantom fixing
screws. Upper phantom
fixing screw

5. Place a ~ 8 MBq (200μCi) Tc99 point Minimum 3 m

source at a minimum distance of 3 m
from the detector and exactly in front of
it.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 11-5

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

6. In the NEMA menu, click Energy

resolution.
7. In the Energy (KeV) field, enter 140.5
for Tc99m.
(The default is 140.5 keV.)
8. Check that the source exposes the
entire detector FOV, and that the count
rate is less than 20 kcps.
9. Click Start.

10. When the test is finished, the result is

shown in a pop-up message. Note the
result and click OK.
Specification:
< 9.4 % @ 140.5 keV

11. Remove the source and NEMA Mask

before clicking Exit to return to the
Service menu.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 11-6

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
11.3 NEMA UNIFORMITY
11.3.1 TEST REQUIREMENTS

Detector: Intrinsic no collimator

Source: Tc99m ~ 8 MBq or 0.2 mCi
Source holder: Tripod source holder
Total Test Time: Approximately 45 minutes.

11.3.2 TEST PROCEDURE

Procedure Details

1. Ensure that the detector is

uncollimated.
2. Use the hand controller to translate the
table to the patient load position
(0 mm).
3. Use the hand controller to tilt the
detector to 90°. Detector rotate must be
set to 0°.

4. Place a ~ 8 MBq (200μCi) Tc99 point Minimum 3 m

source at a minimum distance of 3 m
(10’) from the detector and exactly in
front of it.
It is very important that the entire
detector FOV is uniformly exposed to
the source.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 11-7

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

5. In the NEMA menu, click Uniformity.

6. In the Energy (KeV) field, enter 140.5
for Tc99m.
7. Check that the source exposes the
entire detector FOV and that the count
rate is less than 20 kcps.
8. Click Start.

9. When the test is finished, the result is

shown in a pop-up message.
Specifications:
Note the results and click OK to close
UFOV Differential: < 2.5%
the pop-up message. CFOV Differential: < 2.0%
UFOV Integral: < 3.5%
CFOV Integral: < 3.0%

10. Remove the source and click Exit to

return to the Service menu.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 11-8

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
11.4 NEMA SPATIAL RESOLUTION AND LINEARITY
11.4.1 TEST REQUIREMENTS

Detector: Intrinsic no collimator

Phantom: NEMA X and Y Line Phantoms
Source: Tc99m ~ 185 MBq or 5 mCi
Source holder: Tripod point source holder
Total Test Time: Approximately 30 minutes.

11.4.2 TEST PROCEDURE

Procedure Details

1. Ensure that the detector is

uncollimated.
2. Use the hand controller to translate the
table to the patient load position
(0 mm).
3. Use the hand controller to tilt the
detector to 90°. Detector rotate must be
set to 0°.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 11-9

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

4. Place the NEMA X line phantom on the

detector and secure it with two
phantom fixing screws.
Upper phantom
fixing screw

5. Place a ~ 185 MBq (5 mCi) Tc99 point Minimum 3 m

source at a minimum distance of 3 m
(10’) from the detector and exactly in
front of it.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 11-10

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

6. In the NEMA menu, click Spatial

resolution and linearity.
7. In the Energy (KeV) field, enter 140.5
(for Tc99m).
8. Check that the count rate is less than
20 kcps and that all the phantom slits
are seen as vertical lines.
9. Click Start.

10. When the X-direction is completed, the

pop-up message shown to the right
appears.
Do not click OK at this point.
11. Remove the point source and replace
the NEMA X Line phantom with the Y
Line phantom.
12. Position the source in the Tripod
source holder once again. Click OK in
the pop-up message.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 11-11

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

13. After measurements in both the X and Resolution specifications are:

Y direction have been completed, the UFOV FWHM: <= 3.7 mm
CFOV FWHM: <= 3.7 mm
results are presented.
UFOV FWTM: <= 7.6 mm
14. Note the results and click OK. CFOV FWTM: <= 7.6 mm
Linearity specifications are:
UFOV absolute: <= 0.5 mm
CFOV absolute: <= 0.5 mm
UFOV differential: <= 0.2 mm
CFOV differential: <= 0.2 mm

15. Remove the source and NEMA Y Line

phantom. Click Exit to return to the
Service menu.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 11-12

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
11.5 NEMA MULTIPLE WINDOW SPATIAL REGISTRATION (MWSR)
11.5.1 TEST REQUIREMENTS

Detector: Intrinsic no collimator

Phantom: GEOCAL Mask
Source: 4 sources, Ba-133 or Ga-67 ~5 MBq or 100 μCi each
Source holder: 4 point holders for the GEOCAL Mask
Total Test Time: Approximately 5 minutes.

11.5.2 TEST PROCEDURE

Procedure Details

1. Ensure that the detector is

uncollimated.
2. Use the hand controller to translate the
table to approximately middle position
(1100 mm).
3. Rotate the detector to 180° with radius
set to its maximum and tilt at 0°.
4. Mount the GEOCAL Mask on the
detector.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 11-13

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

5. Place the four lead pigs with sources in

the four outer holes in the GEOCAL
Mask.

6. In the NEMA menu, select MWSR.

7. Enter the isotope energies.
For Ba133 enter:
In the Energy low field: 81
In the Energy high field: 356.
For Ga enter:
In the Energy low field: 92
In the Energy high field: 298.

8. Check that all four sources are seen

and that the count rate is less than
20 kcps.
9. Click Start to begin measuring MWSR.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 11-14

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

10. After 400 kc have been acquired, the

pop-up message shown to the right is
displayed.
Place the four lead pigs in the inner
four holes in the GEOCAL Mask.
11. Check that all four sources are seen
and that the count rate is less than
20 kcps before clicking OK.

12. After acquisition of another 400 kc, the

message shown to the right pops up.
Do not click OK at this point.

13. Remove the four sources from the

inner holes and place one of them in
the center hole.
14. Click OK in the message box to
acquire the last 100 kc.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 11-15

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

15. After acquisition of the last 100 kc, the

result pops up. Note the result and click
OK. Specification:
MWSR: < 2.0 mm.

16. Remove the GEOCAL Mask and the

remaining lead pig from the detector.
17. When done, click on the Exit icon to
return to the Service menu.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 11-16

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
12 PLANNED MAINTENANCE

CONTENTS
12.1 About This Chapter ................................................................................................................................................. 12-2
12.2 Planned Maintenance Schedule .............................................................................................................................. 12-3
12.3 Planned Maintenance Procedures .......................................................................................................................... 12-4
12.3.1 Inspection Check List from the Operator’s Manual ..................................................................................... 12-4
12.3.2 Inspection of Image Quality ........................................................................................................................ 12-5
12.3.2.1 Uniformity ................................................................................................................................... 12-5
12.3.2.2 Resolution and Linearity ............................................................................................................ 12-6
12.3.3 Check of motion limits ................................................................................................................................. 12-9
12.3.3.1 Simple Detector and Table Motions ........................................................................................... 12-9
12.3.3.2 Combined Detector Motions .................................................................................................... 12-10
12.3.4 Lubrication ................................................................................................................................................ 12-11
12.3.4.1 Rotate Drive ............................................................................................................................. 12-11
12.3.4.2 Radius Drive ............................................................................................................................ 12-13
12.3.4.3 Tilt Drive ................................................................................................................................... 12-14
12.3.4.4 Lubricating Linear Detector Bearings ....................................................................................... 12-16
12.3.4.5 Table Drive .............................................................................................................................. 12-19
12.3.5 Collimator Contact Cleaning ..................................................................................................................... 12-21

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 12-1

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
12.1 ABOUT THIS CHAPTER
The Meridian system is designed for intensive use over many years. Mechanically it is robust and it has wide margins
electrically. However, to ensure continuous performance, some periodic maintenance is required.

Most of the recommended maintenance has been simplified to the extent that the user can perform it on his or her own.
Chapter 5 in the Operator’s Manual describes user maintenance requirements such as cleaning, check of image quality,
simple detector calibrations and checks of safety devices.

This Section addresses planned maintenance that should be performed by service personnel. Some of the maintenance
tasks are also described in the Operator’s Manual and should be performed by the user on a daily and weekly basis.
However, the service personnel should make sure that those procedures have been followed. If this is not the case,
service personnel should perform these tasks as well during the periodic visits.

NOTE
The Meridian employs motorized motions representing a risk for personal injury. It is
therefore strongly recommended to carry out periodical checks of the safety systems.
This is already emphasized in the Operator’s Manual, but should also be a part of a
periodic maintenance plan, carried out by qualified service personnel.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 12-2

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
12.2 PLANNED MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

FREQUENCY TASKS
1 month after installation 1. Verify that the user is acquainted with the daily/weekly
checks described in the Operator’s Manual.
2. Verify that the daily/weekly checks have been
performed.
3. Check Collision Sensors and E-stop.
4. Inspect the image quality, and recalibrate if necessary.
Every 6 months 1. Verify that the user is acquainted with the daily/weekly
checks described in the Operator’s Manual.
2. Verify that the daily/weekly checks have been
performed.
3. Check Collision Sensors and E-stop.
4. Inspect the image quality, and recalibrate if necessary.
5. Check motion limits.
6. Grease moving parts.
7. Clean electrical interface between collimators and
detector.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 12-3

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
12.3 PLANNED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
12.3.1 INSPECTION CHECK LIST FROM THE OPERATOR’S MANUAL

Item Inspection Frequency

Cables Check cables connected to the PC and monitor. Check for damage Weekly
to insulation especially around cable clamps
Check that all external cables are secured in connector strain relief Weekly
where applicable
Panels Check security and condition of all external panels on gantry, PC Weekly
and monitor
Collimators Check all collimators for damage to septa and to locking Weekly
mechanism
Collimator Check functionality of all collimator collision sensors Daily
collision sensors
Collimator carts Check the locking mechanism on all collimator carts Weekly
(during exchange and/or when collimator is unmounted)
Hand controller Check the hand controller for cracks and damage. Check the Daily
connection points on the hand controller and on the gantry
Table Check the table top and mattress for damage Daily
E-Stop Check both EMERGENCY STOP buttons located on the back of Daily
the Meridian gantry for correct operation.
When an EMERGENCY STOP button is pressed, no gantry motion
must be possible, the yellow E-Stop indicator must be on and the
green motor power indicator must be off
Uniformity Check the uniformity of the detector by intrinsic or extrinsic QC Daily
check
COR Check the center of rotation for all collimators

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 12-4

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
12.3.2 INSPECTION OF IMAGE QUALITY

12.3.2.1 Uniformity
As uniformity correction is applied in normal use and in QC uniformity checks, there is a risk that severe image
imperfection has been covered by uniformity correction updated by the user. Therefore a flood image should be acquired
without uniformity correction applied.

Acquire an intrinsic 3 million count static image with uniformity NONE selected, using a Tc99m or Co57 point source.
Some faint lines and shadows along the edges are acceptable, but there must not be pronounced tube patterns, holes or
bands in the image.

The Figure 12.1 illustrates how the image should typically look.

Figure 12.1. Flood image without uniformity correction applied

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 12-5

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
12.3.2.2 Resolution and Linearity
If a Meridian 4-field bar phantom option (P/N 9UNC0764) is available on the site, the resolution and linearity can be
checked.

To check resolution and linearity, follow the procedure outlined below.

Procedure Details

1. Remove the collimator from the

detector. Refer to the Collimator
Exchange section in the Operator’s
Manual.

2. With the hand controller, move the

table to the 0 position.
3. Use the hand controller to set the tilt
angle to 90°, leaving the roll angle at
0°.

4. Place the 4-field bar phantom on the

detector. Secure with the phantom
fixing screws. Upper phantom
fixing screw

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 12-6

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

5. Place a ~10-20MBq or 0.3-0.5 mCi Minimum 2.5 m

point source, Tc99 or Co57, at a
minimum distance of 2.5 m (8’ 8”) from
the detector, exactly in front of it.
6. Check that the count rate is less than
20 kcps

NOTE
If a distance of 2.5 m (8’ 8”) cannot be obtained, the source must be positioned as far
away from the detector as possible. This may require repositioning the detector (rotate,
tilt and radius) to accommodate the new position of the source. Remember that the
source must be placed in a position providing a good uniform distribution of activity
across the entire detector face.

Procedure Details

7. Acquire a static image with 10 million

counts.
8. When the acquisition terminates,
inspect the image for linearity and
resolution errors.
9. All four quadrants must be resolved
with linear lines. Figure 12.2 on the
next page gives a typical example of a
correct image.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 12-7

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Figure 12.2. Image for checking linearity and resolution

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 12-8

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
12.3.3 CHECK OF MOTION LIMITS
As part of the planned maintenance visit, all motion limits must be checked.

12.3.3.1 Simple Detector and Table Motions

Radius Limits
1. Use the hand controller to rotate the detector to 0°. Set detector tilt to 0°.
2. Use the hand controller to set the detector at its maximum radius of 383 mm.
Set the detector at the minimum radius of 80 mm.
Verify that the radial travel is 80 – 383 mm without meeting a hard stop.

The detector radius is displayed by the Meridian application on the acquisition PC. If the maximum and/or minimum radius
positions cannot be achieved, the radius axis must be calibrated. See Chapter 5 Calibrations.

Roll Limits
1. Use the hand controller to set detector radius at 256 mm and detector tilt at 0°.
2. Use the hand controller to rotate the detector to its maximum limit of +270°.
Rotate the detector to the minimum limit of –270°.
Verify that the detector can be rotated between –270° and +270° without meeting an ultimate limit.

The detector rotation angle is displayed by the Meridian application on the acquisition PC. If the maximum and/or
minimum rotation angle cannot be achieved, the roll axis must be calibrated. See Chapter 5 Calibrations.

Table Limits
1. Use the hand controller to set detector radius to 256 mm. Set detector tilt to 0°.
2. Use the hand controller to translate the table to its minimum position of 0 mm.
Translate the table fully to its maximum position of 2251 mm (1570 mm for the short patient table of the cardiology
version).
Verify that the table can be translated between 0 mm and 2251 mm (1570 mm) without meeting an ultimate limit.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 12-9

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
The table position is displayed by the Meridian application on the acquisition PC. The table axis is calibrated by pressing
the hand controller TABLE IN and TABLE OUT buttons simultaneously. No dedicated service calibration procedure is
required for table motion.

Tilt Limits
1. Use the hand controller to rotate the detector to 0°. Set detector radius to 383 mm.
2. Use the hand controller to tilt the detector to its maximum tilt of +180°.
Tilt the detector to its minimum limit of –10°.
Verify that the detector can be tilted between –10° and +180° without meeting a hard stop.

The detector tilt angle is displayed by the Meridian application on the acquisition PC. If the maximum and/or minimum tilt
angle cannot be achieved, the tilt axis must be calibrated. See Chapter 5 Calibrations.

12.3.3.2 Combined Detector Motions

Verify different combinations of detector radius and rotation:
1. Set detector tilt to 0° and position the detector at 0° rotation.
2. Increase detector radius to its maximum (383 mm), and rotate the detector clockwise.
3. Verify that the detector stops at a rotation angle ≤ approximately 14°.
4. Reduce detector radius to 360 mm.
5. Continue to rotate the detector clockwise and verify that the detector stops at a rotation angle ≤ 120°.
6. Reduce detector radius to 260 mm.
7. Verify that the detector will rotate to 270° (the maximum rotation angle).
8. Increase detector radius to 360 mm.
9. Now rotate the detector counterclockwise and verify that the detector stops at an angle ≥ approximately 240°.
10. Reduce detector radius to 260 mm and rotate the detector all the way to 0°.
11. Repeat the above test, but now in the counterclockwise rotational direction.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 12-10

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
12.3.4 LUBRICATION

Tool required:
• Teflon lubricant (6FED1110).
• Allen keys set
• 9SER1676 Grease gun with two adaptors, PMS No: 453 560 819 411
• 2GRE2541 Grease, PMS No: 453 560 824 711

12.3.4.1 Rotate Drive

Procedure Details

1. Remove the cover from the front of the

gantry to access the rotate gear.
Remove the screws indicated in the
figure on the right.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 12-11

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

2. Apply Teflon lubricant (6FED1110) to

the two gear wheels as shown on the
right.
Rotate the detector a full revolution
twice in order to grease the large main
bearing. Greasing points

Apply lubricant to the gear wheel once

more, followed by rotating the detector
a couple of revolutions.

3. Re-mount the cover.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 12-12

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
12.3.4.2 Radius Drive

Procedure Details

1. While the detector is positioned at

approximately 0° rotation, set the
detector radius to its maximum.
2. Apply a thin layer of Teflon lubricant
(6FED1110) on the tooth bar as shown
on the right.

3. Drive the detector to minimum radius to

grease the lower part of the tooth bar.
4. Drive the detector up and down a
couple of times to distribute the grease
over the entire tooth bar.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 12-13

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
12.3.4.3 Tilt Drive

Procedure Details

1. Rotate the detector to 0° and position

detector radius so that the detector is
at a convenient level.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 12-14

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

2. Remove the four screws from the

detector arm cover as shown on the
right to remove the cover

3. Use a grease gun to apply grease to

the worm gear through the nipple with
adaptor (activate the handle 5 times).
See photo on the right.
4. Remount the arm cover once.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 12-15

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
12.3.4.4 Lubricating Linear Detector Bearings

Procedure Details

1. Rotate the detector to 0° and position

detector radius so that the detector is
at a convenient level.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 12-16

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

2. Remove the four screws from the

detector arm cover as shown on the
right.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 12-17

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

3. Use a grease gun to apply grease to

the linear bearings through the nipple
with adaptor (activate the handle 5
times).
See photo on the right.

4. Perform the exact same procedure for

right arm.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 12-18

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
12.3.4.5 Table Drive

Procedure Details

1. Translate the table to the patient load

position (0 mm) to get access to
greasing the ball screw and the four
steel bars in the table guide.
Table ball screw
2. Use a piece of cloth to apply a thin
layer of Teflon lubricant (6FED1110) on
the full length of the table ball screw
located inside the table guide (see the
figure on the right).

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 12-19

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
Procedure Details

3. Use a piece of cloth to apply a thin

layer of Teflon lubricant (6FED1110) on
the full length of the four steel bars.
(The figure on the right shows just one
side of the table).

Steel bars (one

side shown)

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 12-20

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
12.3.5 COLLIMATOR CONTACT CLEANING
The interface between the detector and collimator is implemented as ball contacts. Experience has shown that these must
be cleaned to maintain contact and in order to avoid false collisions to occur during the use of Meridian.

Procedure Details

1. To clean the contact ball mounting on

the Collimator ID board, use a rag with
a little alcohol to rub the balls one by
one.
While cleaning, make sure to turn the
balls to ensure that the entire surface
of each ball is properly cleaned.

2. The pads on the Detector ID board

interfacing the contact balls must also
be cleaned.
Again use a rag with a little alcohol.

NOTE
The contact balls on all collimators must be cleaned.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 12-21

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 12-22
07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13 CABLES
CONTENTS
13.1 About This Chapter ................................................................................................................................................. 13-3
13.2 Cable Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 13-4
13.3 Cable Diagrams ....................................................................................................................................................... 13-6
13.3.1 9CBL0284 – Grounding for Mounting Plate .............................................................................................. 13-6
13.3.2 9CBL0657 – Analog Signal Cable ............................................................................................................ 13-7
13.3.3 9CBL0658 – Tune Control Cable .............................................................................................................. 13-7
13.3.4 9CBL0659 – Detector Low Voltage Cable ................................................................................................ 13-8
13.3.5 9CBL0661 – EDC Power Cable ................................................................................................................ 13-8
13.3.6 9CBL0665 – Amplifier Control Cable ........................................................................................................ 13-9
13.3.7 9CBL0667 – Short I/O Cable .................................................................................................................... 13-9
13.3.8 9CBL0669 – Motion Controller Brake Cable ........................................................................................... 13-10
13.3.9 9CBL0718 – High voltage Cable ............................................................................................................ 13-10
13.3.10 9CBL0725 – Roll Motor Controller Power Cable .................................................................................... 13-10
13.3.11 9CBL0751 – Roll Amplifier Power Cable ................................................................................................ 13-11
13.3.12 9CBL0781 – Crystal High Voltage Cable ................................................................................................ 13-11
13.3.13 9CBL0793 – Gantry-PC Interface Cable................................................................................................. 13-12
13.3.14 9CBL0820 – Collision jumper for detector PSU ...................................................................................... 13-12
13.3.15 9CBL0938 – Unified Meridian Handset Cable ........................................................................................ 13-13
13.3.16 9CBL1046 – Ultimate Radius Jumper..................................................................................................... 13-13
13.3.17 9CBL1054 – Roll Cable .......................................................................................................................... 13-14
13.3.18 9CBL1055 – Tilt Absolute encoder ......................................................................................................... 13-15
13.3.19 9CBL1056 – Ring Motion Controller Power Cable .................................................................................. 13-15
13.3.20 9CBL1057 – Radius Amplifier Control Cable .......................................................................................... 13-16
13.3.21 9CBL1058 – Radius Amplifier Power Cable ........................................................................................... 13-16
13.3.22 9CBL1059 – L292 Amplifier Control Cable ............................................................................................. 13-17
13.3.23 9CBL1060 – Radius Absolute Encoder .................................................................................................. 13-18
13.3.24 9WIR1078 – Rear Panel Wiring .............................................................................................................. 13-19
13.3.25 9CBL1079 – Detector Cable ................................................................................................................... 13-20

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-1

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 13.3.26 9CBL1116 – Table Encoder Cable ......................................................................................................... 13-21
13.3.27 9CBL1117 – I/O Cable 13 cm ................................................................................................................. 13-21
13.3.28 9CBL1140 – Collimator Interface Cable ................................................................................................. 13-22
13.3.29 9CBL1144 – Tilt Cable............................................................................................................................ 13-23
13.3.30 9CBL1146 – Roll Absolute Encoder ....................................................................................................... 13-24
13.3.31 9CBL1148 – 24 V E-Stop Cable ............................................................................................................. 13-24
13.3.32 9CBL1151 – Roll Limit Cable .................................................................................................................. 13-25
13.3.33 9CBL1152 – Radius Motor Cable ........................................................................................................... 13-25
13.3.34 9CBL1154 – Table Power Cable ............................................................................................................ 13-26
13.3.35 9CBL1157 – Regenerate Load ............................................................................................................... 13-26
13.3.36 9CBL1158 – Regenerate Input Cable ..................................................................................................... 13-27
13.3.37 9CBL1160 – Safety Board Power Cable................................................................................................. 13-27
13.3.38 9CBL1161 – Mushroom Cable ............................................................................................................... 13-28

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-2

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.1 ABOUT THIS CHAPTER
This chapter provides information about cables belonging to the Meridian system.

The section Cable Overview starting on page 13-4 provides an overview of all cables, sorted by part number. For each
cable, reference is given to the page where you can find a diagram of the cable and, if applicable, detailed information.

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-3

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.2 CABLE OVERVIEW

Order No. Name See page

9CBL0284 Grounding for mounting plate 13-6
9CBL0657 Analog signal cable 13-7
9CBL0658 Tune control cable 13-7
9CBL0659 Detector LV cable 13-8
9CBL0661 EDC power cable 13-8
9CBL0665 Amplifier control cable 13-9
9CBL0667 Short I/O cable 13-9
9CBL0669 Motion controller brake cable 13-10
9CBL0718 High Voltage cable 13-10
9CBL0725 Roll motor controller power cable 13-10
9CBL0751 Roll amplifier power cable 13-11
9CBL0781 Crystal high voltage cable 13-11
9CBL0793 Gantry-PC interface cable 13-12
9CBL0820 Collision jumper for detector PSU 13-12
9CBL0938 Unified Meridian handset cable 13-13
9CBL1046 Ultimate radius jumper 13-13
9CBL1054 Roll cable 13-13
9CBL1055 Tilt absolute encoder 13-15
9CBL1056 Ring motion controller power cable 13-15
9CBL1057 Radius amplifier control cable 13-16
9CBL1058 Radius amplifier power cable 13-16
9CBL1059 L292 amplifier controller cable 13-17

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-4

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 Order No. Name See page
9CBL1060 Radius absolute encoder 13-18
9WIR1078 Rear panel wiring 13-19
9CBL1079 Detector cable 13-20
9CBL1116 Table encoder cable 13-21
9CBL1117 I/O cable 13 cm 13-21
9CBL1140 Collimator interface cable 13-22
9CBL1144 Tilt cable 13-23
9CBL1146 Roll absolute encoder 13-24
9CBL1148 24V E-Stop cable 13-24
9CBL1151 Roll limit cable 13-25
9CBL1152 Radius motor cable 13-25
9CBL1154 Table power cable 13-26
9CBL1157 Regenerate load 13-26
9CBL1158 Regenerate input cable 13-27
9CBL1160 Safety board power cable 13-27
9CBL1161 Mushroom cable 13-28

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-5

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.3 CABLE DIAGRAMS

13.3.1 9CBL0284 – GROUNDING FOR MOUNTING PLATE

9CBL0284 Grounding for mounting plate

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-6

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.3.2 9CBL0657 – ANALOG SIGNAL CABLE
YPOS

METAL BACK CAP

CONNECTED TO
YNEG 5 x RG316, 85 CM COAX SCREENS
A6

SMB RIGHT ANGLED PLUGS,

8
15
7
14

DB15, Male
6
13
ENERGY 5
12
4
11
3
10
2
9
1

XPOS

XNEG

9CBL0657 Analog signal cable

13.3.3 9CBL0658 – TUNE CONTROL CABLE

A7
TUNE STRIP

1
1
26 WAY FEMALE SOCKET, IDC

26 x AWG28 RIBBON CABLE

60 cm

DB25 M

9CBL0658 Tune control cable

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-7

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.3.4 9CBL0659 – DETECTOR LOW VOLTAGE CABLE
M-N-L 5

100 CM

7xAWG20 (RIBBON)

1 BLK
5

2 BRN 9
4
D4
RED
8
ORG
3 YEL 3
7
4 GRN 2
6
BLU 1
5

DB9M

POWER STRIP

9CBL0659 Detector LV Cable Detector low voltage cable

13.3.5 9CBL0661 – EDC POWER CABLE

A4 D2
15 X AWG20 (RIBBON) YEL
8 8
15 15
7 7
14 14
6 6
DB15F

13 13

DB15M
5 5
12 12
4 4
11 11
3 3
10 10
2 2
9 9
1 1
BLK

50 cm

9CBL0661 EDC power cable

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-8

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.3.6 9CBL0665 – AMPLIFIER CONTROL CABLE
2LAB1208-A01

RADIUS = CH. A
ROLL = CH. A
TABLE = CH. B
CONNECTOR LABEL = J2
CONNECTOR LABEL

SCREEN CONNECTED
TO BACK CAP

HEAT SHRINK 16
SLEEVING /RESET
DB15M

MOLEX 08-50-0114 CONTACTS ( 9 pcs )

FAULT
CABLE:
/NEG ENA

MOLEX 22-01-3167 HOUSING

8xAWG24, SHIELDED
/POS ENA 12
1 GRN /ENA
9 BLK
2
BLU
10
3
11 RED 8
4 GND
WHT
12
5 BRN
13 REF-
6
REF+ 4
14
7
15
JUMPER WIRES: AWG24, BLACK GND
8
HEAT SHHRINK SLEEVING OVER 1
SOLDER JOINTS

50 mm

800 mm

9CBL0665 Amplifier control cable

13.3.7 9CBL0667 – SHORT I/O CABLE

DB25 M
DB25 F

1 1

25 x AWG28 RIBBON CABLE

38 cm

9CBL0667 Short I/O cable

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-9

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.3.8 9CBL0669 – MOTION CONTROLLER BRAKE CABLE
40 cm

WEIDMÜLLER WEIDMÜLLER
BL3.5/2 BL3.5/2

BLK
2 1
BLU
1 2

0.75mm 2 MAINS FLEX, 2-CORE

BZ12

9CBL0669 MC brake cable Motion controller brake cable

13.3.9 9CBL0718 – HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE

100 CM

HEAT SHRINK RG58/U

SLEEVES RADIALL
M-N-L 3 R 316 007

9CBL0718 HV cable High voltage cable

13.3.10 9CBL0725 – ROLL MOTOR CONTROLLER POWER CABLE

1000 mm

WEIDMÜLLER WEIDMÜLLER
BL3.5/2 BL3.5/3
AWG16 BLK
1
2
AWG16 RED 2
1
3

C3 BZ1

9CBL0725 Roll motor controller pow cbl Roll motor controller power cable

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-10

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.3.11 9CBL0751 – ROLL AMPLIFIER POWER CABLE
800 mm

OC3
1 +HV
AWG16, ORANGE

AWG16, BLUE
2
GND

10 mm
M-N-L 2
BRAIDED SLEEVING STRIPPED
70 cm

9CBL0751 Roll amp power cable Roll amplifier power cable

13.3.12 9CBL0781 – CRYSTAL HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE

3soc1427-A01
HEAT SHRINK SLEEVING 0.5 mm2 Silicone
Ø2.4 Insulated Wire

6WIR1107

20 mm

2TER0570-A01

150 mm
250 mm

9CBL0781 Xtal HV cable Crystal high voltage cable

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-11

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.3.13 9CBL0793 – GANTRY-PC INTERFACE CABLE
Cable tie holds
Two Part inner conduit to 15 cm
cables
Conduit
10 cm
IEEE1394
PLUG
IEEE1394
PLUG
IEC IEC
SOCKET PLUG

RJ45 RJ45
PLUG SOCKET

10 cm
400 cm

9CBL0793 Gantry-PC interface cable Cable PC-gantry

13.3.14 9CBL0820 – COLLISION JUMPER FOR DETECTOR PSU

DB15M
1 PCS 3CON0771-A01

2 PCS 3CON0650-A01

8
15

14
7 3 cm AWG 24, black
6 6CBL0489-A01
13
5
12
4
11
3
10
2
9
1

9CBL0820 Colli. jumper for detector PSU Collision jumper for detector PSU

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-12

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.3.15 9CBL0938 – UNIFIED MERIDIAN HANDSET CABLE
"BERGCON" HOUSING 17 CRIMPTERMINALS
FRAMATONE CONNECTORS INTERNATIONAL 3TER0793-A01 SAMTEC
TSW-109-08-T-D
65043-027
3CON1544-A01, cut to 2X9

DO NOT FIT TERMINALS IN HOUSING 2x9 PIN STRIP

FOR MATING
BEFORE ASSEMBLING THE HANDSET !! MEMBRANE CONNECTOR

3CON1545-A01

GR
RTNF 1 pcs 3CON0771-A01
N
15 pcs 3CON0768-A01

THIS SIDE TOWARDS MEMBRANE SWITCH

1 pcs 3KIT0779-A01
RED/BLU DET OUT
GRY TBL RIGHT
CABLE GLAND GR
RTNF 8
WHT/GRN DET UP 3GLD1479-A01 N
WHT ACQ START 15
VIO STOP YEL CW 7
YEL CW BRN/GRN CCW 14
PINK RADIUS IN
YEL/BRN OVR 6
WHT/GRN RAD OUT 13

DB15M
BLU MARK GRY TILT IN
16 (15) x AWG26, unshielded 5
GRY/PNK TILT OUT 12
BLK +15V
6CBL1085 RED TABLE IN 4
WHT/YEL ENABLE RED/BLU TABLE OUT 11
BRN ( LAMP NEG ) BLU MARK
3
WHT/YEL ENABLE 10
WHT ACQ START VIO STOP
2
RED DET IN CUT YEL/BRN OVR 9
BRN BLK +15V
PINK DET DOWN 1

GRY/PNK TBL LEFT

BRN/GRN CCW

58 mm

300 cm

9CBL0938 Unified Meridian handset cable

13.3.16 9CBL1046 – ULTIMATE RADIUS JUMPER

Pin 1

2LAB0511 Ring
F5 Board.
F5

Weidmüller
BL3.5/4
3PLG1319

1
2
3
4

9CBL1046 Ultimate radius jumper

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-13

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.3.17 9CBL1054 – ROLL CABLE
C2 BL3.5/2 120cm
2 RAD. MC 150 cm
84 links IGUS 10.3.048/400
1 DET.PSU
30 cm
55V
OC2 RET 1 cm
7 x 1.5 MMSQ FLAT CABLE ÖLFLEX 0042 003T
2

1 1
+55V
2 2
1

4
180V RET 3 3 1
MNL 2 GRN/YEL GRN/YEL MNL-6
5
+180V 4 4 2
55V RET 5 5
2
EDC 6 6 3
6 F3
1
+55V
C4 BL3.5/2
110 cm 130 cm

1 1
9
9 20 X AWG20 RIBBON CABLE 2 DB15M
G15 2
10
BLK BLK
10 no back cover
3
3
11
11 no screws
DB15F 4
4
12
no back cover, 5
12 5
F1
13
no screws 13
6
6
14
14 7
G7 7
15 15

8 8
3
+24V
2 WEIDMÜLLER
1 24V WHT WHT 1 BL3.5/3
RET 2
BL3.5/3
3 F2
IEEE 112 cm F19
FIREWIRE 6 1394
BOARD
SEE 5 7 X RG316

FIREWIRE PLUG
SEE 6ASY1057
6ASY1142 4 6
3 5
BNC PLUG
4
3
2
SMB PLUG
EKG BZ3
F18
DB9F
with back cover 6
1 112 cm
2
and 2SCR0537 7 DB9M
BACK COVER
3
1
with back cover
8
ELECTRICALLY 4 256 cm 6 and 2SCR0537
ISOLATED FROM 9 2
COAX SCREENS 5 7
3
6SLV0709-A01 8 BACK COVER
110 cm 4 ELECTRICALLY
BZ4 9
ISOLATED FROM
5
COAX SCREENS
160 cm 66FLX0776-A01 CABLE CHAIN
CROSS SECTION 150 cm
SMALL
RADIUS

9CBL1054 Roll cable

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-14

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.3.18 9CBL1055 – TILT ABSOLUTE ENCODER
Absolute Encoder

DB9 Male

Braid Drain Wire

1
Yellow
CLK+ 2
Violet
CLK- 3
White
DATA+ 4
Brown
DATA-
Red
5
+24V 6
Pink
F/R- 7
Orange
ZERO 8
Blue
GND 9

9CBL1055 Tilt absolute encoder

13.3.19 9CBL1056 – RING MOTION CONTROLLER POWER CABLE

55cm

4cm 4cm

WEIDMÜLLER WEIDMÜLLER
BL3.5/3 BL3.5/3

3 1
2 Mains Flex, 2x0.75sqmm 2
1 3

Brown Wire
F9 Brown Wire BZ1
Blue Wire
Blue Wire

9CBL1056 Ring mctrl pow cbl Ring Motion Controller Power Cable

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-15

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.3.20 9CBL1057 – RADIUS AMPLIFIER CONTROL CABLE
CONNECTOR LABEL = J2
CONNECTOR LABEL = BZ11
SCREEN CONNECTED
TO BACK CAP

HEAT SHRINK 16
SLEEVING /RESET
DB15M

MOLEX 08-50-0114 CONTACTS ( 9 pcs )

FAULT
CABLE:
/NEG ENA

MOLEX 22-01-3167 HOUSING

8xAWG24, SHIELDED
/POS ENA 12
1 GRN /ENA
9 BLK
2
BLU
10
3
11 RED 8
4 GND
WHT
12
5 BRN
13 REF-
6
REF+ 4
14
7
15
JUMPER WIRES: AWG24, BLACK GND
8
HEAT SHHRINK SLEEVING OVER 1
SOLDER JOINTS

50 mm

1400 mm

9CBL1057 Rad. ampl. ctrl cbl Radius amplifier control cable

13.3.21 9CBL1058 – RADIUS AMPLIFIER POWER CABLE

1200 mm

50mm
50mm

F4
1 +HV
Mains Flex 2x0.75sqmm

2
GND
Brown Wire
Brown Wire 10 mm
M-N-L 2 Blue Wire
Blue Wire STRIPPED

9CBL1058 Rad ampl power cbl Radius amplifier power cable

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-16

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.3.22 9CBL1059 – L292 AMPLIFIER CONTROL CABLE
BZ8 SCREEN CONNECTED
TO BACK CAP

HEAT SHRINK
SLEEVING
DB15M
CABLE:
8xAWG24, SHIELDED
F8/G4
1 /ENA
GRN GRN
9 1
2 BLK BLK ANA_GND
10 WHT WHT FAULT 2
3
BLU BLU ANA_GND 3
11
4
BRN BRN ANA_GND 4
12 RED RED ANA_IN 5
5
13
6 5pin Weidmüller
14 3.5mm plug
7
15
8 JUMPER WIRES: AWG24, BLACK
HEAT SHRINK SLEEVING OVER
SOLDER JOINTS

50 mm

400 mm

9CBL1059 L292 amplifier control cable L292 ampl ctrl cbl

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-17

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.3.23 9CBL1060 – RADIUS ABSOLUTE ENCODER
Absolute Encoder

Label Lock Screw

DB9 Male

F12

47 cm

Red
+24V 1
Yellow
CLK+ 2
Violet
CLK- 3
White
DATA+ 4
Brown
DATA- 5
6
Pink
F/R- 7
Orange
ZERO 8
Blue
GND 9

Braid Drain Wire

DB-SHELL

9CBL1060 Radius absolute encoder

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-18

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.3.24 9WIR1078 – REAR PANEL WIRING

2.8 x 0.8 mm
INSULATED
FAST-ON
TERMINALS
BRASS
TERMINALS

3LED 3LED 3LED AWG20 RIBBON CABLE WEIDMÜLLER

1438-A 1439-A 1438-A
120 CM BL3.5/4
BRN
TINNED 1
RED
TERMINALS
ORG
2 G16
3
DB15 YEL
FEMALE 4

15xAWG28
120 CM
G1
RIBBON CABLE

DB15
MALE

REAR VIEW

3ADP
1441-A

AWG16 BLU

AWG16 YEL/GRN
6.3 x 0.8 mm
2.8 x 0.8 mm
INSULATED
INSULATED
FAST-ON
FAST-ON 3LED TERMINALS
TERMINALS 1440-A
3BRK AWG16 BRN
1442-A 3
AWG16 YEL/GRN 2 OC1
AWG16 BLU
1

AWG16 BRN

80 CM

9WIR1078 Rear panel Rear panel wiring

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-19

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.3.25 9CBL1079 – DETECTOR CABLE

GANTRY RING ALL CABLES put THROUGH DETECTOR END

130cm 21.5mm CONDUIT with an
ELBOW FLANGE on both ends
BEFORE connectors are fitted.

Cable Mark applied to 190 cm

4
AWG20 ribbon cable
F15 3
PROT GND AWG16 GRN/YEL
2
M-N-L 4
1 5
9
RAD 55V RET AWG20 BLK
4 8
RAD +55V AWG20 BRN
3
D1
7
EDC 55V RET AWG20 RED
2 260 cm
F16 4 6 WAY AWG20 RIBBON CABLE EDC +55V AWG20 ORG 6
3 1
WEIDMÜLLER 24V COLLIS AWG20 YEL
2
BL3.5/4 1 COLLIS RET AWG20 GRN DB9F
no back cover
no screws

5 5
9 9

BZ3 4
8 9 WAY AWG28 RIBBON CABLE
4
8
3 3 A2
DB9F 2
7 RED WIRE To SubD-pin#1 2
7
no back cover 6 6
275 cm
no screws 1 1

DB9M
no back cover
no screws

6 6
F20 5 5 A8
4 4 x RG316 4
3 3 230 cm
2 2

FIREWIRE PLUG FIREWIRE PLUG

SEE 6ASY1057 SEE 6ASY1057

5 9

F17 1 x RG316
EKG 4
A1
8
3
SMB PLUG
7
2
Back Cover electrically 225 cm
6
CONNECTED TO 1
COAX screen
by Copper Tape DB9F
with back cover and
standard screws

9CBL1079 Detector cable

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-20

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.3.26 9CBL1116 – TABLE ENCODER CABLE
15 CM

DB9 M
10 pin
HEADER
Red wire to Pin1
WITH STRAIN
RELIEF

1 1

10xAWG28 RIBBON

G19
BZ7

9CBL1116 Table encoder cable

13.3.27 9CBL1117 – I/O CABLE 13 CM

DB25 M DB25 F
Red wire to Pin1

1 1

25 x AWG28 RIBBON CABLE

13 cm

9CBL1117 I/O cable13 cm

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-21

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.3.28 9CBL1140 – COLLIMATOR INTERFACE CABLE
800 mm

BRN, WHT, and GRN = 90 mm

YEL and GRY = 80 mm CONNECTOR
LABEL
5xAWG24 6CBL1041 A5
YEL GND
5
5

DETECTOR ID BOARD
2 GRY COLLIS 9
4
4

BOTTOM VIEW
3 WHT ID_CLK 8
1
3
7
BRN ID_DATA
2
6
GRN +5V

5PWB0289-
1

DB9M

COLLIS +5V ID_DATA ID_CLK GND

5PWB0289

0.1uF

1 +5V +5V 1
A0 VCC
ID_DATA 2
A1 WP

A2 SCL ID_CLK 3

GND SDA 4 COLLIS

AT24C08 GND GND 5

9CBL1140 Collimator if cable Collimator interface cable

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-22

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.3.29 9CBL1144 – TILT CABLE
6CBL0028 AWG16, YEL/GRN, 130 cm
CONNECTOR LABEL = F14 2TER0567 2TER0567

3
3PLG1216 RED
2
6CBL0380, 2xAWG24, 160 cm
1 BLK
CONNECTOR LABEL =

TILT DRIVE

RE
DB9M

BL
D

K
CABLE: 6CBL0755 8xAWG24, SHIELDED, 190 cm
3SUB0672
1 BRN
1
BLU

3CON0649
6 6
2 RED
2

DB9M
7 VIO 7
3 BLK 3
8 8
4 WHT 4
9 9
5 5
AWG24 black
SCREEN CONNECTED 3CON0649
CONNECTOR LABEL = BZ7 TO BACK CAP
3 cm
Heat shrink sleeving
Solder
6SLV0047
DB9M CABLE: 6CBL0755
3CON0645
8xAWG24, SHIELDED, 170 cm
3SUB0672
AWG24 black
1 1
6 BLU 6
3CON0649

2 RED

DB9F
2
7 VIO 7
3 BLK 3
8 BRN 8
4 YEL
4
9 WHT 9
5 GRN 5

SCREEN CONNECTED
CONNECTOR LABEL = F13 TO BACK CAP
All cables CONNECTOR LABEL = TILT DRIVE
placed in
conduit

2SCR1524, 2 SET
2ADP1100 25 cm

2ADP1101
CONDUIT, 6CND1074, 90 cm

2NUT0533

9CBL1144 Tilt cable

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-23

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.3.30 9CBL1146 – ROLL ABSOLUTE ENCODER
Absolute Encoder

Label Lock Screw

DB9 Male

G10

Red
+24V 1
Yellow
CLK+ 2
Violet
CLK- 3
White
DATA+ 4
Brown
DATA- 5
6
Pink
F/R- 7
Orange
ZERO 8
Blue
GND 9

Braid Drain Wire

DB-SHELL

9CBL1146 Roll absolute encoder

13.3.31 9CBL1148 – 24 V E-STOP CABLE

45 cm

4cm 4cm

WEIDMÜLLER WEIDMÜLLER
Blue Wire
BL3.5/3 BL3.5/3

3 1
2 Mains Flex, 2x0.75sqmm 2
1 3

Brown Wire
C6 Brown Wire G8
Blue Wire

9CBL1148 24V estop cable 24 V E-stop cable

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-24

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.3.32 9CBL1151 – ROLL LIMIT CABLE
600 mm

6SLV0332
CONNECTOR LABEL = G17 2 CM
2SWI0469
1 BROWN
C
Mains Flex, 2x0.75sqmm
NO
2 BLUE
NC

6SLV0332
2 CM
M-N-L 2

9CBL1151 Roll limit cable

13.3.33 9CBL1152 – RADIUS MOTOR CABLE

500 mm

30 mm
2 Blue Wire
J1 -
Mains Flex 2x0.75 sqmm
- ON AMPL.
+ ON AMPL.
6CBL1056 J1 +
1 Brown Wire 10 mm STRIPPED
Strip both
wires 10mm
Connector is part of
Motor 2UNF0508 and is
mounted on the cable at
DDD.

9CBL1152 Radius motor cable

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-25

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.3.34 9CBL1154 – TABLE POWER CABLE
LABEL ON CONNECTOR

G9
40 mm

7 mm WEIDMÜLLER
BL3.5/3
BLU + BLU
1
2 x 0.75 mmsq 2
BRN BRN 3
600 mm

3PLG1216-A

9CBL1154 Table power cable

13.3.35 9CBL1157 – REGENERATE LOAD

REGEN
8cm 1/4" HSTubing
Brrown 6SLV0029
Pin 1
Brrown
Regen.
Ctrl.
Mainsflex 2x0.75sqmm Board
560Ohm/50W
6CBL1056-A01 H2
Blue 3PLG1216-A01
3RES1637
10mm
2cm ¼" HSTubing
6SLV0029

1
2
3

9CBL1157 Regen. load Regenerate load

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-26

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.3.36 9CBL1158 – REGENERATE INPUT CABLE
16cm

PWR
Pin 1
+HV Brown
Regen.
Ctrl.
Mainsflex 2x0.75sqmm
Board.
6CBL1056-A H1
GND Blue
3PLG1319

Brown
1
2
Blue 3
4

9CBL1158 Regen. input cable Regenerate input cable

13.3.37 9CBL1160 – SAFETY BOARD POWER CABLE

WEIDMÜLLER
BL3.5/4
E-STOP 24V
1
G12 2 C8
3
AWG20 RIBBON CABLE, E-STOP OUT
4
60 CM TOTAL
BLU
1
VIO
2 WEIDMÜLLER
GRY BL3.5/3
3
WHT +24V
1
4
2 C7
24V RET
3
Mate-N-Lock 4
Socket pins
SPLIT OVER 10 CM

9CBL1160 Safety brd power cbl Safety board power cable

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-27

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
13.3.38 9CBL1161 – MUSHROOM CABLE
G13 / G14
WEIDMÜLLER
BL3.5/3
2 x AWG 24
1
2
3

160 cm

9CBL1161 Mushroom cable

1MAN0343-B03 Philips Medical Systems, Inc. 13-28

07-2011 Proprietary and confidential information, refer to front cover
 0086
Manufactured for: Designed and developed by:
Philips Medical Systems (Cleveland), Inc. DDD-Diagnostic A/S
3860 North First Streen Dr. Neergaards Vej 5E
San Jose, CA 95134 Danish Science Park
Telephone 408 321 9100 DK-2970 Hørsholm, Denmark
800 538 8531 Telephone +45 45 768888
DDD part No. 1MAN0343-B03